JP2019063672A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preferably performing a display performance, while suppressing a processing load.SOLUTION: A plate-state polygon and a character shape object are stored in association with character kind information in a memory module 133. A VDP 135 reads out the plate-state polygon and the character shape object, on the basis of a drawing instruction from a display CPU 131, then creates drawing data on a frame buffer 142 using the read out image data. In a virtual three-dimensional space, the plate-state polygon is arranged so that, a face to which a texture is stuck, faces a viewpoint side, and the drawing data is created by projecting the face to which the texture is stuck.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory ( For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data in which a polygon to which a texture is attached is projected onto a plane from a desired viewpoint is created. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a stereoscopic image is displayed.

JP 2007-7465 A

  Here, it is considered that by displaying a large number of individual images, it is possible to flash the display effect to improve the player's attention. However, by displaying a large number of individual images, it is not preferable that the processing load for performing the display effect increases and processing omission occurs, while, for example, the number of individual images to be displayed is intentionally If measures are taken to simplify the display content such as reducing the amount, attention to the display effect can not be suitably increased.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably performing display effect of an image while suppressing a processing load.

The present invention
Display means having a display screen;
Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display control means causes a plurality of specific character images of the same type to be simultaneously displayed, and makes a part of the specific character images a relatively high definition image while a part of the specific character images is relatively low. It has character image display control means to make it a fine image,
The character image display control means
The high definition image and the low definition image are grouped together in a predetermined range of a part of the display screen, and the high definition image and the low definition image which are the group are a plurality of A first means for displaying a series of movements over the update timing;
In the case of display by the first means, a second means for displaying so as to sandwich the low definition image by a plurality of the high definition images;
A unit for relatively reducing the display size of a part of the character images and displaying the low definition image for the character images having a small display size in the case of display by the first means;
It is characterized by having.

  It becomes possible to well perform the display effect of the image while suppressing the processing load.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(j) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining a hardware configuration of a memory module. The flowchart which shows the data transfer process performed by a controller. The timing chart which shows the situation of data transfer. The flowchart which shows the main processing performed by display CPU. 5 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process executed by the display CPU. The flowchart which shows V interrupt processing performed by display CPU. The flowchart which shows the task processing performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list | wrist. 6 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that drawing data are produced with execution of drawing processing. The flowchart which shows the hidden surface processing using Z buffer performed by VDP. 6 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for masks performed by the display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete content of a 1st mask display. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete content of a 2nd mask display. 6 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for masks performed by the display CPU. The flowchart which shows the operation generation command corresponding | compatible process performed by display CPU. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the display mode background performed by display CPU. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for symbols performed by display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting processing for the background performed by VDP. 10 is a flowchart showing background drawing data creation processing executed by the VDP. The timing chart which shows the timing when the separate retention data for the 1st display mode and the separate preservation data for the 2nd display mode are created. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the information specified by a data table. The flowchart which shows the data setting processing for production which is executed with indicatory CPU. The flowchart which shows the data setting process performed by display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the rotation angle performed by display CPU. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a rotation angle group table. The flowchart which shows the setting processing for character production which is executed with VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that drawing data are produced with execution of drawing processing. The flowchart which shows the texture mapping processing of the production character which is executed with VDP. An explanatory view for explaining an effect of displaying a plurality of specific characters as one group Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the arrangement position of a character shape object and a plate-shaped polygon. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a connection object. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for connected objects performed by display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting processing for connected object production which is executed with VDP. (A)-(c) The explanatory view for explaining connected object production. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining a hardware configuration of a memory module. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list | wrist. 6 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane used as calculation object in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the task processing performed by display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that each individual image becomes control object. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the background data for scrolling. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect | action by the overlap area | region being set. 10 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for scroll background executed by the display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting processing of divided part data which is executed with VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the background data for small unit groups. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for displacement backgrounds performed by display CPU. (A)-(e) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the addition process of an effect image. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the 1st effect production performed with display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting processing for the 1st effect production performed by VDP. (A) A flowchart showing a first effect addition process, (b) an explanatory view for explaining a state of the first effect addition process. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing partial addition, (b) The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for 2nd effect presentation performed by display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting processing for the 2nd effect production which is executed with VDP. (A) A flowchart showing a second effect addition process, (b) an explanatory view for explaining a state of a second effect addition process. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for multiple effects production which is executed with indicatory CPU. (A) The flowchart which shows the setting processing for multiple effects production which is executed with VDP, (b) The explanatory view in order to explain the area for synthetic data. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(g) (alpha) data. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for symbols performed by display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing setting processing of symbol sprite data executed in VDP, (b) Explanatory diagram for describing a state in which partial display of symbols is performed. (A)-(h) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st another form. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd another form, (b) The flowchart which shows the setting processing of the symbol sprite data performed by VDP. (A) The flowchart which shows the character transition processing which is executed with VDP, (b)-(f) The explanatory view in order to explain the circumstances where character transition indication is done. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating wipe switching production. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the wipe change production which is executed with indicatory CPU. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing list created when wipe switching production is performed. The flowchart which shows the setting processing for the wipe change production which is executed with VDP. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating wipe switching production. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sprite for smooth movement, (b), (c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sprite data for displaying the sprite for smooth movement. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for smooth movement performed by display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing setting processing for smooth movement performed by VDP, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the setting process for smooth movement is performed. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the resolution adjustment by a scaler. 6 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for a zoom-in effect executed by the display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting processing for the zoom-in effect performed by VDP. 6 is a flowchart showing an output process performed by the display circuit. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of a zoom-in effect. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of moving image data. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content by moving image data. 6 is a flowchart showing a computing process for moving images executed by the display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a decoding process by a moving image decoder, (b) A flowchart showing a setting process for a moving image performed by the VDP. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a third embodiment. The flowchart which shows the operation processing for the background which is executed with the display CPU in 4th execution form.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) disposed behind the inner frame.

  An inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. In addition, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated backward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

  The gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip and has a function to lock the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. And has a function to lock the front door frame 14 against the inner frame in an unopenable manner. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  The game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating opening 23, a lower operating opening 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display unit 33, a display unit 34 and the like are provided. ing.

  When the ball is entered into the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating opening 23, and the lower operating opening 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 20. A payout of a predetermined number of winning balls is executed based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 20, and game balls which have not entered the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. Further, on the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are implanted to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and it is discharged not only from the gaming area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the gaming area after passing through the opening Not included. However, in the following description, the variable winning device 22, the upper operation opening 23, the lower operation opening 24 or the entry of the game ball to the through gate 25 is clearly entered in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of the game ball to the out port 27. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating opening 23 and the lower operating opening 24 are unitized as an operating opening device and installed on the game board 20. The upper operating opening 23 and the lower operating opening 24 are both open upward. Further, both operation ports 23 and 24 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 23 is on the upper side. The lower operating port 24 is provided with a motorized part 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supporting state or non-guided state) of the motorized part 24a, the gaming ball can not win the lower operating port 24, and the lower operating port is opened by the motorized part 24a being in the open state (supporting state or guiding state). It will be possible to win 24.

  The variable winning device 22 has a large winning opening 22a communicating with the back side of the game board 20, and an open / close door 22b for opening and closing the large winning opening 22a. The open / close door 22b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not win or is difficult to win, and the game ball is easy to win when it is won in the open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which transition is made when a big hit is won. The open / close execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening aspect of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit, with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings. There is an aspect to be done.

  The main display unit 33 and the character display unit 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the main display unit 33, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 as a trigger, and the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 is performed as a result of stopping the variable display. The result of the internal lottery made on the basis is clearly indicated by the display. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning on the upper operating opening 23 and the winning on the lower operating opening 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the row is based on the winning on the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24. The result of the internal lottery is clearly indicated on the main display 33 which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined display result is After being displayed and the fluctuation display is stopped, the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode.

  In addition, although the main display part 33 is comprised by the segment display which the some segment light emission part is arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display, It may be configured by a CRT, a dot matrix, or another type of display device. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 33, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which the color of the species is switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the prize display portion 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 25, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is Explicitly shown. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning on the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the electronic part opening state, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the symbol display portion 34 and the variable display is performed. After being stopped, shift to the open state. In the open state, the motorized accessory 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) symbols that are a kind of symbols. Further, a center frame 32 is disposed on the variable display unit 26 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. Thus, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and a disadvantage that the visibility of the display screen is reduced due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In the symbol display device 31, variable display of symbols is started based on winning on the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. That is, when the variable display is performed in the main display unit 33, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 31 in accordance with that. Then, for example, in the game round where the game result is a big hit result, in the symbol display device 31, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on an effective line set in advance.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a view individually showing the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a view showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 (a) to 2 (j), a pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine main designs each having a numeral "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped picture It is constituted by the sub pattern. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower are set as a plurality of display areas. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol . In the lower figure pattern row Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, ten main symbols are arranged and are configured by twenty symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 3 (b), the display screen G is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine patterns of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be. Further, on the display screen G, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set. Then, the variation display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is finished, the big hit moving picture is displayed as the occurrence of a normal big hit result or 15R probability variation big hit result described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to the "specific symbol", and when the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is displayed stopped. Also, the main symbol with an even number (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to the "non-specific symbol", and when a big hit usually occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed Ru.

  Moreover, when it becomes an explicit 2R probability variation big hit result which will be described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed. An explicit movie is displayed.

  In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described symbol. For example, only numbers may be variably displayed as a pattern.

  Also, based on winning on any of the operation openings 23, 24, variable display is started on the main display 33 and the symbol display device 31, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game play.

  In the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32, a first holding light emitting unit (first holding lamp unit) 35 corresponding to the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided. The number of game balls winning in the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of the held holdings is displayed by lighting of the first holding light emitting unit 35.

  At the upper right portion of the center frame 32, a second reserved light emitting unit (second reserved lamp unit) 36 corresponding to the character article display unit 34 is provided. The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 25 is suspended up to four times, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by lighting of the second reserved light emitting unit 36. Note that the function of each reserved light emitting unit 35, 36 may be performed by display in a partial area of the symbol display device 31.

  A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is constituted by the rail portion 37, and is fired from a game ball firing mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 20 in an inner frame. The game ball is guided to the top of the game area. In the gaming ball launch mechanism, the launch operation of the gaming ball is performed by operating the launch handle 41 provided in the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that enables the player to view substantially the entire game area from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel (not shown) is fitted therein. The window panel is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited thereto and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

  A light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42. A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window 42 as a part of the light emitting means. In addition, on both left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44, speaker units 45 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output are provided.

  Below the window portion 42 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 bulging toward the front side are vertically juxtaposed. An upper plate 46a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a similarly opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper tray 46a has a function for temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the later described payout device and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing the game balls which become surplus in the upper tray 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

  In the upper bulging portion 46, in the area facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, an effect operating device 48 having an operating portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operating device 48 is manually operated by the player in order to set the effect content on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 or the like as the predetermined effect content.

  On the back side of the inner frame, a main control device, an audio light emission control device, and a display control device are mounted. In addition, a back pack unit is provided on the back of the inner frame as described above, and the back pack unit includes a dispensing mechanism including a dispensing device, a dispensing control device, a power supply and a firing control device. Is mounted. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 has a main control board 51 which controls the main control of the game. Incidentally, in the main control unit 50, the substrate box accommodating the main control substrate 51 etc. is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening is provided. You may As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can not be separably joined, and the structure of the joining portion (crimping portion) which requires destruction of a predetermined portion in the case of separation, A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left on is pasted across the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between several case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  The MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 is a ROM 53 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

  As the ROM 53, storage means (that is, non-volatile storage means) that can be accessed randomly at the time of reading the control program and fixed value data and that do not require external power supply for storage are used. Specifically, NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as random access is possible, the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary. Further, the configuration in which the control and operation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions are separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

  The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power supply and emission control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply and launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 51 generates necessary operation power for each, and supplies the generated operation power. Incidentally, the operation power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 130 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply and emission control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and the power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52 when the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed, so that the MPU 52 executes processing for power failure. It is possible to

  Further, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As part of the various sensors, there is a detection sensor provided on a one-on-one basis for winning support entry parts such as general winning opening 21, variable winning device 22, upper operating opening 23, lower operating opening 24 and through gate 25. It is included, and in the MPU 52, a winning determination (entry determination) for each ball entry portion is performed. Further, the MPU 52 executes a big hit occurrence lottery and a big hit result type lottery based on winning on the upper actuation opening 23 and the lower actuation opening 24, and executes a reach occurrence lottery for each game round and a determination lottery for a display continuation period.

  Here, the structure for performing various lottery in MPU52 is demonstrated.

  The MPU 52 uses the various counter information during game play to perform a big hit lottery, setting of display of the main display 33, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting of display of the symbol display 34 and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, a symbol Change in reach random number counter C3 used for reach occurrence lottery when display device 31 deviates, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of big hit random number counter C1, and fluctuation in main display 33 and symbol display device 31 The variation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Furthermore, the electric combination release counter C4 used in the drawing of whether or not the electric combination 24a of the lower operation opening 24 is in the electric combination release state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and reaches a maximum value and returns to 0. Each counter is updated at a short time interval, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 54a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54. Among them, in the lottery counter buffer 54a, information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage when winning in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 occurs. It is stored in the holding ball storage area 54b as a means.

  The holding ball storage area 54b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The reserve area RE is provided with a first reserve area RE1, a second reserve area RE2, a third reserve area RE3 and a fourth reserve area RE4, according to the winning history to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. The numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a is stored in any one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, the first reserve area RE1 → the second reserve area RE1 → the second reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4 when winning in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 occurs a plurality of times consecutively. Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of RE 2 → third reserve area RE 3 → fourth reserve area RE 4. By providing four reserve areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, the game ball's winning history of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 is reserved and stored up to four at maximum. In addition, the holding area RE is provided with a holding number storage area NA, and in the holding number storage area NA, to specify the number for which the winning history to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is held and stored. Information is stored.

  The number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, five or more, or may be singular.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when the variable display of the main display section 33 is started, and at the start of one game cycle, Based on the various numerical value information stored in the execution area AE, the determination of success or failure is performed.

  The respective counters will be described in detail.

  Specifically, for each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and returned to zero after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hitting random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24.

  The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a yes / no table (winning information group) in a yes / no table storage area as the yes / no information group storage unit in the ROM 53. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high / low probability success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode (low probability state) and the high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the hit / fall lottery means.

  Under the gaming state where the low probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state where the high-probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is twenty. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the lottery means after completion of the opening / closing execution mode, (3) under the end of the opening / closing execution mode A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the motorized accessory 24 a of the operation port 24.

  As an aspect of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening and closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winnings on the variable winning device 22 is relatively high and low between the start and the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed 15 times (number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 seconds (high frequency time) Is continued until the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high-frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed twice (the number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time) Is continued until the number of winning prizes for the large winning opening 22a reaches 6 (low frequency number).

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the release handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 58 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is emitted toward the game area in 0.6 sec. . On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one big winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening 22a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, winning of the gaming ball does not substantially occur.

  In the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of opening and closing of the special winning opening 22a, the open limit time (or open limit period for one open) and the open limit number for one open are in the high frequency finish mode. If the frequency of occurrence of winnings on the variable winning device 22 in the period from when the opening / closing execution mode is started to the end is higher than in the low frequency winning mode, the value is not limited to the above value. It is optional. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a greater number of opening and closing times, a longer opening limit time for one opening, or a greater number of opening limits for one opening than the low frequency winning mode. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning of the variable winning device 22 occurs in the open / close execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode It is good to be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the gaming ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, one opening is The product of the firing cycle of the gaming balls and the release limit number may be set to be longer than the release limit time. Also, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one big winning opening 22a are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which winning of the variable winning device 22 substantially does not occur.

  As a support mode in the motorized character 24a of the lower operation port 24, when compared in the situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric character 24a of the lower operation port 24 Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening state per unit time becomes relatively high and low And is set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of being in the electronic combination open state in the electric combination open lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the motorized jack 24a is released when the electronic-wiring-released state is elected is set to a greater number of times than in the low-frequency support mode. The time is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state is elected and the open state of the motorized accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one open time. Furthermore, the high frequency support mode has a shorter time than the low frequency support mode as a securing time that is minimally secured after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed and the next electric combination opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the winning of the lower operation port 24 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the upper operation port 23 is higher than that of the lower operation port 24 but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operation port 24 to the lower operation port 24. The probability of winning will increase. And, when the winning a prize to the lower operation opening 24 occurs, because the payout of the specified number of game balls is executed, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the balls much be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is to be in the open state per unit time than in the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It is also possible to increase the probability of being in the electronic combination open state winning state in. In addition, a securing time (for example, based on the winning on the through gate 25) is secured on the occasion where the next electric combination opening lottery is performed after one electric combination opening lottery is performed (for example In the configuration where multiple types of variable display to be executed are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that the short securing time is easier to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is extended, and the securing time secured upon the next electric combination opening lottery being performed after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed (i.e., shorter) And one of the condition of any combination or any combination of the shortening of the average time of the securing time and the increase of the winning probability. This may enhance the advantage of the frequent support mode over the low frequency support mode.

  The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 53. And as such a distribution destination, usually a big hit result (low probability correspondence special game result), an explicit 2R probability variation big hit result (an explicit high probability response game result or a sudden definite change state result), a 15R probability variation big hit result (high probability) The corresponding special game result is set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, in the high-frequency support mode, the transition to the low-frequency support mode is made when the number of games has reached the end reference frequency (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the normal jackpot state (low probability correspondence special game state).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. . The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and shifts to the jackpot state by it. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result to shift the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and shifts to the jackpot state by it. In other words, the 15R probability variation big hit result is a jackpot result to shift the gaming state to the 15R probability variation big hit state (high probability correspondence special game state).

  Note that the normal gaming state refers to the state where the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, in relation to the above-mentioned respective gaming states.

  In the distribution table, among the values of "0 to 29" jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" usually correspond to the jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result "15-29" correspond to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, the aspect of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified by the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result being set as the probability variation jackpot result. That is, when comparing the two types of probability variation big win results, the advantage for the player is the high frequency winning mode in the opening and closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode is the highest 15R probability variation jackpot result, opening and closing execution In the support mode, although it becomes the low frequency winning mode in the mode, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result becoming the high frequency support mode becomes the lowest. Thereby, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  In addition, as one kind of probability variation big hit result, opening and closing execution mode becomes low frequency winning mode, furthermore, after completion of opening and closing execution mode, as well as acceptance lottery mode becomes high probability mode, support mode is maintained in the mode until then The implicit 2R probability variation big hit result (intense high probability correspondence game result or the result of becoming a latent certainty change state) which is different may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probability variation jackpot result is achieved.

  Furthermore, as one kind of out result in the success or failure lottery, while transitioning to the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the special out result that transition of the success or failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur after the end may be included. . In the configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability variation big hit result and the special outlier result as described above are set, the open / close execution mode transitions to the low frequency win mode and the support mode remains in the previous mode. While it is common in that it is common that the transition mode of the lottery mode is different, for example, when either an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or an exceptional result occurs in the normal gaming state, It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 31. Expected effect is provided with the symbol display device 31 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (pattern), and the variable display of the variable winning device 22 is a high frequency winning mode and variable display In the gaming machine in which the subsequent stop display result is a special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (pattern) in the symbol display device 31 is started, and then the stop display result is derived and displayed. This is a display state to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result.

  Two types of expectation rendering are set up: the above-mentioned reach display, and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the occurrence of a special display result in a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is made by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31. A combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, a display state in which the variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows is included. Further, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, or Also, it is possible to perform reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or non-displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  Regarding reach display according to the fluctuation display of the symbol, specifically, the high-frequency winning mode is generated on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 31 as a step before the fluctuation display of the symbol is ended. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may be a combination of corresponding big hit symbols, and the variation display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol row under the situation where the reach line is formed. It is to do.

  If the display contents of FIG. 3 are specifically explained, first, in the state where the variation display of symbols is finished in symbol row Z1 of the upper row and the variation display of symbols is finished in symbol row Z3 of the lower row further, any one is effective A reach line is formed by stopping display of the main symbols with the same number attached to the lines L1 to L5, and the variation display of symbols is performed in the middle row of the symbol row Z2 in a situation where the reach line is formed. It becomes a reach indication by being treated. Then, when the high frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is ended.

  In the advance notice display, after variation display of symbols is started on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or a part of the symbol rows In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Further, the background image may be a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, or the pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be the predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice may occur at any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time to shift to the open / close execution mode. In addition, in game times which are not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing is referred to in response to the occurrence of reach display with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. Will be executed if On the other hand, the main control unit 50 does not determine whether to display the advance notice, but the sound emission control unit 60 does.

  For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 52 determines the fluctuation display time (display continuation period) in the main display unit 33 and the fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 31 (display continuation period). The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the main display section 33 and the time of the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of the fluctuation start of the symbol by the symbol display device 31. In addition, when determining the fluctuation display time, the fluctuation display time table (variation display time information group) stored in advance in the fluctuation display time table storage area (variation display time information storage unit) of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  For example, the motor-operated combination release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 250, and to return to zero after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold combination area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the motorized jack 24a in the open state based on the value of the stored motorized jack release counter C4.

  A payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power supply and emission control device 57 is connected. The payout ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55, for example, based on the result of the winning determination on the winning combination ball entry unit. The payout control device 55 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 50. The power supply and emission control device 57 transmits a release permission command based on the fact that the emission handle 41 is operated. Based on the release permission command received from the main control device 50, the power supply and release control device 57 drives the game ball emission mechanism 58 to cause the game balls to be emitted toward the game area.

  Further, the main display unit 33 and the symbol display unit 34 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the main display unit 33 and the symbol display unit 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 52 at each game play. Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not the motorized combination 24a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the combination display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 52, a variable winning driving unit for opening and closing the opening and closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22 and an electric combination driving unit for opening and closing the electric combination 24a of the lower operation port 24 are connected. . That is, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the motorized product 24a is won, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the motorized product drive unit so that the motorized product 24a is opened and closed.

  Further, the sound emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and transmits various commands for effect to the sound emission control device 60.

  Here, the process executed by the MPU 52 will be briefly described.

  The MPU 52 repeatedly executes predetermined game progression processing after power-on. In the pachinko machine 10, the normal process repeatedly executed in the first cycle and the second cycle shorter than the first cycle are activated as the game progressing process, and are executed by interrupting the normal process. The timer interrupt process is set, but the specific process configuration is arbitrary as long as the progress of the game can be controlled.

  As part of the game progressing process, an acquisition process of hold information, a game time control process, a game state transition process, and a process for demonstration display are set. In the process of obtaining hold information, if a prize winning on the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is detected in a situation where the hold information of the hold upper limit number is not stored in hold in the hold ball storage area 54b, a lottery is made at that time. A process of storing the combination of the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the counter buffer 54a in the holding sphere storage area 54b as holding information Ru. In addition, it is as having having already demonstrated that reservation information is time-sequentially stored in the 1st reservation area RE1-the 4th reservation area RE4.

  In the game number control process, the data shift process of the holding ball storage area 54b is performed under the condition that the holding information is not stored in the holding ball storage area 54b and is not in any of the game times being executed or in the opening / closing execution mode. Is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first reserve area RE1 of the reserve area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the data stored in the first reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4 are shifted in order to the lower area side. In addition, when the data shift process is executed, a winning lottery process, a type determination process, and a game start process are executed.

  In the lottery process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot will be won by referring to the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 among the suspension information shifted to the execution area AE and the table of chances corresponding to the current lottery mode. judge. When the jackpot is won, the type determination process is further executed. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified with reference to the numerical value information related to the jackpot type counter C2 among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE, and the distribution table.

  In the processing for starting the game, whether or not the reach occurs even if the jackpot is not won by referring to the numerical information on the reach random number counter C3 among the suspension information shifted to the execution area AE and the reach table Determine Further, in the processing for starting the game, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the big hit, the type of big hit, and the presence or absence of reach is read from the ROM 53, and the read variable display time table and the variation type counter CS at that timing. The variable display time of the current game is determined from the numerical information. Then, in the processing for starting a game, while causing the main display unit 33 to start variable display of the pattern corresponding to the determined variable display time, a change command including information of the variable display time, presence or absence of a big hit and The voice emission control device 60 is transmitted with a type command including jackpot type information.

  By the way, the fluctuation display time is determined by reading out the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot, the jackpot type, and the reach occurrence, so the fluctuation command includes information on the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. It can be said that Further, as described later, since the voice emission control device 60 determines the type of reach display according to the fluctuation display time, it can be said that the fluctuation command includes information on reach type.

  In addition, in the game times control process, the process during the variable display is executed during execution of the game times, and when the variable display time determined in the process for start of change has elapsed, the game times in the main display unit 33 The variation display of the pattern is ended in the state where the stop result corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot and the jackpot type is displayed. Further, an end command for instructing the sound emission control device 60 to end the game play is transmitted.

  In the gaming state transition process, the transition process to the opening / closing execution mode is executed when the game round corresponding to the big hit is finished, and the opening / closing process of the big winning opening 22a in the variable winning device 22 is started. When the open / close execution mode is started, during the open / close execution mode, or when the open / close execution mode is ended, various commands for the open / close execution mode are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. Further, when the open / close execution mode is ended, transition to the lottery mode or transition to the support mode is executed in correspondence with the jackpot type according to the game round which is the start timing of the mode.

  In the processing for demonstration display, a start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for demonstration start predetermined in advance does not start without a new game play being started after the game play ends in a situation where the open / close execution mode is not in progress. Execute determination processing whether or not it has been done. In addition, after the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period for demonstration start (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without newly starting a game play. Execute determination processing whether or not it has been done. Then, if it is determined that it has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  In addition, a demonstration display means the thing of the waiting for start display displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, when the predetermined start waiting period has passed. In the demonstration image, an image is displayed in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are performing a predetermined operation, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the symbols perform a predetermined operation Alternatively, after or instead of the display of the displayed image, a moving image of a maker name, a model name or a predetermined character may be displayed. In addition, in a configuration in which demonstration display is performed by animation of symbols variably displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the last game round may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demonstration display can be diversified.

<Speech emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the sound emission control device 60 includes a sound emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

  As the ROM 63, storage means (that is, non-volatile storage means) that can be accessed randomly at the time of reading the control program and fixed value data and that do not require external power supply for storage are used. Specifically, NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as random access is possible, the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary. Further, the configuration in which the control and operation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions are separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The operation device 48 for performance and the main control device 50 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and various light emitting units 35, 36, 44, the speaker unit 45, and the display control device 130 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62 There is.

  By receiving the fluctuation command transmitted from the main control device 50, the MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start an effect for game circulation, and executes a game circulation effect start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that it is necessary to end the effects for the game use, and the effect for ending the game use is executed. Also, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that it is necessary to start the jackpot effect or it is necessary to proceed, and the jackpot effect processing is executed. Also, by receiving the command for demonstration display transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to start the demonstration display, and executes the processing for demonstration display.

  Note that receiving a command from the main control device 50 in the MPU 62 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 50, but also includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received.

  In the game-use effect start process, the process of grasping the fluctuation display time for grasping the fluctuation display time (display continuation period) of the corresponding game time and the presence or absence of the reach display are grasped based on both commands of fluctuation command and type command. The reach display grasping process to be performed, the grasping process of jackpot result occurrence which grasps the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and the jackpot classification process of grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. Further, based on the grasped result in reach display grasping process, jackpot result occurrence grasping process and jackpot type grasping process, a symbol for determining the type of symbol to be displayed on display screen G of symbol display device 31 in the final game round Execute type identification processing. Then, based on the result of each grasping process, the display control device, the fluctuation pattern command including the information of fluctuation display time and the information of the type of display effect, and the symbol designation command including the information of the type of symbol to be displayed in the final stop Send to 130

  Further, in the game-use effect start process, in addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, a notice display lottery process as to whether or not to perform notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the advance notice is also executed. Then, if it is determined that the advance notice display has been generated, a notice command including the information of the notice display type is transmitted to the display control device 130.

  In addition, in the game circulation effect start process, the display light emission table for the game circulation and the voice table for the game circulation are read out from the ROM 63 based on the processing result of each of the above processes. The light emission aspect of the display light emission part 44 in the advancing process of applicable game times is prescribed | regulated by the display light emission table for game times. In addition, an output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progressing process of the corresponding game number is defined by the sound table for the game number.

  In the game turn effect end process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game turn are ended. In addition, in the game circulation effect end process, an end command including information to be ended of the game circulation effect is transmitted to the display control device 130.

  In the jackpot effect processing, based on the received various commands for jackpot effect, it grasps the effect mode such as opening time, each round time, each round time, each round time and ending time, and for the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped result Command is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for the big hit effect and the voice table for the big hit effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 45 during the big hit effect To define.

  In the process for demonstration display, the presentation mode of the demonstration display is grasped based on the received command for demonstration display, and the demonstration display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for demonstration display and the voice table for demonstration display are read out from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of sound from the speaker unit 45 during demonstration display To define.

  The processing executed by the MPU 62 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 is the processing for controlling the light emission of the first reserved light emitting unit 35 and the second reserved light emitting unit 36 besides the above processing. included.

  Further, the MPU 62 recognizes that the effect operating device 48 is operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the effect operating device 48 based on the operation of the operation unit of the effect operating device 48. And execute operation handling processing. In addition, even when the state being operated is released, it is recognized by the fall of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding processing is executed.

  Here, as a part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the operation device 48 for effect, an effect is performed such that the image displayed on the symbol display device 31 is shifted to a different position on the two-dimensional plane. A plurality of positions, specifically two positions, are set as the shiftable positions. Corresponding to this, the operation unit of the operation device for effect 48 is provided as, for example, a cross key or an operation lever that can be rotated in a plurality of directions so as to be able to specify the plurality of positions individually. The device 48 transmits an operation signal corresponding to each operation. In the operation corresponding process, an operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and an operation generation command including information on the operation of the operation device for effect 48 and information on the operation mode is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, in the operation corresponding process, when the operation of the operation unit is released, the operation release command is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, in the operation response process, in addition to the transmission of the command, the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 45 are defined to correspond to the operation of the operation device 48 for effect. .

<Display control device 130>
The hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described.

  The display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted, as shown in FIG. .

  The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program or the like. In detail, the display CPU 131 is connected to the input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137 Be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 131 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice emission control device 60, but also includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received. Be

  The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133 and the VRAM 134 via the bus, and based on the command received from the audio light emission control device 60, various data stored in the memory module 133 are stored in the work RAM 132 or VRAM 134. Give a transfer instruction to transfer. In addition, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and based on a command received from the audio light emission control device 60, instructs drawing on the symbol display device 31 to display a 3D image. The memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described below.

  The memory module 133 stores control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and also stores various image data (image information) for displaying a 3D image. It is a storage means. The memory module 133 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory which does not require an external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 130 is satisfactorily performed. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-write memory as a read only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The various image data stored in the memory module 133 includes image data for an object such as a symbol or a character displayed on the symbol display device 31, image data for a texture to be attached to the object, and one frame And the image data for the back side which composes the image of the rearmost side in the image of FIG.

  Here, an object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system (world space), which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons It is. A polygon is a polygon plane defined by vertices of a plurality of three-dimensional coordinates. For example, in order to apply a surface model, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set in the image data for an object, with reference coordinates preset for each object as an origin. That is, in the image data for each object, relative positions (that is, orientations and sizes) of the polygons are three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

  A texture is an image to be attached to each polygon of an object. By attaching a texture to an object, a display image including an image corresponding to the object, such as a pattern or a character, is generated. The way of holding the image data for texture is arbitrary, but includes, for example, at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette table to be referred to in determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is.

  The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image. The way of holding the image data for the back is arbitrary, but for example, two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state of being compressed. Incidentally, when the image data for the back side is arranged in the world coordinate system, a plate polygon is used.

  The work RAM 132 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 133 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 130 is satisfactorily performed. The work RAM 132 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the display CPU 131 corresponding to the control data. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into the internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 134 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 134 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 130 is satisfactorily performed. The VRAM 134 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  The VRAM 134 includes an expansion buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the VDP 135 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144 and a mode buffer 145, the details of which will be described later.

  The VDP 135 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. This is a kind of drawing circuit for operating the image processing device 31b incorporated so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 135 is formed into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, a display mode control unit 154, and a display circuit 155. Further, these circuits are connected to one another via a bus, and also connected to an I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and an I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

  The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 causes the register 153 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131. The geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object specified as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display screen G finally.

  The rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and pastes the texture on each clipped object based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, and determines the appearance of the object. In addition, the rendering unit 152 projects each object on a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, performs various adjustments based on depth information, and performs frame adjustment of drawing data for one frame, which is two-dimensional data. Create at 142 The drawing data for one frame refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Note that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list, a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute processing according to the contents of the above. In addition, the control program may be read from the memory module 133 in advance. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute the processing only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

  Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of the frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame areas 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green) and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  The present invention is not limited to the full color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  By providing the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b in the frame buffer 142, drawing on the symbol display device 31 is executed using drawing data created in one of the frame areas. Creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

  In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is generated based on the drawing data generated in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is generated in the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 31 through the connected output port 138. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame regions 142 a and 142 b to be output to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 31 and converted into gradation data. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 31 is generated and output based on the gradation data. The display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

  Further, when displaying an image corresponding to the display mode, the display mode control unit 154 executes a predetermined process based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. The predetermined process will be described later.

<Specific Configuration of Memory Module 133>
Next, the specific configuration of the memory module 133 will be described.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram for explaining a hardware configuration of the memory module 133. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory module 133 is configured by packaging the controller 161 and the NAND flash memory 162 into one package.

  The NAND flash memory 162 is provided with a memory cell array, and in the memory cell array, a control program area 163 storing control program data of the display CPU 131 and an image for display on the symbol display device 31. An image data area 164 storing image data to be used is provided.

  An area 164 for image data is an object storage area 165 storing image data for an object, a texture storage area 166 storing image data for a texture, and a back image storage area storing image data for a back It has 167 and. Further, in the object storage area 165, there is provided a connected object storage area 165a in which image data for connected objects is stored. Linked objects will be described in detail later.

  The controller 161 transmits / receives data between the NAND flash memory 162 and the main body I / F 171 which transmits / receives data between the display CPU 131 as the transfer instruction source and the work RAM 132 and VRAM 134 as the data transfer destination. / F 172, a controller CPU 173 that is a control unit that performs data control processing in the controller 161 and physical block management processing of the NAND flash memory 162, a control ROM 174 and control RAM 175, and a NAND flash based on a transfer instruction from the controller CPU 173 A transfer execution circuit 176 for reading data from the memory 162, a cache memory 177 for temporarily storing data read by the transfer execution circuit 176, and a NAND flash memo An error correction circuit 178 performs correction of the read error detection and the detected errors in the data from the 162, and a.

  In general, the NAND flash memory 162 is used avoiding the block even if there is a block containing a defect in the memory cell array. And the presence or absence of this bad block and a site | part differ for every solid. Therefore, the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133 needs to be associated with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 162, and the association is executed by the controller CPU 173.

  In detail, in the control ROM 174, an address management table (address management information group) for correlating the logical address with the address of each page of the physical block is stored in advance. The address designation command received from the display CPU 131 is temporarily stored in the address designation buffer of the control RAM 175. When the address designation command is stored in the control RAM 175, the controller CPU 173 reads the address management table from the control ROM 174, and grasps the page address of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, the transfer execution circuit 176 performs data transfer so that a transfer instruction is issued from the controller CPU 173 to the transfer execution circuit 176 and data of a physical address related to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177. Processing is performed. The data transferred to the cache memory 177 is transferred to the work RAM 132 or VRAM 134.

  Incidentally, a random access memory such as a mask ROM or a NOR type flash memory is used as the control ROM 174. The cache memory 177 has a read speed (transfer speed) faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162 when comparing data read with the same capacity. Specifically, a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply to store data is provided, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used.

  In addition, the memory module 133 is provided with a boot memory 179 in which boot data for initial boot in the display CPU 131 is stored in advance. A mask ROM is used as the boot memory 179 so that random access can be made, and when compared by reading data of the same capacity, one having a faster reading speed (transfer speed) than the NAND flash memory 162 It is used. The boot memory 179 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data read speed is faster than the NAND flash memory 162, and an internal power supply such as a battery May be a DRAM unit or an SRAM unit.

  The storage capacity of the boot memory 179 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 162. Specifically, the storage capacity is the same as, substantially the same as, or similar to the storage capacity for one page in the NAND flash memory 162. Boot data for initial boot is stored in advance in the boot memory 179, and when processing at the initial boot is executed in the display CPU 131, data from the boot memory 179 instead of the NAND flash memory 162 is used. Is read out. As boot data for initial startup, an instruction code for performing initial setting of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135, and an instruction code for transferring data stored in the NAND flash memory 162 to the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134 are set.

  Here, the data transfer process executed by the controller 161 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The data transfer process is activated when the control RAM 175 stores an unprocessed address specification command.

  First, in step S101, it is determined whether or not the current address specification relates to access to the boot memory 179. If the process relates to the access to the boot memory 179, the process of transferring the boot data of the boot memory 179 to the display CPU 131 is executed in step S102, and then the data transfer process is ended. Thus, the boot data is read out by the display CPU 131.

  On the other hand, if it does not relate to the access to the boot memory 179 (step S101: NO), that is, if it relates to the access to the NAND flash memory 162, the process proceeds to step S103. Incidentally, although the details will be described later, the execution timing of the transfer instruction in this case is the timing before the timing when the program data and image data stored in the NAND flash memory 162 become necessary in the display CPU 131 and VDP 135 And transfer to the VRAM 134 is set to be completed.

  In step S103, it is determined whether or not the address is a target address of predicted transfer. The target address of the predictive transfer means a physical address corresponding to the logical address of one page continuous to the logical address when the logical address designation of one page is given from the display CPU 131.

  When it is not the target address of the predictive transfer (step S103: NO), the physical address corresponding to the logical address to be designated at this time is grasped by using the address management table in step S104. By this processing, even in the configuration using the NAND flash memory 162 in which a defective block is likely to occur at the time of data writing, it is possible to satisfactorily associate the physical address with the logical address.

  At the subsequent step S105, the controller CPU 173 instructs the transfer execution circuit 176 to transfer the data stored at the physical address thus identified from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177. Thus, transfer of the data to the cache memory 177 is started.

  In the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether the transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. When the transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, in step S107, a data transfer instruction relating to the target address of the predicted transfer is executed. As a result, the transfer execution circuit 176 starts transfer of the data stored in the physical address corresponding to the logical address following the logical address of the data transferred immediately before to the cache memory 177.

  In this case, the cache memory 177 has a storage capacity capable of simultaneously storing data of a plurality of pages, specifically, two pages. Then, in the transfer execution circuit 176, when transferring data relating to the target address of the predicted transfer to the cache memory 177, the data of the immediately preceding address that triggered the prediction is data transferred to the cache memory 177. The data relating to the target address of the predictive transfer is transferred so as not to be erased, that is, to an area different from the area where the data is stored. As a result, it is possible to prevent data in the process of transfer from the cache memory 177 to the work RAM 132 or VRAM 134 from being erased at the time of transfer of data relating to the target address of the predicted transfer.

  In the following step S108, processing is performed to transfer the data determined in step S106 that transfer to the cache memory 177 has been completed to the side of the work RAM 132 and VRAM 134 set as the transfer destination target. In this case, when transmitting the address specification command, the display CPU 131 transmits the information on the RAM of the data transfer destination and the transfer destination address as a separate command included in the address specification command. Therefore, in step S108, the data is transferred to the transfer destination address which is the designated transfer destination RAM.

  Thereafter, in step S109, it is determined whether data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the transfer destination has been completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. When the data transfer to the transfer destination object is completed (step S109: YES), the data transfer process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S103 that the current address specification is related to the target address of the predictive transfer, the process proceeds to step S106 without executing the processes of steps S104 and S105. Then, when the transfer of the data relating to the address designation to the cache memory 177 is completed (step S106: YES), the processing of step S107 to step S109 is executed, and the data transfer processing is ended.

  The state of data transfer will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 8 (A) shows how data is transferred from the boot memory 179, FIG. 8 (a) shows a read request from the display CPU 131, and FIG. 8 (b) shows how the data is transferred from the boot memory 179. It is a state of data transfer of Further, FIG. 8B shows a state in which data of the NAND type flash memory 162 is transferred, FIG. 8C shows a state of a read request from the display CPU 131, and FIG. 8D is for cache. FIG. 8E shows a state of data transfer to the memory 177, and FIG. 8E shows a state of data transfer from the cache memory 177.

  First, the case where data is transferred from the boot memory 179 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, an address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 131 at timing t1, and the controller CPU 173 recognizes reception of the address designation command at timing t2.

  Thereafter, at time t3, the controller CPU 173 recognizes that boot data in the boot memory 179 is designated as a read target, and data transfer from the boot memory 179 is started. In this case, the period from when the controller CPU 173 recognizes the read request from the display CPU 131 to when the data transfer is started is T1. Thereafter, at time t4, the data transfer is completed.

  Next, the case where data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, an address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 131 at the timing of t5, and the reception of the address designation command is recognized in the controller CPU 173 at the timing of t6.

  Thereafter, at time t7, the controller CPU 173 recognizes that the data in the NAND flash memory 162 is designated as a read target, and the physical address corresponding to the designated logical address is further grasped. The page corresponding to the physical address is sequentially recognized in the transfer execution circuit 116, and data transfer to the cache memory 177 is started. In this case, recognition of the physical address corresponding to the logical address and recognition not by random access but by sequential recognition are performed, so that the period T2 from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7 is from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3. It is longer than the period T1.

  Thereafter, at time t8, when data transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the transfer target RAM is started. In this case, the period from when the controller CPU 173 recognizes the read request from the display CPU 131 to when data transfer to the transfer destination RAM is started is T3 and data transfer from the boot memory 179 is performed. It is longer than the period T1 required to start.

  Thereafter, transfer of data corresponding to the target address of the predicted transfer to the cache memory 177 is started at the timing of t9 during the data transfer to the RAM. In this case, since the physical address corresponding to the continuous logical address may be designated by the transfer execution circuit 176 in the controller CPU 173, the address of the defective block is temporarily interposed between the physical addresses corresponding to the continuous logical address. Even if this is done, by associating the continuity in advance, the time required to recognize the physical address can be shortened compared to the case where the physical address is recognized from the addressing command. In addition, the image data group for performing predetermined | prescribed effects, such as a super reach display, is stored over the some physical block.

  Thereafter, at time t10, data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the transfer target RAM is completed. Then, a new address specification command is transmitted from the display CPU 131. Incidentally, although the NOR type flash memory is separately provided with the address terminal and the data input / output terminal, the memory module 133 having the NAND type flash memory 162 has the address terminal and the data input / output terminal as its specification. Are not provided separately. Therefore, after data transfer from the cache memory 177 is performed, the display CPU 131 transmits an address designation command.

  Thereafter, at time t11, transfer of data relating to the predicted transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, and at time t12, the controller CPU 173 recognizes the reception of a new address specification command from the display CPU 131. Since the logical address specified by the address specification command corresponds to the logical address of the data targeted for the predicted transfer, the cache memory for the data targeted for the predicted transfer at the subsequent timing of t13. The transfer to the transfer destination RAM is started from 177.

  In this case, the period from when the controller CPU 173 recognizes the read request from the display CPU 131 to when the data transfer is started is T4. As described above, the data related to the predicted transfer is started while the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the RAM is being performed, and the start timing is earlier than the read request from the display CPU 131 is performed. It is the timing of Therefore, the period T4 is shorter than the period T3 required to start data transfer when data is read from the NAND flash memory 162 without performing predicted transfer. Incidentally, the period T4 is shorter than the period T1 required to start data transfer from the boot memory 179, but is not limited to this and may be longer than the period T1. Thereafter, at time t14, transfer of data relating to the predicted transfer is completed.

  Note that when data transfer related to predicted transfer continues, a transfer mode in which the period required for data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the RAM to start in response to a read request from the display CPU 131 is T4. Will be continuous. On the other hand, when the logical address of the data related to the predicted transfer does not match the logical address related to the read request from the display CPU 131, the time required for the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the RAM to start is T3. Data transfer is performed in the following manner.

  As described above, the NAND flash memory 162 is used as a memory for storing control program data and image data in advance, thereby achieving a large capacity while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Can. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 162, repetitive rewriting can be performed in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the development cost can also be suppressed. In addition, recycling becomes possible. In particular, by storing both data in a single memory module 133 instead of storing control program data and image data in separate memories, the transfer path to and from the display CPU 131 can be made compact. Can.

  However, the NAND flash memory 162 has a slower data transfer speed than the NOR flash memory due to its specifications. On the other hand, supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started because the boot data for initial boot is stored in advance in the boot memory 179 which is faster than the NAND flash memory 162 in reading speed. In the case where the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display CPU 131 can quickly start the process for the initial activation. Therefore, as compared with a configuration in which program data for initial startup is stored in the NAND flash memory 162, control in the display CPU 131 can be smoothly started.

  In addition, data for which the logical address is continuous with respect to the data specified as the transfer target from the display CPU 131 is regarded as the data related to the predicted transfer, and the data for one page is transferred from the cache memory 177 to the transfer target RAM. Using the period, data relating to the predicted transfer is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177 in advance. As a result, the time required for data transfer of pages having consecutive logical addresses can be shortened. Then, the display CPU 131 reads out program data transferred to the work RAM 132 in advance to execute processing, and the VDP 135 reads out image data transferred to the VRAM 134 in advance to execute processing so that each of the processes is performed. Data transfer waiting time can be avoided, and each process can be made to progress smoothly.

  The NAND flash memory 162 and the boot memory 179 are formed into a single package as the memory module 133, and management of data read from the memories 163 and 179 is performed by the controller CPU 173. Thereby, the display CPU 131 may transmit an address designation command to the controller CPU 173 regardless of which of the NAND flash memory 162 and the boot memory 179 performs data transfer. As a result, the configuration of the signal path related to the transmission of the command can be simplified. Further, in the memory module 133, the portion receiving the command from the display CPU 131 is integrated into the I / F 171, so that the configuration of the signal path can be simplified also from this point.

  Incidentally, when reading data, the NAND flash memory 162 needs to input a write command signal to the WE terminal, but the controller 161 pulls up the HWE (HOST WRITE ENABLE) terminal to which the write command signal is externally input. While the FWE (FLASH WRITE ENABLE) terminal of the controller 161 is connected to the WE terminal of the NAND flash memory 162, the input of a substantial write command signal from the outside of the controller 161 is disabled while the NAND is disabled. A pseudo write command signal is input to the mold flash memory 162. Therefore, while making it possible to satisfactorily read data from the NAND flash memory 162, unauthorized alteration of data in the NAND flash memory 162 is prevented.

<Expansion Buffer 141 of Work RAM 132 and VRAM 134>
Next, the work RAM 132 to which data is transferred in advance from the memory module 133 and the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 will be described.

  First, the work RAM 132 will be described.

  In the work RAM 132, as shown in FIG. 4, the transferred data may be used after it has been used once, while the situation where it may be used thereafter continues, specifically to the power to itself. While the supply is continued, there are provided a common area 132a for storing and holding, and a change area 132b to be overwritten upon transfer of other data after use.

  Program data required to advance main processing, V interrupt processing, command interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is written in the regular area 132a. By providing the common area 132a, it is possible to smoothly start main processing, V interrupt processing and command interrupt processing which are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals.

  If it is necessary to temporarily store data exceeding the storage capacity of the change area 132b, all or part of the data in the common area 132a is within a range that does not hinder the smooth execution of processing by the display CPU 131. May be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary to restore the data to the common area 132a by the start of the corresponding processing.

  Program data necessary for executing a subroutine started as necessary in each process is written in the change area 132b. In addition, program data required for a subroutine to be executed next may be transferred to the change area 132b during the execution of a predetermined subroutine, but the program data of the subroutine being executed may be transferred. It is done not to erase. By providing the change area 132 b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 132 is smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control unit 50, backup power is not supplied to the work RAM 132. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the data stored in the work RAM 132 is erased or destroyed.

  Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 will be described.

  Specifically, the development buffer 141 continues supplying power to itself while the situation in which the transferred image data may be used even after being used continues. In the meantime, a regular area 141a for storing and holding, and a change area 141b to be overwritten when transferring other image data after use are provided.

  Image data for an object, image data for a texture, and image data for a back surface, which are used when the variable display of a symbol is started in the symbol display device 31, are written in the regular area 141a. Abnormality notification data to be used when displaying an abnormality notification image when an abnormality is detected is written. Due to the provision of the common area 141a, even if drawing instructions are suddenly issued from the display CPU 131, the VDP 135 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the common area 141a. it can.

  When it is necessary to temporarily store image data exceeding the storage capacity of the change area 141b, all or one of the commonly used area 141a can be displayed without inhibiting smooth image display on the symbol display device 31. The data of a part may be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary to restore the image data to the common area 141a by the drawing timing of the corresponding image.

  Image data for an object, image data for a texture, image data for a back surface, and the like are written in the change area 141 b. In addition, image data required for the next effect may be transferred to the area for change 141b during execution of the predetermined effect, but the transfer deletes the image data necessary for the effect during execution Not to be done. By providing the change area 141 b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the expansion buffer 141 is smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control device 50, backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 134. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the data stored in the VRAM 134 is erased or destroyed.

<Basic Process in Display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, the main processing to be started when the supply of the operation power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main processing.

  In the main process, first, in step S201, an initialization process is performed. In the initial setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10, first, at step S301, a transfer request for boot data is issued to the memory module 133. That is, the address indicating the boot memory 179 is written in the area to be first referred to in the address map of the display CPU 131, and the address designation command is transmitted to the memory module 133 based on the information.

  Thereafter, in step S302, it is determined whether or not the boot data read has been completed, and the determination process is repeated until the read is completed. When the reading of the boot data is completed, the initialization process is executed in step S303. As the initialization process, initialization of the register of the display CPU 131, the register 153 of the VDP 135, the work RAM 132, and the VRAM 134 is performed.

  In the subsequent step S304, transfer of data in the second half for initial setting is requested. That is, the program data for initial setting is composed of the data for initial startup that constitutes the first half and the data for the second half that follows it, and the data for initial startup is set in the boot data. There is. Then, in the data for the initial activation, a read instruction of data in the latter half portion is set. As described above, by storing only data from the beginning to the middle in the program data for initial setting as boot data in advance in the boot memory 179, the capacity of data to be stored in the boot memory 179 can be suppressed. Accordingly, the storage capacity of the boot memory 179 can be reduced.

  Incidentally, if the entire program data for initial setting is regarded as boot data, data stored in advance in the boot memory 179 can be regarded as initial program data, and the data in the latter half part is regarded as second program data. It can be considered.

  In the subsequent step S305, an initial adjustment process of the scaler of the display circuit 155 is executed. In the initial adjustment process, when an image signal is output based on drawing data created in each of the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134, the image signal is output in correspondence with the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a. Thus, the command for initial resolution adjustment (information for initial resolution adjustment) is transmitted to the VDP 135. The initial adjustment value is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the boot data as a resolution initial adjustment command.

  By transmitting a resolution initial adjustment command to the VDP 135, numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the resolution adjustment area of the scaler in the register 153 of the VDP 135. Thus, when an image signal is output from the VDP 135 to the symbol display device 31, an image signal corresponding to drawing data is output in a state of being adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a.

  In the following step S306, it is determined whether transfer of data in the second half to the change area 132b of the work RAM 132 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until transfer is completed. Note that the transfer instruction timing and data capacity of data in the latter half portion are set such that the standby time in step S306 is as short as possible or substantially not occur. If transfer of data in the second half is completed, the process proceeds to step S307.

  Incidentally, the processing from step S301 to step S306 is executed based on boot data stored in advance in the boot memory 179, and the processing from step S307 to step S314 is executed based on data in the second half.

  In step S307, a transfer request for initial image data is issued to the memory module 133. Here, the initial image data is the minimum image data for displaying an image related to a system test on the symbol display device 31. In the display screen G, the variation display of the symbol is performed in front of a predetermined background image. The data volume is set smaller than the image data necessary for displaying the image data and the image data necessary for displaying the demonstration image. The initial image data is not a simple 3D image data but a combination of 2D still image data and plate polygon image data.

  Further, the image related to the system test is an image for confirming that the symbol display device 31 is normal in the manufacturing plant or the game hall of the pachinko machine 10, for example, an image of only red color on the entire display screen G Is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an image in which a plurality of colors are divided and displayed, or an image in which the manufacturer name or model name of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. The memory module 133 receives the address designation command corresponding to the initial image data from the display CPU 131, thereby starting the transfer of the initial image data to the change area 141b in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134.

  In the following step S308, an initial adjustment process of ground color is executed. In the initial adjustment process, the background color initial adjustment command (ground color initial adjustment) is issued to the VDP 135 so that the numerical value information set as the initial value in the unit area of each frame area 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 becomes the initial numerical value information. Information) is sent. The initial numerical information is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the data of the second half as a ground color initial adjustment command.

  When the VDP 135 transmits a ground color initial adjustment command, initial numerical information is stored in an area for ground color adjustment in the register 153 of the VDP 135. As a result, when the drawing data is created, the ground color is displayed at the dots corresponding to the unit areas for which updating from the initial numerical information has not been performed. Although black is set in the present pachinko machine 10 as an initial ground color, the present invention is not limited to this and is optional.

  In the following step S309, it is determined whether the transfer of the initial image data to the VRAM 134 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the transfer instruction timing and data capacity of the initial image data are set such that the standby time in step S309 is as short as possible or substantially not occur. If the transfer of the initial image data is completed, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In step S310, the transfer request of the regular program data is issued to the memory module 133. The routine program data includes, as already described, program data necessary to advance the process from step S201 in the main process and various interrupt processes. The memory module 133 receives the address designation command corresponding to the regular program data from the display CPU 131, thereby starting transfer of the regular program data to the regular area 132a of the work RAM 132.

  In the following step S311, task processing for the initial image is executed. In the task processing, processing for grasping various parameters necessary for instructing the VDP 135 to display an initial image is executed. Specifically, as the various parameters, address information of the area to which the initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 134, information of the frame areas 142a and 142b in a mode in which drawing data should be created using the initial image data, the geometry calculation unit 151 and The rendering unit 152 includes information for creating drawing data corresponding to the initial image from the initial image data.

  In the following step S312, a drawing list is created as drawing instruction information including information corresponding to the processing result of the task processing in step S311, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135. The VDP 135 creates drawing data corresponding to the initial image according to the drawing list in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be created, and further outputs an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. Thereby, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, the display of the initial image is started. The display of the initial image is continued until the drawing list is newly transmitted from the display CPU 131 and the image is updated by the VDP 135. By displaying the initial image as described above, the display of the image on the display screen G is started earlier than in the configuration in which no image is displayed on the display screen G until the display of the game image is started. can do.

  In the following step S313, it is determined whether the transfer of the regular program data to the work RAM 132 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the transfer instruction timing and data capacity of the regular program data are set such that the standby time in step S313 is as short as possible or does not substantially occur. If the transfer of the regular program data is completed, the process proceeds to step S314.

  In step S314, the memory module 133 is requested to transfer normal image data. Thereafter, the present initialization process is ended. The image data for regular use includes the image data for the back surface used when the variable display of the symbol is started in the symbol display device 31, and the image data for the object for displaying the symbol and the texture Image data is included. The image data for the back side and the image data for displaying the design are set according to the type of display mode, but the image data for normal use includes the image data of both display modes. In addition, although abnormality notification data used when displaying an abnormality notification image when detecting a predetermined injustice or abnormality is included, the abnormality notification data includes still image data for 2D and plate polygons. In combination with the image data of

  Here, when the main processing is started in the display CPU 131 by executing the initial setting processing as described above, (1) boot program data consisting of boot data and data of the second half, 2) Initial image data, (3) regular program data, and (4) regular image data are transferred from the memory module 133. In this case, data is transferred in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4). In addition, the processing of step S302, step S306, step S309 and step S313 is executed so that the transfer timings of the respective data do not overlap. Therefore, the data can be transferred satisfactorily.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 9), after executing the initial setting process in step S201, various interrupts are permitted in step S202. Thus, execution of command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in the display CPU 131 is permitted. Thereafter, in the main process, the process of step S202 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing will be described.

  The command interrupt process is a process that is activated with the highest priority when the strobe signal is received from the audio light emission control device 60, regardless of the process being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received at the input port 137 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the change area 132b of the work RAM 132, and a flag indicating that a command is newly received is added to the corresponding area. set. Thereafter, the command interrupt process is ended, and the process returns to the process before the start of the command interrupt process.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated in a predetermined cycle, specifically, a cycle of 20 msec.

  When the VDP 135 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 31, the VDP 135 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display screen G, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end An image signal is sequentially output to the arranged dots, and an image signal is output from left to right dots in order from the top to each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display screen G. In this case, the VDP 135 outputs the V interrupt signal to the display CPU 131 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 131 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt process can also be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was activated, the V interrupt process is newly activated.

  In the V interrupt process, first, in step S401, a command analysis process is executed. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 132 are analyzed. In the following step S402, it is determined based on the analysis result of step S401 whether or not a new command has been received. If a new command has been received, command corresponding processing is executed in step S403.

  In the command handling process, a data table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is grasped. In the data table, when displaying a moving image corresponding to a received command on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined. It is an information group.

  Here, as the command received by the display CPU 131 from the voice emission control device 60, there are a variation pattern command, a symbol designation command, and a notice command as described above. When these commands are received, a data table necessary for executing the game-use effects corresponding to the respective commands in the symbol display device 31 is grasped. In addition, there is an end command as the command to be received, and when the command is received, a data table necessary for finally stopping the game effect currently being executed is grasped. Further, there are various commands for the jackpot effect as the command to be received, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the jackpot effect is grasped. The command to be received includes a command for demonstration display, and when the command is received, a data table necessary for executing the demonstration display is grasped. Furthermore, other program data necessary in the case of executing processing based on the data table recognized as necessary is also grasped.

  Among the data tables necessary for executing the game-use effect, the data table necessary to start the game-use effect has already been transferred to the regular area 132a of the work RAM 132 as regular program data. In addition, a data table required to stop the game turn effect at the end, a data table necessary to start the jackpot effect, and a data table necessary to execute the demonstration display are also used regularly as work program data for the work RAM 132. It has already been transferred to the area 132a. Furthermore, other program data necessary to execute processing based on those data tables is also transferred to the regular area 132a of the work RAM 132 as regular program data.

  After executing the command corresponding process in step S403, it is determined in step S404 whether or not program data needs to be transferred in advance. The data determined to be necessary here is necessary to execute the processing based on the data table which is not included in the regular program data among the data tables determined to be necessary in step S403 and the data table. Other program data.

  If it is necessary to transfer program data in advance, a transfer request for the necessary program data is issued to the memory module 133 in step S405. The memory module 133 receives the address designation command corresponding to the program data from the display CPU 131, thereby starting transfer of the program data to the change area 132b of the work RAM 132.

  That is, when the display CPU 131 newly receives a command, it determines whether it is necessary to transfer new program data at the timing at which the command is analyzed, and makes a program data transfer request if necessary. Thereby, advance transfer of program data can be started as early as possible. Incidentally, in the case of this transfer request, not only the logical address storing the program data to be transferred but also the address of the transfer destination is specified. In addition, since the data table and program data including the process of the first timing in executing the process corresponding to the command are transferred at the initial startup as the regular program data, the process corresponding to that is received after the command is received. There is no waiting time before it starts.

  If a negative determination is made in step S402, a negative determination is made in step S404, or after the process of step S405 is performed, the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, pointer update processing is performed. In the pointer updating process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, the display CPU 131 can grasp the processing required to display an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time.

  In the following step S407, task processing is performed. In task processing, in order to display an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 135 is performed. Details of the task processing will be described later.

  In the following step S408, a drawing list output process is performed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task processing is a drawing target, and information of parameters updated in the task processing is also set. The VDP 135 creates drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 according to the drawing list. The processing in this VDP 135 will be described in detail later.

  In the following step S409, it is determined whether program data is being transferred. If program data is being transferred, the present V interrupt processing is terminated. On the other hand, when program data is not being transferred, whether or not it is necessary to transfer image data by referring to the information set as the update timing after the present in the data table currently set in step S410. Determine if

  Among various image data, image data used for drawing instructions based on regular program data is set as regular image data. That is, the image data necessary to start the game use effect, the image data necessary to start the jackpot effect, and the image data necessary to execute the demonstration display are set as the commonly used image data. . The transfer request of the image data is already made to the memory module 133 in the initial setting process (FIG. 10), and the transfer is completed when the display CPU 131 receives a command.

  The present invention is not limited to this configuration, and at least the processing after step S406 may not be executed until the transfer of the regular image data is completed. In this case, after the main process (FIG. 9) is started on the display CPU 131 and the initial image is displayed on the symbol display device 31, the display of the initial image is continued until the transfer of the commonly used image data is completed. It becomes. In addition, at the time of transfer of the initial image data, simple symbol data with a data capacity smaller than the total data capacity of the image data necessary to perform the fluctuation display of symbols is also transferred simultaneously, and transfer of the commonly used image data group is completed. When the variation pattern command is received in a situation where the user does not have the symbol, the variation display may be performed by the simple symbol.

  The image data determined to be required to be transferred in step S410 is image data required at the update timing after the current position in the data table currently set, and is not included in the regular image data. It is. If it is not necessary to transfer image data, the present V interrupt processing is finished. If it is necessary to transfer the image data, the necessary V data transfer request is issued to the memory module 133 in step S411, and the present V interrupt processing ends. The memory module 133 receives the address designation command corresponding to the image data from the display CPU 131 to start transfer of the image data to the change area 141 b of the expansion buffer 141.

  That is, the display CPU 131 refers to the currently set data table to determine whether it is necessary to transfer new image data. If necessary, the image data transfer request is made, and the VDP 135 creates drawing data. It is assumed that the image data is pre-transferred before the timing required to do this. Thus, drawing data can be created smoothly in the VDP 135. Incidentally, when this transfer request is made, not only the logical address at which the image data as the transfer request target is stored, but also the address of the transfer destination is specified. In addition, since the normal image data is transferred at the time of initial startup, no waiting time occurs between the reception of the command and the start of the display of the corresponding image.

  Here, by executing the process of step S409, transfer of program data is given priority over transfer of image data. Further, even if priority is given to transfer of program data as described above, the necessity of transfer of image data is determined with reference to the data table, so even if transfer is temporarily avoided in step S409. The need for transfer is determined in the subsequent V interrupt processing, and the transfer request is executed. Thereby, transfer timings of program data and image data can be prevented from overlapping, and transfer of program data can be prioritized.

<Task processing in display CPU 131>
Here, task processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In task processing, first, at step S501, setting processing for control start is executed. In the setting process for control start, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the display CPU 131 at the current processing time is executed. Note that the individual image refers to one 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back, and one 3D image defined by a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. It is.

  About the setting process for control start Specifically, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current processing cycle. If it exists, in the change area 132b of the work RAM 132, an empty buffer area for performing various calculations is searched in order to control the individual image, and the individual image grasped as the control start target is searched. Allocate an empty buffer area to correspond on a one-to-one basis. Furthermore, the initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and the control start parameters corresponding to the individual image are set for the initialized free buffer areas.

  In the following step S502, the control update target is grasped. The control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed, and is an individual image that may be included in an image of one frame after the current processing cycle.

  In the following step S503, the background calculation process is executed. In the background processing, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, light information for lightening and darkening, and projection in the world coordinate system are used for the image for the backmost side that constitutes the image of the background and the background character. A process of computing and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test specification is executed.

  In the subsequent step S504, effect calculation processing is executed. In the effect calculation process, the above-mentioned various parameters are calculated and derived for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, advance notice display, and jackpot effect.

  In the subsequent step S505, symbol operation processing is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters is executed for an image of a pattern to be subjected to variable display in each game run.

  Incidentally, in each process of step S503 to step S505, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S501 is executed. Further, in each processing of step S503 to step S505, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time image update timing is used is used. The animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 162, and is transferred to the work RAM 132 in advance before the display CPU 131 needs to read the data.

  After that, in step S506, processing for grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed, and then this task processing ends. In the grasping process of the placement object in the world coordinate system, a process of grasping an individual image to be set as a drawing object in the current drawing list out of the individual images subjected to the control update in each process of steps S503 to S505. Run. The grasping is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 are set more than the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S506. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the individual image to be controlled in the display CPU 131 may be identical to the individual image to be controlled in the VDP 135. In this case, the process of step S506 is executed. There is no need.

  In the setting process for control start in step S501, the control start timings of the individual images may be set to be dispersed in order to disperse the processing load of the display CPU 131.

<Basic processing in VDP 135>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

  The VDP 135 sets the value of the register 153 based on the command sent from the display CPU 131, creates drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 131, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly performed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) by the cooperation of the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 when the output start timing of the image signal is determined in advance.

  The process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. FIGS. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer is set, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created an image of one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of the various designation information will be described later. When moving image data is included as image data handled by the VDP 135, the header information includes information about presence / absence of decoding designation and an address to which moving image data to be decoded is transferred. It is also good.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the above-mentioned header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system at the time of creation of the drawing data this time are set. Parameter information of each image data is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set so as to be the numerical value information of serial numbers, and the information of the parameters is set in correspondence with each numerical information in a one-to-one manner.

  In the drawing list in FIG. 13A, the image data for the back is set as the first drawing object, and the background object A is set as the second, the background object B as the third, and so on. There is. Further, image data for effect is set as the order after the image data for background, for example, the object for effect A is set to the m-th, the object for effect B is set to the m + 1-th,. There is. In addition, the image data for symbols is set as the order after the image data for these effects, for example, the symbol object A is set as the n-th, the symbol object B is set as the n + 1-th, ... There is.

  Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... There are several types of parameters set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 13B, the parameter P (1) of the image data for the back side is information of the address of the area to which the image data for the back side is transferred in the VRAM 134 and the image for the back side. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting data and the image information in the world coordinate system when setting image data for the back side Information of the rotation angle indicating the rotation angle, information of the scale indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back, and the image data for the back The information of the uniform alpha value which shows the whole penetration information (or transparency information) in the case of setting is set up.

  Here, coordinate information is set individually for all pixels of image data for an object. Moreover, although the information of this coordinate is set to the image data for the object, it is not set to the image data for the texture. In the image data for texture, coordinate values of each pixel are predetermined in association with each pixel of image data for an object. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 162 in a state attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture There is. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 in texture mapping.

  In addition, in the parameter (P1), when the image data for the back side is projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, the camera information including the information of the coordinates and the direction of the virtual camera and the image data for the back side are rendered And light information including information on the position and orientation of a virtual light source that determines shadows in the case where

  Further, in the parameter (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is set. In the Z-buffer method, when many objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel) aligned on the Z axis is viewed from the viewpoint This is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical values set to pixels closest to the viewpoint are set in corresponding unit areas in the frame areas 142a and 142b by sequentially referring to the distance. When applying the Z buffer method, the Z buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. A specific processing configuration of hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 will be described later.

  In addition to the Z buffer method, a Z sort method is set as a method of performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set in each pixel is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b for each pixel aligned on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set to each pixel is referred to, and the addition processing as described above and the processing of fusion operation as already described are performed as necessary. The Rukoto. Although the description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, the processing is started when the effect image is displayed.

  The parameter (P1) is created to display a background image, information on α data specification indicating whether or not α data is applied, and application target, fog specification information indicating whether or not fog is applied, and application target. Information on another storage designation indicating the presence or absence of another storage for drawing data for the background image is set.

  Here, the α value is transmission information of the corresponding pixel. There are two methods of setting the α value on the drawing list: a method of specifying the above-mentioned uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of 2D still image data and image data for texture, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 162 as image data. The alpha data can make transmission information different for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same image data for texture. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting the α value.

  By setting the α value and the α data uniformly as described above, the transparency of 2D still image data and image data for texture is not finely controlled in pixel units, but uniformly for all pixels. In the situation where it should be controlled, it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to cope with the uniform α value, and it becomes possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying the α data.

  Further, fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, in the Z-axis direction. Fog is used when expressing fog or expressing in a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, fog is applied in a fixed manner to an image of one frame. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, another fog is set to the object in a situation where the texture is not displayed because it is too dark when applying the same fog as the other objects to the object arranged on the far side in the Z-axis direction. It is good to be configured. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect by setting the fog while preventing the above-mentioned texture from being lost.

  In addition, separate storage means that writing data for the background image once created is written and stored in a mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b in order to use the drawing data for the subsequent frames as it is. Say. As shown in FIG. 4, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode buffer 145 and a second mode buffer 145 so as to correspond to each display mode one to one. The specific content of this separate storage will be described in detail later.

  In the other parameters such as parameter P (2), as shown in FIG. 13 (c), among the various information in FIG. 13 (b) above, instead of the information of the image data for background, information of an object and Texture information and is set. As these pieces of information, information of the address of the area to which the object and the texture are transferred is set.

  The drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, how drawing data is created along with the execution of drawing processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 131 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, a setting process for background is executed in step S602.

  In the setting process for the background, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and the object for the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether the image data and the object for the character are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If it is not arranged, a vacant buffer area to be referred to for arrangement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a vacant buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. After that, while grasping and reading the address to which the image data has been transferred in advance in the VRAM 134, the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data is set so that the coordinates, rotation angle and scale specified in the drawing list are obtained. A world conversion process of converting the coordinate values into the world coordinate system is executed to set the secured buffer area.

  If it is allocated, the update processing of various parameters set in the already reserved buffer area is executed. In addition, in the setting processing for background, control termination processing is executed to delete the image data for background not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  In the subsequent step S603, setting processing for effect is executed. In the effect setting process, among the image data designated in the current drawing list, an object for displaying the effect image is grasped. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, processing for starting arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting processing for background. If it is allocated, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for effect, a control end process is executed to delete the image data for effect not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  In the following step S604, setting processing for symbols is executed. In the setting process for symbols, among the image data designated in the current drawing list, an object for displaying the symbols is grasped. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, processing for starting arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting processing for background. If it is allocated, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for symbols, control end processing is executed to delete the image data for symbols not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  As a result of execution of the processing of steps S602 to S604, as shown in FIG. 15, in the world coordinate system defined by the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis, the drawing list is designated as the arrangement target The setting of the scene in which the backmost image PC21 and the various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged at the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale which are also designated by the drawing list is completed. Note that FIG. 15 simply shows how the rearmost image PC21 and the various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged.

  In the following step S605, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and the orientation of the viewpoint are determined by the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set to the origin as the viewpoint based on the coordinates and the orientation of the viewpoint Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 15, the viewpoint PC 31 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

  Here, camera information is set for each individual image (the rearmost image PC21 and various objects PC22 to PC30), and in actuality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image as described above, it is possible to individually perform viewpoint switching, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is enhanced. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 15 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  In the subsequent step S606, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion process to the view coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted to the view coordinate system corresponding to the view (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  In the following step S607, clipping processing is performed. In the clipping process, the individual images extracted in step S606 are grasped with the corresponding viewpoints as the common origin. Then, based on the space corresponding to the screen area PC 32 (see FIG. 15) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display screen G of the symbol display device 31) in that state, extraction is performed in step S606 Clip each individual image that has been

  In the following step S608, a lighting process is performed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the information of the light designated by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

  In the subsequent step S609, a texture mapping process is performed. In the texture mapping process, a texture corresponding to each of the objects extracted by the clipping process is pasted to determine the appearance of each object. This texture mapping process includes processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping as well as a process of simply pasting image data for texture.

  Thereafter, in step S610 to step S612, each individual image extracted in step S607 and further subjected to lighting processing and texture mapping processing is projected onto a screen area PC32 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection or parallel) Create drawing data by projection).

  Specifically, first, in step S610, background drawing data creation processing is executed. In the background drawing data creation processing, background projection data is created by performing projection on the screen area PC 32 while performing hidden surface removal on the backmost image and object set as the background image.

  Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 4, and the screen buffer 144 is used for writing a background buffer to which background drawing data is written, and effect drawing data. A buffer for effect and a buffer for pattern to which drawing data for a pattern are written are set. In addition, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC 32 is set in the buffer for background, the buffer for effect, and the buffer for pattern. The background drawing data created in step S610 is written to the background buffer. If background image data is not specified in the drawing list, background drawing data is not created.

  In the following step S611, rendering data creation processing for effect is executed. In the rendering data creation process for rendering, the projection on the screen area PC 32 is performed while performing hidden surface removal on the object set as a rendering image, whereby the rendering buffer in the screen buffer 144 is configured for rendering. Create drawing data. In addition, when the image data for presentation is not designated in the drawing list, the drawing data for presentation is not created.

  In the subsequent step S612, a drawing data creation process for symbols is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the pattern, the projection on the screen area PC 32 is performed while performing hidden surface removal on the object set as the pattern, whereby the drawing for the symbol is performed in the buffer for the pattern in the screen buffer 144. Create data In addition, when the image data for symbols is not designated in the drawing list, the drawing data for symbols is not created.

  Thereafter, in step S613, after the drawing data combining process is executed, the present drawing process is ended. In the drawing data combining process of step S613, the drawing data for background, the drawing data for effect, and the drawing data for symbol are created individually in the screen buffer 144 individually by the processes of steps S610 to S612. After combining, the combined result is written as drawing data of one frame in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn.

  In this case, it is defined that the drawing data for background → the drawing data for effect → the drawing data for symbols are arranged in order from the back side to the front side, and the images are set so as not to overlap in the depth direction. ing. Therefore, first, drawing data for background is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, then drawing data for effect is written, and finally drawing data for design is written. At this time, the image on the back side is used as it is when the completely transparent α value is set to the pixel for which drawing is to be executed, and the α value is used when the semi-transparent α value is set. Fusion of the image on the back side and the image on the front side at the ratio used as the reference is performed, and when the alpha value of non-transmission is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side Then, the fusion operation as described above is performed.

  By the way, each drawing data is specified to have an area for one frame, but the alpha value of complete transmission is set for blank parts where projection was not performed in drawing data for effects or drawing data for symbols. It is done.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec. Further, although an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data, as the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. It is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for one frame after the frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit which alternately switches the frame areas 142a and 142b to be referred to each time the output of an image signal for one frame is completed. The frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn are restricted not to be output targets for outputting an image signal.

  Steps S602 to S607 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S608 to S613 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Mask display using Z buffer 143>
Next, mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  The Z buffer 143 is used when performing hidden surface removal by the Z buffer method as described above. Here, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The hidden surface process using the Z buffer is activated in each drawing data creation process of steps S610 to S612 in the drawing process (FIG. 14) when the Z test is specified in the drawing list. Further, when performing the Z test specification, the display CPU 131 sets camera information of each individual image to be subjected to hidden surface processing using the Z buffer so that each viewpoint has the same coordinates and direction, The direction of the viewpoint is set to be the direction of the Z-axis direction of the world coordinate system. Therefore, the Z axis of the screen area PC 32 which is a reference in the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer is set to be parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate system. Further, only one Z buffer 143 is set, and has a buffer for background in the screen buffer 144, a buffer for effect, and an area of the same number of dots as a buffer for symbols.

  First, in step S701, on the basis of the current projection target dot in the screen area PC32 (see FIG. 15), it is an individual image included on the Z axis and is an object pixel of the individual image to be tested this time. Understand the set Z value. In the subsequent step S702, the Z-buffer 143 grasps the Z value set in the area of the dot corresponding to the drawing target dot on a one-to-one basis.

  In the following step S703, it is determined whether the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S701 corresponds to the near side in the Z axis direction more than the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S702. If it corresponds to the front side, the process proceeds to step S704, and the Z value grasped in step S701 is overwritten on the dot area referred to in step S702 in the Z buffer 143. In the subsequent step S705, the drawing target numerical value information such as the color information set in the pixel referred to in step S701 is overwritten on the area of the current projection target dot in the drawing target buffer in the screen buffer 144. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S706.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S703 that the front side is not supported, the process proceeds to step S706 without executing the processing of steps S704 to S705. That is, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set to the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is updated. In addition to this, the already set numerical information for drawing is held as it is. On the other hand, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is on the near side in the Z axis direction with respect to the Z value already set to the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated. The numerical information for drawing is also updated.

  In step S706, it is determined whether the Z test has been completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not completed, the process returns to step S701, and a Z test is performed on a new target pixel.

  If completed, it is determined in step S 707 whether the Z test has been completed for all dots in the screen area PC 32. If the process has not been completed, the projection target dot is updated in step S708, and then the process returns to step S701, and the Z test is performed on the new projection target dot. If it has been completed, this hidden surface processing is ended.

  By performing hidden surface processing as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are arranged on the Z axis, only the individual image closer to the viewpoint is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, a mask (that is, a partial display) of a character for background is executed using the hidden surface process. Then, this mask is performed by setting the Z value of the object in the display CPU 131 for the mask.

  Hereinafter, the mask arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In addition, when the arithmetic processing for the mask is indicated that the arithmetic processing for the mask is to be performed in the area referred to in the data table, the arithmetic processing for effect in step S504 in the task processing (FIG. 12) is performed. Is executed.

  First, in step S801, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the current processing cycle corresponds to the first mask display. Here, a first mask display and a second mask display are set as the mask display. The first mask display is a display mode in which the state in which the character is partially displayed is maintained over a plurality of frames, and the second mask display is a plurality of frames in which pixels masked from the state in which the entire character is displayed The display mode is to gradually increase and eventually disappear.

  If it corresponds to the first mask display, in step S802, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S803, based on the currently set data table, pixels to be masked in the object grasped in step S802 are grasped.

  Thereafter, after the Z value setting process is performed in step S804, the present arithmetic process ends. In the process of setting the Z value, the Z value is set to be behind the image on the backmost side for the pixels that are to be masked in the object, and the pixels that are not to be masked are The Z value is set so as to correspond to the position which is on the front side of the rearmost image and should be displayed.

  As described above, the mask processing process is executed, and the drawing list including the object with the Z value set as the drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135, and the VDP 135 uses the Z buffer as the hidden surface processing. The hidden surface process (FIG. 16) is performed, and finally the first mask display is performed on the display screen G. The specific content of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, for convenience of explanation, in FIG. 18, a 3D image is shown as a 2D image.

  FIG. 18A shows the case where the character CH10 is displayed as usual without performing the first mask display. 18A-1 is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. 18A-2 is a display screen G The display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 18 (a-1), as shown in FIG. 18 (a-2), the Z value is set in each pixel so as to be on the front side of the image on the backmost side. The character CH10 is displayed in its entirety.

  FIG. 18B shows the case where the first mask display is performed. 18 (b-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. 18 (b-2) is a display screen G. The display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 18 (b-1), the Z value is set to a part of each pixel so as to be on the front side of the image on the backmost side, but The Z value is set to be behind the image of. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18 (b-2), only the portion corresponding to the pixel for which the Z value is set so that the character CH 10 is on the near side is displayed.

  Note that a plurality of types of Z-value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display for the same character CH10 may be set by the control program of the display CPU 131. In this case, a plurality of types of first mask display modes can be set for the same character CH10.

  Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for the mask (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S801 that the current processing time does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing time is the second mask. Since this corresponds to the display, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the start timing of the second mask display.

  If it is the start timing, in step S806, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S807, the mask dedicated table is read out based on the currently set data table. The mask dedicated table is stored and held until the current second mask display is completed. In the following step S808, the pixels set as initial erase targets in the mask dedicated table are grasped.

  Thereafter, after the Z value setting process is performed in step S809, the present arithmetic process ends. In the setting process of the Z value, in the above object, the Z value is set to be behind the image on the rearmost side with respect to the pixel grasped as the initial deletion target in step S808, For pixels that are not, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position that is to the front of the rearmost image and should be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S805 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, the deletion target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In the following step S811, data corresponding to the value of the deletion target counter updated in step S810 is confirmed in the mask dedicated table currently read out, and the pixel to be deleted is grasped.

  Thereafter, after the Z value setting process is performed in step S812, the present arithmetic process ends. In the setting process of the Z value, in the above object, the Z value is set to be behind the image on the rearmost side with respect to the pixels grasped as the deletion target in step S811, and is the deletion target. For non-pixels, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be displayed on the front side of the image on the backmost side.

  As described above, the mask processing process is executed, and the drawing list including the object with the Z value set as the drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135, and the VDP 135 uses the Z buffer as the hidden surface processing. The hidden surface process (FIG. 16) is performed, and finally the second mask display is performed on the display screen G. The specific contents of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. Note that for convenience of description, in FIG. 19, a 3D image is shown as a 2D image.

  FIG. 19 (a) shows an image of information set in the mask dedicated table, and FIG. 19 (b) shows the case where the character CH11 is displayed as usual without the second mask display being performed. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the object PC 34 corresponding to the character CH11 has a plurality of pixels, and in the mask dedicated table, the plurality of pixels are grouped into a plurality and grouped together. A frame order to be deleted is set for that. Specifically, a group shown as "Z1" is set as an initial deletion target, and thereafter, a group shown as "Z2" → a group shown as "Z3" → a group shown as "Z4" → shown as "Z5" It becomes an elimination target in the order of the group.

  In the frame in which the second mask display is started and the group indicated as “Z1” is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 19C, the pixel portion corresponding to the group “Z1” is missing. The character CH11 is displayed. When the group indicated as "Z2" is to be deleted in the subsequent frame, pixels corresponding to the group "Z2" are added to the group "Z1" as shown in FIG. 19 (d). The character CH11 is displayed with the part missing. Then, the character CH11 is not displayed in the frame in which the group indicated as "Z5" is finally targeted for deletion.

  As described above, the Z buffer 143 can be used to mask an object. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform mask calculation on the program of the display CPU 131, and there is no need to set mask data, which is a kind of image data, in the VDP 135. Therefore, mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required to store image data.

  Further, since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131 so much. In addition, a plurality of types of mask displays such as the first mask display and the second mask display can exhibit the above-described excellent effects.

  In addition, the Z value on the back side of the backmost image is set to the non-displayed portion. Since the backmost image is an image that always constitutes the back in any frame, it becomes an absolute reference as the position of the Z axis (in the depth direction). By setting the Z value of the portion to be non-displayed based on this, it becomes possible to make the setting mode of the Z value in the non-display case uniform, and processing related to the setting of the Z value Can reduce the processing load of

  Note that only one of the first mask display and the second mask display may be set. In addition, the configuration may be such that the second mask display is not erased for every plurality of pixels, but may be erased for each pixel, and a pixel that has become an erasure target may be set again as a display target It may be

  Also, by performing the setting of the Z value in reverse, the characters are not sequentially erased over the display period of a plurality of frames, but displayed so that the characters appear sequentially over the display periods of a plurality of frames. It may be configured as

<Another form of mask processing using Z buffer 143>
Another form of mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing another mode of mask arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131.

  First, in step S901, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the start timing. If it is the start timing, in step S 902, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S 903 based on the currently set data table, the initial Read the mask table.

  In the subsequent step S904, a mask lottery process is executed. In the mask lottery process, numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read out, and information on an erasure target corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S903. .

  The lottery counter is configured to be updated, for example, every time the process of step S202 is executed in the main process (FIG. 9), and further, when the counter value makes one revolution, the initial value is randomly selected. It is configured to be Further, in the initial mask table, information to be erased is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each counter value of the lottery counters, and the information to be erased is all pixels constituting the object to be masked. The plurality of pixels in one group corresponds to each group on a one-to-one basis.

  In the subsequent step S905, the pixel to be erased is grasped from the information to be erased acquired in step S904. Thereafter, after the Z value setting process is performed in step S906, the present arithmetic process ends. In this Z value setting process, in the object described above, the Z value is set to be behind the image on the backmost side for the pixels grasped as the erasure target in step S 905 and is the erasure target. For non-pixels, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be displayed on the front side of the image on the backmost side.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S901 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S 907, the mask table is rewritten such that the information to be erased that has already been set as the erasure target is excluded from the already read initial mask table. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased that has already been set to be erased is rewritten so as to be redundantly assigned to the other information to be erased. This assignment may be performed randomly, or may be assigned to the information to be deleted corresponding to the immediately lower counter value on the table.

  Thereafter, the processing in steps S904 to S906 is performed using the mask table rewritten in step S907, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, according to the present alternative embodiment, since pixels to be erased are randomly selected, the aspect of mask display can be diversified.

  The mask display using the Z buffer 143 may be applied not to the background character but to the effect character or pattern. For example, in the case of applying to a character for effect, the hidden surface process is collectively performed on the image data for background and the image data for effect, so that the rearmost surface is the same as the above configuration. The distribution of the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be performed based on the Z value of the image. In addition, in the case of applying to a symbol, the hidden surface processing is performed collectively on the image data for background, the image data for effect, and the image data for symbol in the same manner as the above configuration. The distribution of the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be performed on the basis of the Z value of the backmost image.

  In addition, even if hidden surface processing is performed individually for the background, effects, and patterns, it is determined that pixels for which the Z value on the back side is set in VDP 135 are not to be drawn in VDP 135. If it is, similarly to the above configuration, the distribution of the Z value of the display target and the non-display target may be performed based on the Z value of the backmost image.

  Further, the distribution of the Z values of the display target and the non-display target is not performed on the basis of the Z value of the backmost image, for example, the Z value of the front of the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the non-display target. The Z value on the rear side of the viewpoint may be set as the Z value of the display target.

  The hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed not based on the Z axis of the world coordinate system but based on the direction in which the viewpoint is directed.

  Also, in the configuration that displays a 2D image as in the second embodiment below, when the VDP is configured to be able to manipulate drawing data in units of pixels, the information in the depth direction set for each pixel of image data is displayed. Partial display of an image may be performed by distributing the information to any one of target information and non-display target information.

<Configuration for Switching Display Mode>
Next, the configuration relating to the switching of the display mode will be described.

  The display mode is a state in which a predetermined type is defined as a standby image displayed until the game turn is started and a game turn image displayed in a state where the game turn is being executed, and a plurality of types are displayed. The display mode of is set. Specifically, the first display mode and the second display mode are set.

  In the first display mode and the second display mode, the display mode of the background image and the display mode of each pattern are different from each other. Specifically, when comparing the symbols assigned the same number, the outer shape and the shape of the symbols are the same in the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and the patterns are different. As for the background image, the type of the backmost image is different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the number and type of characters displayed before the backmost image are also different. The number of characters displayed is set to be larger in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

  The switching of the display mode is performed based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect. Specifically, the display mode is sequentially switched by operating the operation device for effect 48 in a situation where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. In addition, the game operation is switched based on that the operation device for effect 48 is operated under predetermined conditions in a situation where the game is being executed.

  A specific processing configuration relating to switching of the display mode will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an operation generation command handling process executed by the display CPU 131. The operation generation command response process is executed in the command response process of step S403 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether an operation generation command for mode switching is received from the sound emission control device 60 or not. If it has not been received, the present operation command corresponding process is finished, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S1002.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether or not it is a first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period in which neither the game play nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether it is the first switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1002, it is determined whether it is the first switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is the first switchable period, in step S1003, a first switch execution flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132.

  On the other hand, if it is not the first switchable period, the process proceeds to step S1004 to determine whether it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from the start timing to a predetermined reference timing in the middle of execution in a situation where the game play is being executed. Specifically, when the game display effect is executed in the symbol display device 31, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started → the high speed variation display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 → the low velocity fluctuation The flow of the display of sequentially stopping each symbol row Z1 to Z3 via the display is included. In this case, the second switchable period is a period from the start of variation display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to the timing at which high-speed variation display in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends.

  In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of the symbols starts the fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 → The acceleration period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 → the high-speed fluctuation display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (high speed is constant It may be a flow of display such as sequential stop of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 via low speed fluctuation display (low speed is constant speed). In this case, the second switchable period may be a period during which high-speed variation display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is being performed.

  In addition, medium speed fluctuation display may be included between the high speed fluctuation display and the low speed fluctuation display. That is, if the aspect of the variation display of symbols is switched in a plurality of stages such as two stages, three stages, or four or more stages, the specific number of stages is arbitrary. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period of low identification stages in which the player has low in the identification of the symbol.

  In addition, if the flow of the fluctuation display of the symbol includes the state of the fluctuation display in the relatively low identification mode → the fluctuation display in the high identification aspect, the specific fluctuation aspect is arbitrary, for example, any aspect. Even though the fluctuation speed is the same, in the low discrimination mode, the symbol is displayed transparent, semi-transparent, hollow or partially removed, and in the high discrimination mode, the whole symbol is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period in which the variable display in the low identification mode is performed.

  Information for specifying whether it is the second switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1004, it is determined whether it is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. . When it is determined that it is not the second switchable period, the present operation generation command correspondence processing is ended as it is, and when it is the second switchable period, the predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1005. And the second switching execution flag is set.

  After executing either the process of step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, the display mode counter is updated.

  The display mode counter is a counter for specifying the current display mode by the display CPU 131, and is provided in the work RAM 132. In the counters for the display mode, counter values are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. In the present embodiment, since two types of display modes, the first display mode and the second display mode, are set as the display modes as described above, the numerical value of "0" corresponding to the first display mode as the counter value and the second display The numerical value of "1" corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the display mode counter is set to “0”, the operation power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, or the pachinko machine 10 is reset. 1 Display mode is set.

  In step S1006, the display mode counter is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched in accordance with a predetermined order each time the effect operating device 48 is operated once. Specifically, when the processing in step S1006 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is "0" and the first display mode is set, the display mode counter is set to "1" and the second When the processing in step S1006 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is "1" and the second display mode is set while switching to the display mode, the display mode counter is set to "1". 1 Switch to the display mode. After the process of step S1006 is performed, the operation generating command handling process is ended.

  Next, the arithmetic processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The calculation processing for the display mode background is executed in the background calculation processing in step S503 in the task processing (FIG. 12). In addition, since the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed when executing the jackpot effect, etc., the arithmetic processing for the display mode background is not performed, and the standby image is displayed or the game circulation effect is performed. The arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed, for example.

  First, in step S1101, the display mode counter provided in the work RAM 132 is referenced to determine whether or not the first display mode is set. In the case of the first display mode, in step S1102, the first backmost image to be updated at this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S1103, various control parameters of the first rear-face image thus grasped are calculated to update control information. In the following step S1104, based on the currently set data table, an object corresponding to the first display mode and an object to be updated for background is grasped. In the following step S1105, various control parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update control information.

  On the other hand, in the case of the second display mode, in step S1106, the second backmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1107, various parameters of the grasped second backmost image are calculated to update control information. In the following step S1108, based on the currently set data table, an object corresponding to the second display mode and an object to be updated for background is grasped. In the subsequent step S1109, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update control information.

  Note that, at the execution timing of the process of step S1102, the setting process (step S501) for control start on the background object corresponding to the first backmost image and the first display mode is completed. In addition, at the execution timing of the process of step S1106, the setting process (step S501) for control start on the background object corresponding to the second backmost image and the second display mode is completed.

  After executing the processing of step S1105 or step S1109, it is determined in step S1110 whether or not any one of the first switching execution flag and the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If one of the switching execution flags is set, it is determined in step S1111 whether the processing load is large.

  When the processing load is large, the processing load of VDP 135 is large enough to cause processing omission when both of the geometry calculation and the rendering for the image data specified in the current drawing list are executed by VDP 135 or processing This refers to a situation where the processing load of VDP 135 is relatively large even if a drop does not occur. Information on whether the processing load is large or not is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1111 is performed based on the information.

  If the processing load is not large, it is determined in step S1112 whether the background image corresponding to the current display mode has already been stored separately. Here, separate storage is to save separately the drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode and to maintain the stored state. For separate storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 4).

  A mode buffer 145 displays a first mode area 145a in which background drawing data for displaying a background image corresponding to the first display mode is written, and a background image corresponding to the second display mode. And a second mode area 145b in which drawing data for background is written. The VDP 135 also has a function of writing background drawing data to either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b, and reads the background drawing data that has been written to the screen buffer 144. And a display mode control unit 154 having a writing function.

  If it is not saved separately, the execution designation information of the separately saved is stored in step S1113, and then the present arithmetic processing is ended. If it is saved separately, the present arithmetic processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, when the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing is for the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. The image data of is set. Further, when the process of step S1113 is being executed, execution specification information of another storage is set. The execution specification information of the separate storage includes information indicating that the separate storage should be performed, and also includes information of the address of the separate storage destination.

  On the other hand, if the processing load is large (step S1111: YES), it is determined in step S1114 whether the background image of the display mode of the switching destination has already been stored separately. If the data has not been separately stored, the present arithmetic processing ends. On the other hand, if it has already been stored separately, this operation processing is ended after the use designation information of the separately stored data is stored in step S1115.

  As described above, when the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing is for the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. The image data of is set. Further, when the process of step S1115 is being executed, use designation information of another storage data is set. The usage specification information of the separately stored data includes information indicating that the separately stored data should be used, and also includes information of an address at which the separately stored data is stored.

  Next, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The symbol calculation process is executed in step S505 of the task process (FIG. 12).

  First, in step S1201, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is necessary to execute a process for control update on a symbol. The case where it is not necessary to execute includes the case where the jackpot effect is being executed, and the case where it is necessary to be executed includes the case where the effect for the game circulation is being executed and the case where the standby image is displayed. If it is not necessary to execute, the symbol processing process is ended as it is. If it is necessary to execute, whether or not the game is being executed based on the currently set data table in step S1202. It is determined whether or not.

  If the game is not being executed, it is determined in step S1203 whether the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132 or not. If the first switching execution flag is set, the symbol to be controlled is changed in step S 1204 according to the display mode of the switching destination. Specifically, while holding information on parameters of each free buffer area secured in control of symbols in the work RAM 132 as it is, only information on symbols to be controlled (for example, information on address of transfer destination) Is rewritten to the information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. The processing of step S1203 and step S1204 may be executed in the setting process (step S501) for control start in the task process (FIG. 12). In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203 or if the process of step S1204 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, based on the currently set data table, an object of a symbol to be controlled is grasped, and in the subsequent step S1206, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the present symbol calculation processing ends.

  When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is image data for a pattern corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Is set.

  If the game is being executed (step S1202: YES), whether or not high-speed variation display is in progress in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in step S1207 based on the currently set data table judge. If high-speed variation display is in progress in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, it is determined in step S1208 whether or not the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132.

  If the second switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the symbol to be controlled can be changed according to the display mode of the switching destination. This is because when the drawing process (FIG. 14) corresponding to the drawing list of this time is executed by the VDP 135, if it is attempted to change the symbol to be controlled according to the display mode of the switching destination, processing omission occurs. It is possible to change if processing omission does not occur on the basis of whether or not it is determined that it is impossible to change if processing omission occurs.

  For example, when background image data corresponding to switching of the display mode is newly set in the drawing list this time, the VDP 135 needs to newly set the image data to the world coordinate system. The processing load of VDP 135 is increased. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol can not be changed. On the other hand, when separately stored data is set as image data for background in the current drawing list, or when image data for background corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode according to the previous drawing list is set Since there is no need to newly set the setting of image data to the world coordinate system in the VDP 135, the processing load of the VDP 135 is relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol can be changed.

  Note that information on whether or not it is possible to change is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1209 is performed based on the information. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1208, the second switching execution flag is cleared.

  If it is determined in step S1209 that the symbol can be changed, in step S1210, the symbol to be controlled is changed according to the display mode of the switching destination. The specific content of this process is the same as that of step S1204. After the process of step S1210 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1213.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1209 that the change is not possible, then in step S1211 the change standby flag is set for the predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132, and then the process proceeds to step S1213. . The change waiting flag is a flag for specifying that the change of the symbol to be controlled is waiting on the display CPU 131. If the change standby flag is set, even if it is determined in step S1208 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the process of step S1209 is performed by executing the process of step S1212. To be executed. If both the second switching execution flag and the change waiting flag are not set, the process directly proceeds to step S1213. Further, the change waiting flag is cleared when an affirmative determination is made in step S1212.

  In step S1213, based on the currently set data table, an object of a symbol to be controlled is grasped, and in the subsequent step S1214, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the present symbol calculation processing ends.

  As described above, when the symbol calculation process is executed, the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the drawing list output process thereafter. Ru. In this case, when it is determined in step S1209 that the symbol can not be changed to the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the image data of the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching source is set as it is in the drawing list Ru. Then, a symbol not corresponding to the display mode is finally displayed on the display screen G. However, since the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is under high-speed fluctuation display, the player can not change the above state. Unrecognized or hard to recognize.

  Moreover, when it is not possible to change to a symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the change standby flag is set, and the change is performed in the subsequent processing. As a result, the display mode can be properly switched while preventing the processing drop in the VDP 135. In addition, the processing load of VDP135 is adjusted so that the change of the symbol corresponding to the display mode of a switching destination is performed in the range in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed.

  If the high-speed change display is not in progress (step S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1215. In step S1215, an object of a symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1216, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the present symbol calculation processing ends. As described above, when the symbol calculation process is executed, the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the drawing list output process thereafter. Ru.

  Next, background setting processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for background is executed in step S602 in the drawing process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether use specification of another storage data is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S1302, the register 153 stores information for setting another storage data corresponding to the specification as background drawing data.

  If it is not set (step S1301: NO) or after the process of step S1302 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, the backmost image designated in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1304, various parameters designated about the backmost image are grasped. Thereafter, in step S1305, processing for setting the world coordinate system is performed on the backmost image. The contents of this setting are as described above.

  In the following step S1306, an object for background designated in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1307, various parameters designated about the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S1308, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and the setting process for the background is ended.

  By the background setting process being executed as described above, drawing is performed not only in the case where the use specification of separately stored data is not set, but also in the situation where the use specification of separately stored data is set The image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Then, along with this, for example, when the current drawing list relates to the switching of the display mode, it is possible to perform setting for starting control of image data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination.

  Next, background drawing data creation processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background drawing data creation process is executed in step S610 in the drawing process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether the information of the usage setting of another storage data is set in the register 153 or not. If it is not set, hidden surface processing is executed in step S1402 to create background drawing data in the screen buffer 144. The hidden surface processing is as described above.

  In the following step S1403, it is determined whether an execution specification of separate storage is set in the current drawing list. If the setting is not made, the present drawing data creation processing is ended as it is. If it is set, in step S 1404 the background area created in step S 1402 is made to the target mode area out of the first mode area 145 a and the second mode area 145 b of the mode buffer 145. Write the drawing data of. Thereby, separate storage of drawing data for background is performed. Thereafter, the drawing data creation process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the use setting information of another stored data is set in the register 153, the process advances to step S1405. In step S1405, of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, another storage data is read from the mode area designated at this time, and the read other storage data is read. The screen buffer 144 is written as drawing data for the background. Thereafter, the drawing data creation process is ended.

  The background drawing data creation processing is executed as described above, whereby the background drawing data for geometry calculation and rendering, or the background drawing data related to another storage data is stored in the screen buffer 144. . Further, in a frame in which an image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, a rendering data creation process for effect (step S611) and a rendering data creation process for symbol (step S612) are executed thereafter, and for presentation While drawing data and drawing data for symbols are created, drawing data combining processing (step S613) is executed to create drawing data for one frame.

  Here, the timing at which the separate storage data for the first display mode and the separate storage data for the second display mode are created will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 26A shows drawing data PD66 for background corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 26B shows drawing data PD67 for background corresponding to the second display mode. Also, FIG. 26 (a) shows the power ON / OFF state of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 26 (b) shows the presence or absence of the first display mode, and FIG. 26 (c) shows the presence or absence of the second display mode. FIG. 26D shows the presence or absence of separate storage data for the first display mode, and FIG. 26E shows the presence or absence of separate storage data for the second display mode.

  As the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t1, the power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, and the processing is started by the display CPU 131. Further, since the display mode is set to the first display mode, the display CPU 131 outputs the drawing list to the VDP 135 to display an image corresponding to the first display mode at a timing later than the timing of t1. Further, generation of drawing data corresponding to the first display mode is started in the VDP 135 based on the drawing list.

  Thereafter, at time t2, when the creation of the background drawing data PD 66 corresponding to the first display mode is completed, the drawing data is stored as the first display mode separate storage data in the first mode of the mode buffer 145. Are stored in the memory area 145a. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD 66 corresponding to the first display mode, as shown in FIG. 26A, a 3D character image indicated by “A” to “F” in front of the rearmost image. Is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. Further, the display of the image corresponding to the first display mode is started at the timing of t2 or at a predetermined timing thereafter.

  Thereafter, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the operation device for effect 48 being operated at the timing of t3. Then, drawing data for the second display mode is created, and display of an image corresponding to the second display mode is started. In addition, since the creation of background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode is completed at this timing, the drawing data serves as another storage data for the second display mode, and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145 Is stored in In the background image based on the drawing data PD67 for background corresponding to the second display mode, as shown in FIG. 26B, 3D character images shown by "G" to "J" in front of the rearmost image. Is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the second mode area 145 b is stored while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

  Here, the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode has more objects to be set than the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode. Then, if switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large, there is a concern that a processing drop may occur in the VDP 135. On the other hand, the processing load is large by creating separately stored data for the first display mode among the stored data separately for both using time when initial setting at power on is performed. In the situation where the display mode is switched to the first display mode, it is possible to use the other stored data to avoid processing omission.

  On the other hand, the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode has a small processing load on the VDP 135 for its creation, and even if switching to the second display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load on the VDP 135 is large, It is set so that processing omission does not occur. However, the background display data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode is also stored separately, and switching to the second display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load is relatively large even if no processing omission occurs. , The other stored data is used.

  As described above, as shown by the timing of t4 to t9, when the switching of the display mode is repeatedly performed in a short time by the separate storage data being created, the other storage data is displayed in each display mode. By using the background image to display, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omission.

  Further, the target of separate storage is a background image, and does not include an individual image in which a change such as a pattern is noted. As a result, when the display mode is switched in a situation where the individual image is changing, the movement of the individual image for which the change is noted continues even if the image is displayed using another stored data. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable.

  The display mode is not limited to two stages, and may be set to three stages or four or more stages. Even in this case, the display mode can be switched favorably by separately storing background drawing data corresponding to each display mode.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure performed without the switch of the kind of symbol being carried out waiting, regardless of the switch timing of a display mode. Further, the symbols may be configured not to differ between the display modes.

  Also, the effect character may be switched depending on the display mode. In this case, the effect character may not be stored separately, or may be stored separately.

<Configuration for reducing processing load at special presentation>
Next, the structure for reducing the processing load at the time of special production is explained.

  The special effect in this configuration is a kind of notice display already explained, and after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, the symbols are changed and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the situation where or in a situation where symbols are displayed variably in a plurality of symbol rows in a certain symbol row, a number of specific character images (figures described later separately from the symbols on symbol rows Z1 to Z3) This is an effect of simultaneously displaying an image based on the plate-like polygon PC 41 or the character shape object PC 42 shown in FIG. In the effect, after a large number of specific character images move from the back side to the front side of the display screen in a group, it is displayed to move to the outside of the display screen.

  When the display CPU 131 receives the notice command including the information of the special effect from the sound emission control device 60, the display CPU 131 specifies a data table corresponding to the notice command, and executes the process of the display effect while reducing the processing load. Do.

  A data table corresponding to the advance notice command in this configuration will be described. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for describing information that can be specified at a predetermined pointer position of the data table (a position corresponding to one frame, see the description of step S406). As information that can be specified, character identification information for identifying a specific character, and coordinates and rotation angles corresponding to each character identification information are set.

  The character identification information is set for the number of specific characters displayed in the current processing cycle. That is, n + 1 pieces of character identification information are set from 0 to n, and this specifies that n + 1 specific character images are to be displayed in the frame corresponding to the current pointer position. Further, the coordinates and the rotation angle set corresponding to each character identification information specify the coordinates and the rotation angle at which each specific character image is displayed in the frame corresponding to the current pointer position. Here, each coordinate corresponding to each character identification information has a value whose Y coordinate is close to each other as compared with the X and Z coordinates, and when a plurality of specific characters are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, There is no spread in the height direction (Y-axis direction), but the spread is set in the lateral direction (X-axis direction, Z-axis direction), particularly in the depth direction (Z-axis direction). Further, each rotation angle corresponding to each character identification information is set such that, when a plurality of specific characters are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, the specific character arranged on the side far from the screen area faces the screen area side. The closer the screen area is to the screen area, the more the screen area is inclined in the left-right direction (X-axis direction).

  When a specific character image corresponding to character identification information is displayed over a plurality of frames, the same character identification information is set over a plurality of frames (a plurality of pointer positions in the data table). For example, when a specific character image corresponding to the character identification information “0” is displayed while changing the coordinates and the rotation angle little by little in 5 frames, character identification information “0” is displayed for the specific character image over 5 frames. "Is set. The display CPU 131 recognizes the character identification information to recognize whether or not the same specific character image is displayed over a plurality of frames.

  Here, the memory module 133 stores a plate-like polygon which is low definition image data and a character shape object which is high definition image data in order to display a specific character image. A plate-like polygon is an object with a small number of polygons, and is a low-definition image data configured in a flat shape without unevenness in the three-dimensional direction, and requires a relatively low processing load to be displayed. , A low definition image at the time of display. The character shape object is high-resolution image data modeled into a character shape in a virtual three-dimensional space, and while the processing load required for displaying is relatively high, it becomes a high-definition image at the time of display.

  The images displayed using the respective image data are identical to each other in color information with the largest proportion. Specifically, among the values of RGB set for each pixel and the values of the color palette, the values set for the largest number of pixels are the same. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that a specific character is displayed regardless of which image data is used to display an image. Any specific relationship may be given to the plate-like polygon and the character shape object as long as the player can recognize so as to display the specific character. For example, the relationship may be made such that the contours and patterns are similar when the image is displayed.

  Hereinafter, the effect data setting process for reducing the processing load at the time of special effect in the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing is executed in effect calculation processing (step S504) in task processing (FIG. 12). Further, the effect data setting process is activated when the data table corresponding to the special effect is set.

  In the effect data setting process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a specific character is included in the display target in the current frame. Specifically, it is determined whether character identification information as shown in FIG. 27 is set at the current pointer position in the data table. If the character identification information is not set, the effect data setting process ends.

  When it is determined in step S1501 that the specific character is set as the display target in the current frame (step S1501: YES), in the subsequent step S1502, the predetermined number of specific characters to be displayed in the current frame is determined. It is determined whether there is more than (for example, 7 or more). Specifically, it is determined whether a predetermined number or more of character identification information is set at the current pointer position in the data table. If it is determined in step S1502 that the number of specific characters to be displayed in the current frame is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, an image to be used this time for each specific character (each character identification information) in step S1503 Data setting processing (described in detail later) is executed to select and set data from a character shape object and a plate-like polygon.

  In the subsequent step S1504, it is determined whether the data setting process of step S1503 has been performed for all the character identification information. If the data setting process has not been performed on all the character identification information, the data setting process is performed again in step S1503. That is, the data setting process is performed on all the specific characters (character identification information) to be displayed this time. When the data setting process is completed for all the character identification information (step S1504: YES), the effect data setting process is ended.

  Here, the data setting process of step S1503 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. The data setting process is a process performed for each specific character (each character identification information) for a specific character to be displayed in the current frame, and image data (a plate shape used for the specific character) In the case of setting a polygon or a character shape object and using a plate-like polygon as image data, it is a process of setting a rotation angle for the plate-like polygon.

  First, in step S1601, the specific character is grasped. Specifically, one of the character identification information set at the pointer position of the current data table is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S1602, the arrangement coordinates of the specific character grasped in step S1601 are grasped. Specifically, the coordinates set corresponding to the character identification information grasped in step S1601 are grasped from the current pointer position (FIG. 27) in the data table.

  In the subsequent step S1603, the coordinates of the virtual camera described above are grasped. Then, in step S 1604, the distance between the coordinates of the character identification information grasped in step S 1602 and the coordinates of the virtual camera grasped in step S 1603 is calculated. That is, in the processing of step S1602 to step S1604, the distance in the virtual three-dimensional space between the arrangement position corresponding to the specific character grasped in step S1601 and the virtual camera is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S1605, it is determined whether the distance is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, the distance to a midpoint between the virtual camera PC31 and the rearmost image PC21). If the distance is less than the predetermined value (step S1605: NO), a character shape object is set as image data corresponding to the current character identification information in step S1606. When a character shape object is set to character identification information in step S1606, the coordinates and rotation angle at the current pointer position in the data table are also set to the character identification information.

  If it is determined in step S1605 that the distance between the coordinates of the character identification information and the coordinates of the virtual camera is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, then a specific character image corresponding to the current character identification information is displayed in step S1607. A plate-like polygon is set as image data to be used for the image. That is, according to the distance between the virtual camera and the specific character, the image data to be used is selected from the character shape object and the plate-like polygon.

  Here, when a specific character is displayed for a predetermined number or more (when it is determined YES in step S1502), a predetermined number of character identification information of the predetermined character is the coordinates of the arranged coordinates and the coordinates of the virtual camera. It is preset in the data table so that the distance is equal to or more than a predetermined value. Thus, in a frame in which a specific character is displayed for a predetermined number or more, a predetermined number of specific characters can be set to be displayed using a plate-like polygon, and processing load can be suitably reduced. .

  After setting the plate-like polygon in step S1607, the process of setting the rotation angle of the plate-like polygon is performed in step S1608, and the data setting process is ended.

  The process of setting the rotational angle of the plate-like polygon in step S1608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The rotation angle of the plate-like polygon defines the direction (object posture) of the plate-like polygon when the plate-like polygon is arranged in the world coordinate system.

  Here, the rotation angle (FIG. 27) set in the data table in advance is a value used when using a character shape object as image data, and also when using a plate-like polygon as the image data. If used as it is, there is a possibility that the texture attached to the plate-like polygon may not be visible. Specifically, when the edge portion of the plate-like polygon and the camera PC 31 face each other, or when the surface to which the texture of the plate-like polygon is not attached faces the camera PC 31 side, the texture can not be seen Will occur. Therefore, the rotation angle to be used when using a plate-like polygon as the image data is replaced with the rotation angle set in advance in the data table, and processing to be reset in the setting processing is executed.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a plate-like polygon has been set in the previous frame for the specific character to be subjected to the current process.

  If it is determined in step S1701 that a plate-like polygon is not set in the previous frame for the current specific character (step S1701: NO), rotation angle group selection is performed in step S1702.

  Here, the rotation angle group will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the memory module 133 stores three types of rotation angle groups (rotation angle groups “0” to “2”) in which the rotation angles are set in association with the frame numbers. The rotational angle of the rotation angle group is sequentially set according to the frame number to the plate-like polygon in which any of the three types of rotation angle groups is set, as long as the display target is a continuous frame. When the plate-like polygon is not to be displayed, no target for setting the rotation angle is set, so the rotation angle is not set even if the frame number is in the middle. The rotation angle is set in a loop manner, and the rotation angle of the frame number “0” is set in the next frame in which the rotation angle of the frame number “k” is set.

  The rotation angles of the respective rotation angle groups are set such that the operations of the plate-like polygons in continuous frames are different between the rotation angle groups set to the plate-like polygons. For example, a plate-like polygon in which a rotation angle group "0" is set is arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space in setting processing for a character effect described later so that the direction is changed little by little up and down and right and left. The planar polygons are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space so as to turn slowly to the left and right.

  In step S1702, a rotation angle group to be set for the plate-like polygon corresponding to the character identification information to be subjected to the current process is selected from the three types of rotation angle groups. The rotation angle group may be selected by using a random number counter to select a rotation angle group corresponding to the value of the counter, or each time the rotation angle group is selected, the counter is incremented and the value of the counter The rotation angle group corresponding to may be selected. In short, the rotation angle groups may be selected by lottery or may be selected in a predetermined order.

  In the following step S1703, the first rotation angle (the rotation angle corresponding to the frame number "0") of the rotation angle group selected in step S1702 is set.

  If it is determined in step S1701 that a plate-like polygon has been set also in the previous frame (step S1701: YES), the frame number next to the frame number corresponding to the previously set rotation angle is set in step S1704. Set the corresponding rotation angle. That is, it is determined that the plate-like polygon is set in the previous frame with respect to the character identification information to be subjected to the current process, because the character identification information has already been rotated in the process of selecting the rotation angle group before the previous time. In this case, an angle group is set. Then, the rotation angle corresponding to the frame number next to the frame number of the said rotation angle group grasped | ascertained in order to set the rotation angle of last time is set.

  When the rotation angle is set in step S1703 or step S1704, the setting process of the rotation angle ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 28, when it is determined in step S1502 that the number of specific characters is less than the predetermined number (step S1502: NO), the specific character (characters to be displayed in the current frame) is displayed in step S1505. For all pieces of identification information), a character shape object is set as image data to be used this time, and the effect data setting process is ended. That is, if the number of specific characters to be displayed is less than a predetermined number, setting is performed to display a specific character image for all the specific characters using the character shape object.

  Here, in an effect using a specific character, a period in which the number of displayed characters is small (a predetermined period after the group of specific characters starts appearing on the display screen, and the group of specific characters starts to retreat out of the display screen) Although a period until the group of specific characters disappear from the display screen is set, the determination in step S1502 is negative in the period, and character shape objects are set for all the specific characters.

  In the effect display of the present configuration, a large number of specific characters are displayed when the effect display is started, and thereafter, a display is performed in which the specific characters are sequentially erased out of the display area. Therefore, when the effect display is started, the character shape object and the plate-like polygon are set in the data setting process described later, and the plate-like polygon is set when the specific character disappears sequentially and the number of specific characters decreases. Instead, a character shape object is set in step S1503.

  When a character shape object is set for character identification information in step S1503, the coordinates and rotation angle at the current pointer position in the data table are also set for the character identification information.

  As described above, when the plate-like polygon and the character shape object are set in the effect data setting process, the plate-like polygon and the character shape object are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. Ru. The rotation angle of the plate-like polygon set in step S1703 or step S1704 is also set in the drawing list. In this case, the rotation angle (FIG. 27) set in the data table in association with the character identification information is not set in the drawing list.

  Next, the character effect setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for character effect is executed in the setting process for effect in step S603 in the drawing process (FIG. 14). The character effect setting process is activated when the plate-like polygon and the character shape object set in the effect data setting process (FIG. 28) are included in the current drawing list. In the following description, how drawing data is created along with the execution of drawing processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1801, the VRAM 134 grasps the address to which the plate-like polygon has been transferred in advance based on the current drawing list, and reads the plate-like polygon. In step S1802, the VRAM 134 grasps the address to which the character shape object has been transferred in advance, and reads the character shape object based on the current drawing list.

  In the following step S1803, parameters such as coordinates, rotation angle, and scale designated for the plate-like polygon and the character shape object in the current drawing list are grasped. Thereafter, in step S1804, processing for setting the world coordinate system is executed for the plate-like polygon and the character shape object.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a plate designated as an arrangement target by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis as a result of execution of the processing of steps S1801 to S1804. The setting of the scene in which the shape polygon PC 41 and the character shape object PC 42 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angle and scale designated by the drawing list is completed. Here, the textures of the plate-like polygon PC 41 and the character shape object PC 42 are pasted in the texture mapping process of the effect character described later. In FIG. 33, the rearmost image PC21, the viewpoint PC31, and the screen area PC32 are set as in FIG.

  For the plate-like polygon PC 41 and the character shape object PC 42 set as described above, the conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (step S 605) already described with reference to FIG. S606), clipping processing (step S607), and lighting processing (step S608) are performed.

  Next, the texture mapping process of the effect character performed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The texture mapping process of the effect character is executed in the texture mapping process of step S609 in the drawing process (FIG. 14). Also, the texture mapping process of the effect character is activated when the plate-like polygon and the character shape object are included in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether there is a plate-like polygon PC 41 to which no texture is attached. If there is a plate-like polygon PC 41 to which the texture is not attached (step S1901: YES), the surface to which the texture is attached is grasped in step S1902. As a surface to which the texture is to be attached, the surface facing the viewpoint PC 31 is grasped. For example, in a case where the plate-like polygon PC 41 is projected onto the screen area PC 32 by perspective projection, a line connecting the center of the plate-like polygon PC 41 to the point-of-view PC 31 If the angle between the front surface of the polygon PC 41 and the normal vector extending from the front surface is less than 90 degrees, it is determined that the front surface of the plate polygon PC 41 faces the viewpoint PC 31 and the angle is 90 degrees. If the size is large, it can be determined that the surface on the back side of the plate-like polygon PC 41 faces the viewpoint PC 91 side. In this case, the plate-like polygon PC 41 is configured not to be arranged such that the angle is 90 degrees.

  After the surface facing the viewpoint PC 31 is identified in step S1902, the texture of the two-dimensional image of the specific character is attached to the surface in step S1903.

  Here, as the texture to be attached to the plate-like polygon PC 41, an image of a fish facing right and an image of a fish facing left are prepared, and the head of the image of the fish is in accordance with the rotation angle at which the plate-like polygon PC 41 is disposed. The image of the fish is selected so as to be close to the viewpoint PC 31. Further, as the texture, an image filtered at a plurality of resolutions is prepared, and the texture according to the distance from the viewpoint of the plate-like polygon PC 41 to be attached (the size projected onto the screen area PC 32) is attached Be As a result, it is possible to use a texture image according to the display area (number of pixels) of the specific character, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of an unnatural and difficult-to-see mapping result.

  Further, in the plurality of plate-like polygons PC 41 displayed simultaneously, the same texture is used if the surfaces to which the texture is attached are the same. As a result, the texture can be shared by the plurality of plate-like polygons PC 41, and it is possible to suppress the trouble of specifying the texture and the storage capacity required to store the texture.

  By performing the processing of step S1902 to step S1903, the texture of the image of the specific character can be attached to the surface of the plate-like polygon PC41 facing the viewpoint PC31, and the surface to which the texture is attached is displayed on the screen area PC32. It can be projected.

  When the process of pasting the texture in step S1903 ends, it is determined again in step S1901 whether or not there is a plate-like polygon PC41 to which the texture is not pasted. That is, the process of steps S1902 to S1903 is repeated until the texture is attached to all the plate-like polygons PC41.

  When the process of attaching the texture to all the plate-like polygons PC41 is completed (step S1901: NO), the process of attaching the texture to the character shape object PC42 is performed in step S1904. In the process, a texture is attached to the entire character shape object PC42. Also, a texture is attached to all the character shape objects PC42.

  When the texture mapping process to the character shape object PC 42 is finished, the texture mapping process of the effect character is ended.

  In the rendering data creation process for effects (step S611) already described with reference to FIG. 14, the planar polygon PC 41 and the character shape object PC 42 to which the texture is attached in the texture mapping process of the effect character are virtual two dimensional Drawing data is created by projecting onto a flat screen area PC32.

  As described above, when the number of specific characters to be displayed is equal to or more than a predetermined number, drawing data is created using the plate-like polygon PC 41 and the character shape object PC 42 for the specific characters. As compared with the case of using VDP, the load of drawing processing of the VDP 135 can be reduced, and the possibility of processing drop can be reduced.

  Further, the image is displayed using the plate-like polygon PC 41 for a specific character far from the viewpoint PC 31 and using the character shape object PC 42 for a specific character near the viewpoint PC 31, so an image using the plate-like polygon PC 41 is displayed The size is reduced, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, since the plate-like polygon PC 41 is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the rotation angle set for each frame in the rotation angle group, the posture (arrangement angle of arrangement) of the plate-like polygon changes as the frame advances. The display using the plate-like polygon PC 41 can be diversified.

  In addition, since the rotation angle group is selected from among three types and set in the plate-like polygon PC 41, plate-like polygons having different character identification information may be selected among different plate-like polygons. Since the operations of each other can be made different, the display using the plate-like polygon PC 41 can be diversified.

  Further, in the plate-like polygon PC41, since the texture of the image of the specific character is attached to the surface facing the viewpoint PC31, the surface to which the texture image is attached can be displayed and the texture is not attached. It is possible to prevent the problem of projection of the surface. Further, since the texture is attached to only one side of the plate-like polygon PC 41, the load of the texture mapping process of the VDP 135 can be reduced, and the possibility of the process drop can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when a specific character is displayed, a low definition object (plate-like polygon PC 41) and a high definition object (character shape object PC 42) are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention may be configured to use low definition sprite data and high definition sprite data in the image display of. Sprite data in this case does not require anti-aliasing processing in the case of low definition, and sprite data which requires the processing in the case of high definition, and linear interpolation processing is necessary for enlargement / reduction in the case of low definition. In the case of high definition, sprite data or the like which requires the processing is used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the plate-like polygon PC 41 is used as a low definition object, but the invention is not limited to this, and it is modeled into a specific character shape while reducing the number of polygons from the high definition character shape object PC 42. Objects may be used. For example, those formed in a simple shape such as a cube or a hemisphere can also be used. Also in the case of attaching a texture to those formed into these shapes, it is sufficient if the texture is attached to the portion projected on the screen area PC32.

  Here, the low definition object is an object that requires relatively low processing load to be displayed as compared to the high definition object. For example, the processing load is smaller because the amount of data is smaller than that of a high definition object, the processing load is small because the capacity of image data of texture is smaller than that of a high definition object, texture is pasted than an object of high definition The processing load is small due to the small number of parts, and the processing load is small due to the simplification of the projection processing to the screen area than the high definition object.

  Further, a plate-like polygon which is one of the low definition objects is modeled as a shape having no thickness, and is image data having a small amount of data because the number of polygons (the number of vertices) is small. For example, it is image data in which two triangular polygons are combined such that all vertices are in the same plane. Also, when projected from a predetermined direction, an image with no sense of incongruity is displayed, but depending on the direction of projection, the back of the polygon may be displayed, or a surface to which a texture is not attached may be displayed, etc. Depending on the projection direction, it is image data that causes discomfort in display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the plate-like polygon is set when the distance between the arrangement coordinates and the camera coordinates is equal to or more than the predetermined value in steps S1604 and S1606. Instead of this, a predetermined number of specific characters may be extracted in descending order of the distance, and a plate-like polygon may be set for them.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to use the plate-like polygon PC41, and for which position the plate-like polygon PC41 is to be used for a specific character, the surface to which the texture of the plate-like polygon PC41 is attached, Although the rotation angle at the time of arranging the plate-like polygon PC 41 is configured to be determined by the display CPU 131, these are set in the data table, and the display CPU 131 uses the plate-like polygon PC 41 according to the setting of the data table. You may configure it. When setting the rotation angle of the plate-like polygon and the surface to which the texture is to be attached to the data table, when setting the plate-like polygon to the world coordinate system, the surface to attach the texture is set to face the viewpoint PC 31 side. This makes it possible to display the surface to which the texture is attached.

  Alternatively, a hemispherical object may be placed in a virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture based on moving image data may be attached to the inner surface of the object. By arranging the viewpoint in a hemispherical shape and changing the direction, it is possible to display a moving image while changing the display area.

  Further, in the effect in the present configuration, after a number of specific character images move from the back side to the front side of the display screen in a group, the display is made to move to the outside of the display screen. A large number of specific character images may be displayed in groups to move the display screen vertically or horizontally.

  Although the sheet polygon PC 41 is used for the specific character arranged at a position far from the viewpoint, if the image based on the sheet polygon PC 41 is arranged so as to be inconspicuous, the arrangement position is appropriately set. It is selectable. For example, in a predetermined range in the virtual space, the ratio of the number of plate-shaped polygons PC41 to the number of character-shaped object PC42 may be arranged to be equal to or less than a predetermined value. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the specific character image using the plate-like polygon PC 41 being unnaturally noticeable.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of specific characters (three bodies) are displayed as one group as shown in the display screen G, and a plate-like portion of a specific character (one body) is displayed. It may be configured to display using the polygon PC 41 and to display the remaining (two bodies) using the character shape object PC 42. In this case, the plate-like polygon PC 41 is set for a specific character arranged at a position between the specific character located at a position farthest from the viewpoint PC 31 among the specific characters of one group and another specific character. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the specific character image using the plate-like polygon PC 41 being unnaturally noticeable. Further, by displaying the specific character so as to move it in one direction without changing the direction of the specific character, it is possible to make the rotation angle at the time of arranging the plate-like polygon PC41 and the character shape object PC42 in virtual three dimensional space constant. It is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing configuration.

  In addition, although the rotation angle of the plate-like polygon PC41 is set by the rotation angle group, the plate-like polygon PC41 is arranged at the rotation angle set in the data table, and if the texture surface is not displayed The rotation angle may be corrected by For example, by monitoring the normal extending from the surface to which the texture of the plate-like polygon PC41 is attached when the plate-like polygon PC41 is arranged at the rotation angle set in the data table instead of the rotation angle group. It is determined whether the plate-like polygon PC 41 faces the camera PC 31 side. When not facing the camera PC31 side, the sheet polygon PC41 is arranged to be rotated 180 degrees around any one of the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis according to the direction of the normal. It may be configured.

  Further, although either low-resolution image data or high-resolution image data is selected and used according to the distance from the camera PC 31, low-definition image data and It is also possible to select and use one of the high definition image data. For example, when processing such as deformation is performed on image data, the load of the processing may be reduced using low definition image data as the image data, or the position and rotation angle of the image data may be set for each frame. When the image data is determined by calculation, low-resolution image data may be used as the image data to reduce the processing load.

  In addition, color information may be changed between specific characters and displayed. For example, color information of red, purple and yellow may be displayed randomly.

  Further, in the case of projecting the plate-like polygon PC 41 in parallel projection onto the screen area PC 32, if the normal vector extending from the surface on the front side of the plate-like polygon PC 41 intersects the plane extending the screen area PC 32 It can be determined that the surface on the front side of the polygon PC41 faces the viewpoint PC31 side, and in other cases, it can be determined that the surface on the back side of the plate polygon PC41 faces the viewpoint PC31. In this case, the normal vector and the plane of the screen area PC32 are not arranged parallel to each other.

  There are also a first effect period in which a large number of specific characters are displayed and a second effect period in which a specific character is displayed less than the first effect period, and a plate-like polygon is displayed for the specific character displayed in the first effect period. You may comprise so that PC41 may be utilized.

  Also, the texture pasting process may be configured to be performed after projecting the plate-like polygon PC 41 and the character shape object PC 42 onto the screen area PC 32. In this case, to attach the texture to the plate polygon PC41, the coordinates (hereinafter also referred to as texture coordinates) in the texture image corresponding to the respective pixels in the plate polygon PC41 projected onto the screen area PC32 are calculated. This is executed by setting color information corresponding to the coordinates in each pixel. The texture coordinates are previously associated with the vertexes of the polygon forming the plate-like polygon PC41, and the calculation of the texture coordinates corresponding to each pixel in the plate-like polygon PC41 is performed in the texture coordinates associated with the vertex. It is obtained by performing linear interpolation in consideration of perspective transformation based on the above.

  Also, as the texture to be attached to the plate-like polygon PC 41, data that has been two-dimensional imaged by projecting the character shape object PC 42 on a predetermined plane at the design stage or at a stage prior to the texture mapping process may be used. . Various textures can be created by changing the rotation angle of the character shape object to be projected on the plane, and the display using the plate-like polygon PC 41 can be diversified.

  Alternatively, the plate-like polygon PC 41 and the character shape object PC 42 may be arranged to move over a plurality of frames so as to draw the same trajectory. A specific example in this case will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of a virtual three-dimensional space viewed from the Y-axis direction. In the virtual three-dimensional space shown in FIG. 36, the rearmost image PC21, the viewpoint PC31, and the screen area PC32 are set as in the virtual three-dimensional space described above. The display CPU 131 refers to the arrangement coordinates of the plate-like polygon PC 41 and the character shape object PC 42 set in the data table when arranging the plate-like polygon PC 41 and the character shape object PC 42 in the virtual three-dimensional space. The arrangement coordinates are set so that the arrangement coordinates of each of the plate-like polygon PC 41 and the character shape object PC 42 move in the arrow direction in the drawing as the frame progresses (as the pointer position in the data table progresses). ing. In the data table, the rotation angle is set such that the same surface (surface to which the texture image is attached) of the plate-like polygon PC 41 always faces the viewpoint. In addition, the character shape object PC42 is always disposed within a predetermined range on the viewpoint PC31 side from the plate-like polygon PC41. Further, a moving trajectory of the character shape object PC42 (a shape connecting the arrangement coordinates across a plurality of frames) is the same as that of the plate-like polygon PC41.

  By this configuration, the plate-like polygon PC 41 can be moved in a state of being always directed to the viewpoint PC 31 side. In addition, since the plate-like polygon PC41 and the character-shaped object PC42 move along the same trajectory while the character-shaped object PC42 side is on the viewpoint PC31 side, display effect can be performed without making the plate-like polygon PC41 conspicuous. it can.

<Configuration for Displaying 3D Image Using Connected Object>
Next, a configuration for displaying a 3D image using a connected object will be described.

  A connected object is a single unit object in which a plurality of part objects (partial objects) are connected with joints as joints, and is set to move a character of a 3D image by relatively displacing each part object It is done. By using the connected object, the character of the 3D image can be moved smoothly. In view of the fact that the connected object has a skeleton and joints, it can also be called a bone model.

  The connected object is set to display a character that performs a predetermined action. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of linked objects for displaying a common character are set. The plurality of types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, in order to display a common character, a first connected object PC35 and a second connected object PC36 are set. Each of the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 has a plurality of connecting parts CT1 and CT2, but the connecting parts CT1 and CT2 are set in different places.

  Specifically, although the first connected object PC 35 is not provided with a connecting portion at the knee portion, a connecting portion CT1 is provided at the elbow portion, as shown in FIGS. 37 (a-1) and (a-2). It is possible to display the operation as shown. On the other hand, the second connected object PC 36 is not provided with the connecting part at the elbow part, but the connecting part CT2 is provided at the knee part, as shown in FIG. 37 (b-1) and (b-2). It is possible to display the operation. As described above, by setting the connecting parts in different places, it is possible to make the character perform different operations depending on the case where the first connected object PC 35 is used and the case where the second connected object PC 36 is used. It becomes.

  Although both connected objects PC35 and PC36 have the connecting parts CT1 and CT2 at the common part, they may be configured not to have the connecting parts CT1 and CT2 at the common part. Also, although a common texture is mapped to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, a texture may be set individually. If it is possible to cause the character to perform different operations by preparing a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36, the positions of the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 and the type of the character are arbitrary.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying a state in which the character is moving using both of the connected objects PC35 and PC36 will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing operation processing for a connected object executed by the display CPU 131. Arithmetic processing for the connected object is executed in the arithmetic processing for rendering in step S504 of the task processing (FIG. 12). In addition, the operation process for the connected object is started when the data table corresponding to the game time in which the effect using the connected objects PC 35 and PC 36 is executed is set.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not an effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is being performed (the above character is being displayed). If the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not it is time to start an effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36. If it is not the start timing, the present arithmetic processing is finished, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, the start designation information of the connected object effect is stored, and in the subsequent step S2004, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as the control object based on the currently set data table. Do. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2004, in the setting process for control start immediately before (step S501), the process for control start is completed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36. Further, information for control of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 whose control has been started is stored in the work RAM 132 until the current series of effects using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is completed.

  In the subsequent step S2005, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated, and control information related to the first connected object PC35 is updated. In step S2006, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated, and control information related to the second connected object PC36 is updated.

  In the subsequent step S2007, the designation information of the first effect period is stored. Here, in the effects using the connected objects PC 35 and PC 36, the entire effect period is divided into a plurality of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period, and a third effect period. Then, a character is displayed using the first connected object PC 35 in the first effect period and the third effect period, and a character is displayed using the second connected object PC 36 in the second effect period. Thereafter, in step S2008, the parameter of the first connected object PC35 of the both connected objects PC35 and PC36 is set so as to be designated in the current drawing list.

  In the subsequent step S2009, based on the currently set data table, the object to be updated this time, which is another object for the first effect period, is grasped. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2009, in the setting process for control start immediately before (step S501), the process for control start is completed for the object to be updated this time. Thereafter, in step S2010, various parameters of the above-identified other objects are calculated, and control information related to these other objects is updated, after which the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when arithmetic processing for connected objects is executed, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set. Parameters of the first connected object PC 35 are set. In addition, the start specification information of the connected object effect indicating that the effect using the connected objects PC 35 and PC 36 should be started, and the specification information of the first effect period indicating the first effect period are set in the drawing list. Be done.

  On the other hand, if the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (step S2001: YES), is it in the first effect period based on the data table currently set in step S2011? It is determined whether or not. If it is during the first effect period, the processing of step S2004 to step S2010 is performed, and then this arithmetic processing ends. By the way, this time during the first effect period, the first connected object PC 35 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 37A) as the first effect period progresses. In step S2005, calculation of parameters is performed.

  As described above, when arithmetic processing for connected objects is executed, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set. Parameters of the first connected object PC 35 are set. Further, designation information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2011 that the first effect period is not in progress, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the second effect period is in progress based on the currently set data table. If it is during the second effect period, in step S2013, the first connected object PC 35 and the second connected object PC 36 are grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

  In the subsequent step S2014, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated, and control information related to the first connected object PC35 is updated. In step S2015, various parameters of the second connected object PC 36 are calculated, and control information related to the second connected object PC 36 is updated. By the way, this time during the second effect period, the second connected object PC 36 performs a predetermined second operation (see FIG. 37B) as the second effect period progresses. In step S2015, calculation of parameters is performed.

  In the subsequent step S2016, the designation information of the second effect period is stored, and in step S2017, the parameter of the second connected object PC36 of the both connected objects PC35 and PC36 is specified in the current drawing list. Set

  In the subsequent step S2018, based on the currently set data table, the object to be updated this time, which is another object for the second effect period, is grasped. Here, the second effect period is a state in which the effect has developed more than the first effect period, and the number of objects displayed when switching from at least the first effect period to the second effect period increases. The setting process (step S501) for the control start with respect to the increased object at the time of switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S2018. Thereafter, in step S2019, various parameters of the above-identified other objects are calculated, and control information related to these other objects is updated, after which the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when arithmetic processing for connected objects is executed, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set. The parameters of the second connected object PC 36 are set. Further, designation information of a second effect period indicating that it is a second effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2012 that the second effect period is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S2020 to indicate that it is the third effect period. In step S2020, the first connected object PC 35 and the second connected object PC 36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In the subsequent step S2021, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated, and control information related to the first connected object PC35 is updated. By the way, this time during the third effect period, the first connected object PC 35 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 37A) as the third effect period progresses. Then, at step S2021, calculation of parameters is performed. In step S2022, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated, and control information related to the second connected object PC36 is updated.

  In the subsequent step S2023, the designation information of the third effect period is stored, and in step S2024, the parameter of the first connected object PC35 of the both connected objects PC35 and PC36 is specified in the current drawing list. Set

  In the subsequent step S2025, based on the currently set data table, the object to be updated this time, which is another object for the third effect period, is grasped. Here, the third effect period is a state in which the effect has developed more than the second effect period, and the number of objects displayed when switching from at least the second effect period to the third effect period is increased. The setting process (step S501) for the control start with respect to the object which increased when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S2025. Thereafter, in step S2026, various parameters of the above-identified other objects are calculated, and control information related to these other objects is updated, after which the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when arithmetic processing for connected objects is executed, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set. Parameters of the first connected object PC 35 are set. Further, designation information of a third effect period indicating that it is a third effect period is set in the drawing list.

  Next, the setting process for linked object effect performed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for linked object effect is executed in the setting process for effect in step S603 in the drawing process (FIG. 14). Further, the setting process for connected object effect is activated when any one of the start instruction of the connected object effect and the specification of the first effect period to the third effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S 2101, it is determined whether start designation of connected object effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S2102, based on the current drawing list, the VRAM 134 grasps the address to which the first connected object PC 35 has been transferred in advance, and reads the first connected object PC 35. . In step S2103, the VRAM 134 grasps the address to which the second connected object PC 36 has been transferred in advance, based on the current drawing list, and reads the second connected object PC 36.

  In the subsequent step S2104, setting processing of the uniform α value for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC 35 is set to “1” which is the opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC 36 is set to “0” which is the completely transparent information Do. As a result, while color information (including information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) which is set in advance is applied to all pixels of the first connected object PC 35 as it is, The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of two connected objects PC 36.

  In the subsequent step S2105, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC35 in the current drawing list are grasped as parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36. Thereafter, in step S2106, processing for setting the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since it is the processing time which concerns on the start specification of a connection object production this time, arrangement | positioning to the world coordinate system of both connection objects PC35 and PC36 is performed. Further, although the shapes of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 substantially match, the connected part of each part object is different. Then, even if the parameter of the first connected object PC 35 is applied as it is to the second connected object PC 36, pixels for which the coordinate designations do not match are generated, but for such pixels, predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP 135 side. .

  In the subsequent step S2107, while grasping other objects for the first effect period designated in the current drawing list, in step S2108, various parameters designated about the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S2109, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and the setting process for the present connected object effect is ended.

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, the arrangement of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 simultaneously starts in the world coordinate system. In addition, since the same parameter is applied to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged in an overlapping manner at the same position in the world coordinate system. However, since the second connected object PC 36 is treated as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering because the process of step S 2104 is executed, the first connected object of the both connected objects PC 35 and PC 36 is displayed on the display screen G. Only the PC 35 is displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2101 that the start designation of the linked object effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2110. In step S2110, it is determined whether designation of the first effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  If it is set, the process of steps S2104 to S2109 is performed, and then the setting process ends. In this case, in step S2106, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from information of parameters set corresponding to the first connected object PC35 in the drawing list. Update.

  By executing the setting process for linked object effect as described above, various parameters of both linked objects PC 35 and PC 36 are updated, but the process of step S 2104 is executed. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the first connected object PC35 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2105 corresponds to the first connected object PC 35, the first connection is performed so that the first operation is performed on the display screen G with the progress of the first effect period. The object PC 35 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S2110 that designation of the first effect period is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether designation of the second effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  If it is set, in step S2112, a process of setting a uniform α value for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC 35 is set to “0” which is complete transparency information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC 36 is set to “1” which is opaque information Do. As a result, color information (including information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) which is set in advance is applied to all pixels of the second connected object PC 36 as it is, The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of “1” connected object PC 35.

  In the subsequent step S2113, the parameters specified for the second connected object PC36 in the current drawing list are grasped as parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36. Thereafter, in step S2114, processing for setting the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is processing for updating the second effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set corresponding to the second connected object PC36 in the drawing list. Understand and update from the parameter information. In this case, although the shapes of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 substantially match, the connected part of each part object is different. Then, even if the parameter of the second connected object PC 36 is applied as it is to the first connected object PC 35, pixels for which the coordinate designations do not match are generated, but for such pixels, predetermined adjustments are performed on the VDP 135 side. .

  In the subsequent step S2115, while grasping other objects for the second effect period designated in the current drawing list, in step S2116, various parameters designated about the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S2117, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and the setting process for the present connected object effect is ended. Here, when the current processing time is a timing related to switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, and accordingly, the process according to that is executed in step S2117. .

  By executing the setting process for linked object effect as described above, various parameters of both linked objects PC 35 and PC 36 are updated, but the process of step S 2112 is executed. Only the second connected object PC36 is displayed among the objects PC35 and PC36. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S2113 corresponds to the second connected object PC 36, the second connection is performed so that the second operation is performed on the display screen G with the progress of the second effect period. The object PC 36 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S2111 that the specification of the second effect period is not set in the current drawing list, this means that the specification of the third effect period is set in the current drawing list, The process proceeds to step S2118.

  In step S2118, a process of setting a uniform α value for the third effect period is performed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC 35 is set to “1” which is the opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC 36 is set to “0” which is the completely transparent information Do. As a result, while color information (including information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) which is set in advance is applied to all pixels of the first connected object PC 35 as it is, The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of two connected objects PC 36.

  In the subsequent step S2119, the parameter designated for the first connected object PC35 in the current drawing list is grasped as the parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36. Thereafter, in step S2120, processing for setting the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is processing for updating the third effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set corresponding to the first connected object PC35 in the drawing list. Understand and update from the parameter information.

  In the subsequent step S2121, while grasping other objects for the third effect period designated in the current drawing list, in step S2122, various parameters designated about the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S2123, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and the setting process for the present connected object effect is ended. Here, when the current processing time is a timing related to switching from the second effect period to the third effect period, the number of objects to be displayed is increased, and accordingly, processing corresponding to that is executed in step S2123. .

  By executing the setting process for linked object effect as described above, various parameters of both linked objects PC 35 and PC 36 are updated, but the process of step S 2118 is executed. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the first connected object PC35 is displayed. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S2119 corresponds to the first connected object PC 35, the first connection is performed so that the first operation is performed on the display screen G as the third effect period progresses. The object PC 35 is displayed.

  Next, the contents of the connected object effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory view for explaining a connected object effect. Further, FIG. 40 (a) shows a first effect period, FIG. 40 (b) shows a second effect period, and FIG. 40 (c) shows a third effect period. 40 (a-1), (b-1) and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 40 (a-2), (b-2) and (c-2) are images of the world coordinate system. A display screen G is shown. 40 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2), the background image and the symbol are omitted, but in actuality, the background image is displayed on the back side of the image for each effect At the same time, the symbol is displayed on the near side.

  In the first effect period, as shown in FIG. 40 (a-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but a transparentizing process is performed on the second connected object PC36. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40 (a-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC 35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first operation is performed with the progress of the first effect period. . In addition, characters CH13 to CH15 shown in "A" to "C" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects.

  In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the transparency processing is performed on the first connected object PC35. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the second connected object PC 36 is displayed on the display screen G, and the second operation is performed with the progress of the second effect period. .

  Here, when FIG. 40 (a-2) and FIG. 40 (b-2) are compared, it is shown that both characters CH12 have different shapes, but actually both connected objects PC35, The same texture is mapped to the PC 36, and the connection portion (joint portion) becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first effect period is switched to the second effect period, the same, substantially the same or similar images are displayed on the display screen G with respect to the character CH12, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the switch. . However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of switching, textures may be set individually for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Also, in the second effect period, characters CH13 to CH17 shown in "A" to "E" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH13 to CH17 is larger than that in the first effect period.

  In the third effect period, as shown in FIG. 40 (c-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the transparentizing process is performed on the second connected object PC36. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40 (c-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC 35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first operation is performed with the progress of the third effect period. . Also, in the third effect period, characters CH13 to CH19 shown in "A" to "G" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH13 to CH19 is larger than that in the second effect period.

  As described above, by setting the plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 for the common character, it is possible to switch between the connected objects PC35 and PC36 to be displayed according to the type of operation using the joint part. . For example, when performing a plurality of types of operations in a single connected object, it is necessary to set an amount of connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity which can be stored as a single image data in the NAND flash memory 162 may be exceeded. There is concern that processing time and transfer time may be increased in handling. On the other hand, since the plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of operations without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In addition, at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many opportunities for correction of the effect, and if the entire movement of the connected object is reviewed each time the character movement is corrected, it takes a long time to design. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it is necessary to correct the effect, the connected object PC35 already created is created. , The need to modify all of the PC 36 is eliminated. Therefore, while enabling the design of the pachinko machine 10 to be performed well, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of operations.

  Further, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object is controlled by the display CPU 131 prior to the timing when the linked object is switched to display a character, and is arranged in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135 Targeted. Thereby, when the switching timing comes, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute the control start process on the switching destination object, but execute the control update process whose processing load is smaller than that of the control start process. The processing load at the switching timing is reduced because it is good.

  In particular, at the switching timing, the effect develops and the number of objects displayed increases, so the processing load on the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 becomes relatively large. In this case, assuming that the control start process is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that processing omission may occur in the display CPU 131 or VDP 135. However, as described above, the control updating process is performed on the switching destination object. Since the process can be performed, the occurrence of the process omission can be prevented.

  In addition, since both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, and the uniform α value to be applied is switched between the complete transmission information and the non-transmission information, the display CPU 131 uniformly changes the α value It suffices to specify switching, and the VDP 135 may switch the uniform α value to be applied according to the specification. Therefore, the above excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complication of the processing configuration of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135.

  Further, only the parameter information for the connected object to be displayed among the connected objects PC 35 and PC 36 simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system is provided from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135. This reduces the amount of data set in the drawing list. Further, in the VDP 135, the processing load of the VDP 135 can be reduced because the parameters of both connected objects PC 35 and PC 36 may be updated in the same manner.

  In the switching of the first effect period to the third effect period, instead of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the motion of the effect character different from the character for which the plurality of connected objects are prepared is It may be configured to be newly added, or may be configured to start displaying a character for presentation with a large processing load separately from the character for which the plurality of connected objects are prepared.

  Further, the control start timing in the display CPU 131 of the second connected object PC 36 and the control start timing in the VDP 135 may not be the same as the first connected object PC 35. For example, the timing may be before the switching timing from the first effect period to the second effect period, but after the control start timing of the first connected object PC 35.

  In addition, although the processing load at the switching timing of the rendering period is larger than the above configuration, the control of the second connected object PC 36 may be started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are not simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, it is not necessary to adjust the α value uniformly to switch the display object.

  Further, with respect to both connected objects PC 35 and PC 36 simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, switching of the display object may be performed not by adjusting the α value uniformly but by switching the rendering object. In this case, since the connected object not to be displayed is not rendered, the processing load at the time of rendering is reduced compared to the above configuration.

  In addition, the third effect period may be incomplete, or the effect period of the fourth effect period or more may be set. Further, three or more connected objects may be prepared for one character.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 20, the Z buffer 143 can be used to mask an object. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform mask calculation on the program of the display CPU 131, and there is no need to set mask data, which is a kind of image data, in the VDP 135. Therefore, mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required to store image data.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26, the drawing data for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is separately stored, and to the game player operation device 48 in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large. In the case where the display mode is switched based on the operation of, the other stored data is used. As a result, even if switching of the display mode is repeatedly performed in a short time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the processing drop.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 36, the same kind of character image is displayed using the plate-like polygon and the character shape object. Therefore, it is possible to display a large number of character images while reducing the processing load of VDP 135, and suitable display effects can be performed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40, since a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set for a common character, the connection to be displayed according to the type of operation using a joint part The objects PC 35 and PC 36 can be switched. For example, when performing a plurality of types of operations in a single connected object, it is necessary to set an amount of connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity which can be stored as a single image data in the NAND flash memory 162 may be exceeded. There is concern that processing time and transfer time may be increased in handling. On the other hand, since the plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of operations without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In addition, at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many opportunities for correction of the effect, and if the entire movement of the connected object is reviewed each time the character movement is corrected, it takes a long time to design. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it is necessary to correct the effect, the connected object PC35 already created is created. , The need to modify all of the PC 36 is eliminated. Therefore, while enabling the design of the pachinko machine 10 to be performed well, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of operations.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the electrical configuration is different from that of the first embodiment. The differences from the first embodiment will be described below. FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 41, the main control device 50 is provided as in the first embodiment. The main control unit 50 also has a payout control unit 55 for controlling the payout unit 56, a power supply function for supplying power to each device including the main control unit 50, and a power supply for driving and controlling the game ball shooting mechanism 58 and The launch control device 57, the main display unit 33 for displaying the result of the game play, and the feature display unit 34 for displaying the result of the electronic combination open lottery are electrically connected. Further, an audio light emission control device 60 is provided to drive and control the various light emitting units 35, 36 and 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 50 and to receive operation signals from the rendering operation device 48. Further, a display control device 70 for controlling the symbol display device 31 based on a command transmitted from the voice light emission control device 60 is provided.

  The hardware configuration of the display control device 70 is different from that of the display control device 130 in the first embodiment. The hardware configuration of the display control device 70 will be described below.

  The display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted, as shown in FIG. .

  The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to the input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice emission control device 60, but includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received. Be

  The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74 and the VRAM 75 via the bus, and based on the command received from the audio light emission control device 60, various data stored in the memory module 74 is stored in the work RAM 73 or VRAM 75. Give a transfer instruction to transfer. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and based on a command received from the audio light emission control device 60, performs drawing instruction to cause the symbol display device 31 to output an image signal. The memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described below.

  The memory module 74 stores control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and also sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, background data, and moving images The storage unit stores various image data (image information) including image data and the like in advance. The memory module 74 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory which does not require an external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily performed. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-write and read only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character, and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which the still image data is compressed. Moving image data will be described in detail later.

  The work RAM 73 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 74 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 includes a volatile semiconductor memory which requires an external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily performed. The work RAM 73 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the display CPU 72 corresponding to the control data. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 75 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily performed. The VRAM 75 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  The VRAM 75 includes a development buffer 81, and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the VDP 76 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be incorporated in the VDP 76.

  The VDP 76 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. This is a kind of drawing circuit for operating the image processing device 31b incorporated so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 76 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a "drawing chip", and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving image decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these circuits are connected to one another via a bus, and also connected to an I / F 95 for the display CPU 72 and an I / F 96 for the VRAM 75.

  In the VDP 76, the drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 is stored in the register 92. By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 activates a program according to the drawing list and executes predetermined processing. Note that all of the control programs for operating the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the control unit 91, and the control program and the contents of the drawing list The controller 91 may be configured to execute a predetermined process based on the above. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance.

  As the above process, the control unit 91 uses the image data expanded in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (or processes it) to create drawing data of one frame in the frame buffer 82. The drawing data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on display screen G of symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. It means that.

  Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of the frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data of one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas (unit setting areas) corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. ing. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green) and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  The present invention is not limited to the full color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  By providing the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b in the frame buffer 82, the drawing on the symbol display device 31 is executed using the drawing data created in one of the frame areas. Creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

  The display circuit 94 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 94. It is output to the symbol display device 31 via the connected output port 78. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal. The display circuit 94 is provided with a scaler 97 and an image signal output unit 98 in order to generate and output the image signal. The scaler 97 and the image signal output unit 98 will be described in detail later.

  Also, the moving picture decoder 93 decodes the moving picture data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The contents of the process will be described in detail later.

<Specific Configuration of Memory Module 74>
Next, the specific configuration of the memory module 74 will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a block diagram for describing a hardware configuration of the memory module 74. Referring to FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, the memory module 74 is configured by packaging the controller 101 and the NAND flash memory 102 into one package. The NAND flash memory 102 is provided with a memory cell array, and in the memory cell array, a control program area 103 storing control program data of the display CPU 72 and an image display on the symbol display device 31. An image data area 104 storing image data to be used is provided.

  The controller 101 transmits / receives data between the NAND flash memory 102 and the main unit I / F 111 which transmits / receives data between the display CPU 72 as the transfer instruction source and the work RAM 73 and VRAM 75 of the data transfer destination. / F 112, a controller CPU 113 that is a control unit that performs data control processing in the controller 101 and physical block management processing of the NAND flash memory 102, a control ROM 114 and control RAM 115, and a NAND flash based on a transfer instruction from the controller CPU 113 A transfer execution circuit 116 for reading data from the memory 102, a cache memory 117 for temporarily storing data read by the transfer execution circuit 116, and a NAND flash memory 10 An error correction circuit 118 for performing error detection and correction of errors detected in data read from, and a.

  In general, the NAND flash memory 102 is used avoiding the block even if there is a block containing a defect in the memory cell array. And the presence or absence of this bad block and a site | part differ for every solid. Therefore, the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 needs to be associated with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 102, and the association is executed by the controller CPU 113.

  Specifically, in the control ROM 114, an address management table (address management information group) for correlating the logical address with the address of each page of the physical block is stored in advance. The address designation command received from the display CPU 72 is temporarily stored in the address designation buffer of the control RAM 115. When the address designation command is stored in the control RAM 115, the controller CPU 113 reads the address management table from the control ROM 114, and grasps the address of the page of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, the transfer execution circuit 116 performs data transfer so that a transfer instruction is issued from the controller CPU 113 to the transfer execution circuit 116, and data of a physical address related to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117. Processing is performed. The data transferred to the cache memory 117 is transferred to the work RAM 73 or VRAM 75.

  Incidentally, a random access memory such as a mask ROM or a NOR type flash memory is used as the control ROM 114. Further, as the cache memory 117, one having a read speed (transfer speed) faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102 is used when compared by reading data of the same capacity. Specifically, a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply to store data is provided, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used.

  The memory module 74 is provided with a boot memory 119 in which boot data for initial boot in the display CPU 72 is stored in advance. A mask ROM is used as the boot memory 119 so that random access can be performed, and when compared by reading data of the same capacity, the read speed (transfer speed) is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102 It is used. The boot memory 119 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data read speed is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102, and may be an internal power supply such as a battery. May be a DRAM unit or an SRAM unit.

  The storage capacity of the boot memory 119 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 102. Specifically, the storage capacity is the same as, substantially the same as, or similar to the storage capacity for one page in the NAND flash memory 102. When boot data for initial boot is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, and the processing at the initial boot is executed in the display CPU 72, data from the boot memory 119, not from the NAND flash memory 102. Is read out. As boot data for initial startup, an instruction code for performing initial setting of the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76, and an instruction code for transferring data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 to the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 are set.

  The controller 101 executes data transfer processing. The contents of the data transfer process are the same as the data transfer process (FIG. 7) of the controller 161 in the first embodiment. In addition, the operation and effect of the execution of the data transfer process are also the same as in the first embodiment.

<Working buffer 73 for developing RAM 73 and VRAM 75>
Next, the work RAM 73 to which data is transferred in advance from the memory module 74 and the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 will be described.

  First, the work RAM 73 will be described.

  In work RAM 73, as shown in FIG. 41, the transferred data may be used after it has been used once, while the situation where it may be used thereafter continues, specifically to the power to itself. While the supply is continued, there are provided a common area 73a for storing and holding, and a change area 73b to be overwritten upon transfer of other data after use.

  Program data required to advance main processing (FIG. 9), V interrupt processing (FIG. 11), command interrupt processing and the like in the display CPU 72 is written to the common area 73a. By providing the common area 73a, it is possible to smoothly start main processing, V interrupt processing and command interrupt processing which are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals.

  If it is necessary to temporarily store data exceeding the storage capacity of the change area 73b, all or part of the data in the common area 73a is within a range that does not hinder the smooth execution of processing by the display CPU 72. It may be configured to be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary to restore the data to the common area 73a by the start of the corresponding processing.

  Program data necessary for executing a subroutine activated as necessary in each process is written in the change area 73b. In addition, program data required for a subroutine to be executed next may be transferred to the change area 73b during the execution of a predetermined subroutine, but the program data of the subroutine being executed may be transferred. It is done not to erase. By providing the change area 73 b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 73 is kept smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control unit 50, backup power is not supplied to the work RAM 73. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the data stored in the work RAM 73 is erased or destroyed.

  Next, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 will be described.

  Specifically, the development buffer 81 continues supplying power to itself while the situation in which the transferred image data may be used even after being used continues. During this period, there are provided a regular area 81a for storing and holding, and a change area 81b to be overwritten when transferring other image data after use.

  Background data and symbol sprite data used when starting variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 31 are written in the regular area 81a, and an abnormality notification image is displayed when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected. Abnormality notification data used when displaying is written. By providing the common area 81a, even if drawing instruction is suddenly issued from the display CPU 72, the VDP 76 can satisfactorily draw the image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the common area 81a. it can.

  When it is necessary to temporarily store image data exceeding the storage capacity of the change area 81b, all or one of the commonly used area 81a can be used without hindering the smooth display of the image on the symbol display device 31. The data of a part may be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary to restore the image data to the common area 81a by the drawing timing of the corresponding image.

  In the change area 81b, effect sprite data and moving image data such as effect characters are written. In addition, image data required for the next effect may be transferred to the area for change 81b during execution of the predetermined effect, but the transfer deletes the image data necessary for the effect during execution Not to be done. By providing the change area 81 b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the expansion buffer 81 is kept smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control device 50, backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 75. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the data stored in the VRAM 75 is erased or destroyed.

<Basic Process in Display CPU 72>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 72 will be described.

  The display CPU 72 starts main processing when the supply of operation power is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. The contents of the main process are the same as the main process (FIG. 9) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment except for the following points.

  The initial image data for which a transfer request is made in step S307 and the regular image data for which a transfer request is made in step S314 are image data for 2D. Further, various parameters grasped in step S311 are address information of an area to which initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 75, information of frame regions 82a and 82b for which drawing data is to be generated using the initial image data, Information of coordinates at the time of writing initial image data in frame regions 82a and 82b to be created, information of a scale at the time of writing the initial image data, and uniform α value (semitransparent value) at the time of writing the initial image data Information is included.

  Execution of main processing by the display CPU 72 allows execution of command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. The contents of the command interrupt process are the same as in the first embodiment. Further, the contents of the V interrupt process are the same as the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) executed by the display CPU 131 of the first embodiment except for the task process of step S407.

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

  The VDP 76 sets the value of the register 92 based on the command sent from the display CPU 72, creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 72, And the process which outputs an image signal to the symbol display apparatus 31 is performed based on the drawing data created in flame | frame area | region 82a, 82b.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 when the output start timing of the image signal is determined in advance.

  The process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer is set, which is information indicating which one of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b is to be created an image of one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, in the header information, information of presence / absence of designation of decoding and an address to which moving image data to be decoded is transferred is set. Further, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of the various designation information will be described later.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame are set, and further, information on the drawing order of each image data and each image data Parameter information is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set to be the numerical value information of serial numbers, and the information of the image data to be used in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value information is set. In addition, parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with information of each image data.

  The drawing order is set so that individual images to be displayed so as to be positioned on the back side of the display screen G in an image of one frame will be first to be drawn. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as graphic sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 43 (a), background data is set as the first drawing target, sprite data A is set as the second, sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, background data is first written to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, and then sprite data A is written to overlap the background data, and sprite data B is written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so as to be on the front side in the order of background image → effect image → pattern.

  A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3),. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the parameter P (1) of the background data is information of the address of the area to which the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75 and the two-dimensional plane in the case of writing the background data. Frame regions 82a and 82b for the coordinate information indicating the position of the image, the rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the two-dimensional plane when writing the background data, and the size set as the initial state of the background data Information on the scale at the time of writing in the data, uniform alpha value information indicating the entire transmission information (or transparency information) at the time of writing the background data, and α data specification indicating the application status and application target of the α data Information is set. The types of parameters are the same as for sprite data A as shown in FIG. 43 (c).

  Here, the coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels constituting the image data, but information of one coordinate is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. In VDP 76, it is possible to recognize that the information of the designated coordinate is one pixel at the center of the image data, and at the time of arranging the image data, make the one pixel at the center be on the designated coordinate. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the information capacity of the information of the coordinates to be designated for one image data in the display CPU 72. In addition, since the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 do not have to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

  Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one central pixel, and may be, for example, a pixel at an upper left or upper right corner. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, by using the corner pixels as the reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

  Also, the uniform α value is transmission information applied to all dots of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparent information applied in units of pixels of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 as image data. The α data can make the transmission information different for each pixel within the same background data or the same sprite data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting the α value.

  By setting α values and α data uniformly as described above, in a situation where it is sufficient to control the transparency of background data and sprite data uniformly for all pixels instead of finely controlling in pixel units. While it is possible to reduce the necessary data capacity by being able to cope with the uniform α value, it is also possible to finely control the transparency on a pixel basis by applying the α data.

  The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the creation of drawing data instructed by the already received drawing list is completed. If creation of drawing data has been completed, it is determined in step S2202 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, then in step S 2203, a response process at the time of reception is executed.

  In the response processing at the time of reception, it is grasped from which target frame information included in the drawing list, an image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is created in which frame area 82a, 82b. The set frame area is set as a drawing data generation target. Also, the presence / absence of designation of decoding is grasped, and when there is designation of decoding, the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is transferred is grasped, and the moving image decoder is operated to decode the moving image data. . Details of this decoding will be described later.

  In the following step S2204, content grasping processing is executed. In the content grasping process, while grasping the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list, various parameters of the image data are grasped. In the case of sprite data, color palette data is applied to each dot of the bitmap image. In the following step S2205, the writing process is executed. In the writing process, based on the grasped result of the content grasping process in step S2204, the image data of the current drawing object is written to the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation object.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that drawing data instructed in the already received drawing list is in the process of being created, update processing of the drawing list counter is executed in step S2206. Thereby, the drawing target is switched to the image data of the next drawing order. Then, the process of step S2204 and step S2205 is performed on the switched image data. That is, by performing the drawing process a plurality of times, drawing data of an image of one frame designated by one drawing list is created.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data are processed in one drawing process may be used, or the drawing process may be performed. The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing cycle, and may be configured to process different numbers of image data in each processing cycle of drawing processing.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or after the process of step S2205 has been performed, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not image signal output for one frame has been completed in the display circuit 94. If not completed, the present drawing processing is ended as it is, and if completed, the V interruption signal is outputted to the display CPU 72, and then the present drawing processing is ended.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec. Also, although an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data, as the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. It is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for one frame after the frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of an image signal of one frame is completed. In this case, the frame areas 82a and 82b, which are the drawing targets of the drawing data, are regulated so as not to be the output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Task processing in display CPU 72>
Next, task processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described.

  As described above, the task processing is executed in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72 in order to grasp information necessary for creating a drawing list. In this case, in the task processing, not only an individual image included in the range of the image for one frame, but also an individual image not included in the range of the image for one frame is set as a control target.

  The range of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 to be calculated in the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 45, the range partitioned by the one-dot chain line is the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, and the range partitioned by the two-dot chain line is the drawing range PL2 for one frame defined in each of the frame areas 82a and 82b.

  As shown in FIG. 45, both the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 and the drawing range PL2 for one frame are defined to be rectangular, specifically, horizontally long rectangular. In addition, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is defined so that the virtual area defined is wider than the drawing range PL2 for one frame, and the range is defined to be wide including the entire drawing range PL2 for one frame. It is done. The width is set such that a plurality of drawing ranges PL2 for one frame can be arranged in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

  In the display CPU 72, calculation of an individual image is performed with the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 as a range to be calculated, and reference coordinates are set as a reference of the position in the calculation. The reference coordinates are arbitrary as long as they are determined as one dot among the dots included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but in the pachinko machine 10, the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged at the initial setting position It is defined as a dot in the upper left corner portion of the drawing range PL2 in the above state. The initial setting position is a position where the drawing range PL2 for one frame is disposed at the center of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1.

  Since the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set as described above, the display CPU 72 does not include the image for one frame, but an individual image that will be included in the image for one frame at the subsequent update timing. It is possible to start computation in advance. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, by using the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, it is possible to execute an effect such as switching the viewpoint based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect by the player. That is, the position of the drawing range PL2 for one frame can be displaced from the initial setting position in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect. The calculation for performing this effect is executed by the task processing of the display CPU 72.

  The task processing will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not it is a viewpoint switchable period. For example, it is set as a period from when fluctuation display of symbols is started in the symbol display device 31 to when fluctuation display of symbols is stopped in the first symbol row Z1 or the next symbol row Z2 as a viewpoint switching possible period It may be set as a period during which advance notice display is performed in symbol display device 31, or may be set as a period during which reach display is performed in symbol display device 31, and symbol display device 31. 31 may be set as a period in which a specific reach effect is being performed, or may be set as a period in which a jackpot effect is being performed in the symbol display device 31. Further, information as to whether or not it is a viewpoint switchable period is set in the data table.

  If it is in the viewpoint switchable period, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not it is in the viewpoint switch state. The viewpoint switching state is a state in which the drawing range PL2 for one frame is set at a position different from the initial setting position, and the viewpoint switching flag is set in the work RAM 73 when the viewpoint switching is performed. As a result, the viewpoint switching state is entered, and when the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position, the flag is erased to cancel the viewpoint switching state.

  If it is not in the viewpoint switching state, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not there is a viewpoint switching instruction. The presence or absence of the viewpoint switching instruction is performed by determining whether or not an operation generation command is received from the sound emission control device 60.

  Here, the operation generation command is transmitted based on the operation of the performance operation device 48 as described above, and furthermore, in response to the setting of a plurality of positions at which viewpoint switching is possible, The operation generation command includes information on the position of the switching target. The presence or absence of the reception of the operation generation command is determined in step S402 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 11), and when the operation generation command is received, the fact that the operation generation command has been received is indicated in step S403. The indicated flag is set in the work RAM 73, and information corresponding to the type of the operation generation command is set in the work RAM 73.

  If there is a viewpoint switching instruction, in step S2304, coordinate change processing of the drawing range PL2 is executed. In the coordinate change processing, it is determined to which coordinate the information included in the operation generation command corresponding to the current switching instruction is the instruction to change the coordinate, and the drawing range PL2 is moved to the coordinate corresponding to the instruction The coordinate information of the drawing range PL2 is updated as follows. Also, in the coordinate change processing, the viewpoint switching state is set.

  On the other hand, if the viewpoint switching state is already in progress (step S2302: NO), it is determined in step S2305 whether the release condition is satisfied. The presence or absence of the release condition is determined by determining whether an operation release command has been received from the sound emission control device 60. The specific processing configuration for determining the presence or absence of the reception of the operation cancellation command is the same as that of the operation generation command.

  If the release condition is satisfied, the process of restoring the drawing range is executed in step S2306. In the return processing, the coordinate information of the drawing range PL2 is updated so that the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position. In addition, the viewpoint switching state is canceled in the return processing. Note that the process of step S2306 is executed also when it is determined that the viewpoint switching possible period is not set (step S2301: NO).

  If a negative determination is made in step S 2303, the process of step S 2304 is performed, and if a negative determination is made in step S 2305, or after the process of step S 2306 is performed, the process proceeds to step S 2307. In step S2307, it is determined whether there is an individual image to be controlled. The individual images to be controlled are shown in the currently set data table, and are further set in correspondence with the positions of a plurality of types of drawing ranges PL2 in the viewpoint switching period. Further, the individual images to be controlled start are not all the individual images that can be arranged on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but the drawing range PL2 set at present and the drawing range PL2 respectively An individual image which is an individual image included in the outer range and which has not yet been set as a control target is extracted.

  If there is an individual image to be controlled, it is determined in step S2308 whether there is a plurality of individual images to be controlled. If there is not a plurality of images, the single individual image is grasped as a control start target, and the process advances to step S2312 without executing the processing of steps S2309 to S2311.

  If there are a plurality of images (YES in step S2308), it is determined in step S2309 whether there is an individual image to be controlled that is included in the drawing range PL2 in which at least a portion is currently set. Determine if That is, in the configuration in which the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set in the display CPU 72 as described above, and individual images outside the drawing range PL2 currently set can also be controlled, the individual of the control start target Not only images within the drawing range PL2 but also images outside the drawing range PL2 are included as images, and it is determined in step S2309 which one of the images falls under. Incidentally, the coordinates of the control start position of the individual image included in the control start target are set in the currently set data table, and the coordinates of the control start position and the coordinates currently set in the drawing range PL2 The relative position of the individual image included in the control start target with respect to the drawing range PL2 is grasped by referring to.

  In the case where there is an individual image of the control start target at least a part of which is included in the drawing range PL2, in step S2310, the individual image is grasped as the current control start target. In this case, when a plurality of individual images for control start are included in the drawing range PL2, all of them are grasped as the control start target. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the individual image is out of the drawing range PL2 so that a situation in which a plurality of individual images to be controlled start exist in the drawing range PL2 in one processing cycle of task processing does not occur. It may be set as a control start target in the processing times where the processing load is low.

  On the other hand, when the individual image of the control start target is not included in the drawing range PL2, a plurality of control start targets exist outside the drawing range PL2. In this case, in step S2311, among the individual images outside the drawing range PL2, the individual image close to the currently set drawing range PL2 is grasped as the control start target.

  Incidentally, as a result of the processing in step S 2310 and step S 2311, the individual images for which the control start timing has been postponed are grasped as control start targets in the processing rounds after the next time. In this case, when an individual image displayed as if it moves in a predetermined direction at each image update timing is delayed, the control start time parameter of the individual image including the control start position is one update timing It is updated on the data table to be in the advanced state. Thus, even if the control start timing is delayed, the individual image is displayed at a predetermined position and state at a predetermined timing.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2308, or after the process of step S2310 or step S2311 has been performed, the control start process of step S2312 to step S2314 is performed. In the control start process, first, in step S2312, in work RAM 73, an empty buffer area for performing various calculations is searched in order to control an individual image, and one pair of individual images grasped as a control start target is searched. Allocate a free buffer area to support 1).

  In the following step S2313, initialization processing is executed on all free buffer areas secured in step S2312. In the following step S2314, control start parameters corresponding to the individual image are set in the free buffer area initialized in step S2313. The parameters for starting the control include the position, the rotation angle, and the size of the target individual image on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. When there are a plurality of individual images grasped as a control start target, parameters for control start are individually set for each free buffer area corresponding to each individual image.

  If the determination in step S2307 is negative or after the process of step S2314 has been performed, the control update process of step S2315 to step S2318 is performed. In the control update processing, first, in step S2315, background calculation processing is executed. In the background operation processing, the control update target of this time is grasped among the still image for the backmost to constitute the image of the background and the sprite for background. Further, with regard to the control update target that has been grasped, various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data specification, etc. are calculated and derived. Then, the control parameter is updated by writing the derived various parameters in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to each individual image.

  In the following step S2316, effect calculation processing is executed. In the effect calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the effect sprites constituting the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, advance notice display, and jackpot effect. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameters are derived for the control update target that is grasped. Then, the control parameter is updated by writing the derived various parameters in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to each individual image.

  In the following step S2317, symbol operation processing is executed. In the symbol calculation processing, among the symbols to be subjected to variable display in each game run, the control update target of this time is grasped. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameters are derived for the control update target that is grasped. Then, the control parameter is updated by writing the derived various parameters in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to each individual image.

  Incidentally, in each processing of step S2315 to step S2317, animation data set to change various parameters of the individual image in accordance with a specific pattern each time the image update timing comes is used. The animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 and is transferred to the work RAM 73 in advance before the display CPU 72 needs to read the data.

  Thereafter, processing for grasping the drawing instruction target is executed in step S2318, and then this task processing ends. In the drawing instruction target grasping process, the individual images included in the image for one frame according to the drawing data creation instruction among the individual images that have been subjected to the control update by the respective processes in steps S2315 to S2317 are included. Execute processing to grasp.

  The grasping is performed by executing a predetermined operation with reference to information of the currently set drawing range PL2 and information of coordinates of various individual images, rotation angles, and scales. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. Thus, it is necessary to sort individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76 by setting only individual images to be displayed, instead of using the individual images specified in the drawing list as all individual images for which control has been started. Also, even if it is not sorted, there is no need to perform unnecessary drawing processing on individual images that are not to be displayed. Thereby, the processing load of the VDP 76 can be reduced.

  As described above, for the individual image that became the control start target, “search for free buffer area” in step S2312, “initialization of secured buffer area” in step S2313, and “setting of parameters for control start” in step S2314. And the “procedure for updating various parameters” in any of steps S2315 to S2317 are executed, while “individual parameters for any of steps S2315 to S2317” is executed for the individual image of only the control update target. Only the renewal procedure is performed. Therefore, the processing load of the individual image set as the control start target is larger than that of the individual image set only as the control update target. The process of step S2314 may not be performed, and a process for replacing the individual image that is the control start target may be performed in any of steps S2315 to S2317.

  Here, as described above, it is necessary to update the image in a cycle of 20 msec. This image update is performed by transmitting the drawing list created based on the processing result of the task processing to the VDP 76. Then, in the task processing, for 20 msec, a period required for creating a drawing list and being received by the VDP 76, and a period required for creating drawing data corresponding to an image of one frame based on the drawing list It should be completed in a shorter period than the period minus Under these circumstances, as described above, the processing for control start has a larger processing load than the processing for control update, and thus, if there are many individual images to be controlled for start in one processing cycle, task processing is completed. There is a possibility that processing omission may occur without being in time. On the other hand, since the processing of step S2308 to step S2311 is executed and the control start timing is dispersed so that there are not many individual images to be controlled to start in one processing cycle, the above-described processing omission occurs. It does not occur.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, a situation in which an individual image once controlled is not displayed within the range of a predetermined number of frames, such as being at a position deviated from the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. Is excluded from the control target when When it is necessary to re-control the individual image, the process for starting control is executed again.

  Next, how the individual images are controlled in the task processing will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a) and 47 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how each individual image is to be controlled, and FIG. 47 (a) shows a case where viewpoint switching is not performed, and FIG. Shows the case where viewpoint switching is performed.

  When viewpoint switching is not performed, the drawing range PL2 is fixed as shown in FIG. 47 (a). In this case, for the individual images PC1 to PC3 included in the drawing range PL2, only the control update process is executed because the control start target is set at the timing before the timing shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, the individual image PC4 and the individual image PC5 are included in the control start target because the individual image PC4 and the individual image PC5 which are out of the drawing range PL2 but are included in the control target range PL3 are not yet controlled. Will be However, if the processing load increases when the control start processing is performed on both the individual images PC4 and PC5, the control start processing is preferentially executed on the individual image PC4 close to the drawing range PL2, The control start processing for the image PC 5 is performed in the next task processing. The individual image PC6 and the individual image PC7 outside the control target range PL3 which are included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 are not included in the control start target, and the control start process is not executed.

  When there are a plurality of individual targets outside the drawing range PL2 as control start targets, control start processing is executed with priority given to the side closer to the drawing range PL2. As a result, in the configuration in which the control start timing is dispersed, the frequency at which the control start process is to be executed at the timing when the drawing range PL2 includes at least a part is reduced.

  When viewpoint switching is performed, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), in the previous task processing, the drawing range PL2 is the first position divided by the two-dot chain line, but the current task In the process, the drawing range PL2 is displaced to the second position partitioned by the solid line. In this case, a part of the drawing range PL2 at the second position is included in the drawing range PL2 at the first position, and accordingly, the individual image PC8 is the first at the time of the previous task processing. Since at least a part is included in the drawing range PL2 at the position of, it is already controlled. Therefore, in the present task processing, there is no need to execute control start processing on the individual image PC8.

  On the other hand, since individual image PC9 and individual image PC10 are newly included in drawing range PL2 displaced to the second position, control start processing is given priority over both individual image PC9 and individual image PC10. Is executed and controlled. In this case, although the individual image PC11 is newly included in the control target range for the drawing range PL2 at the second position, the control start processing is executed preferentially to the individual images PC9 and PC10. , This time is excluded from the control start target.

  Even when the control start timing is dispersed, when it is necessary to execute the control start process on the individual image included in the drawing range PL2, that is, included in the image for one frame, the control start process is It is prioritized and never postponed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the individual image which should be originally included in the image for one frame is not included.

  In particular, in a configuration in which a presentation is performed such that the viewpoint is switched when the presentation operation device 48 is operated by the player, the individual image which has not been the control target is suddenly controlled It can happen. On the other hand, since the control start process is preferentially performed on the individual image included in the image for one frame as described above, the effect of viewpoint switching can be provided without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience. It can be performed well.

  Note that the configuration in which the control start timing is dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which all the individual images included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 are to be the control start target in the display CPU 72. In this case, individual images in the entire range may be set as the control start target while the individual images included in the drawing range as the control start target are given the highest priority and the side close to the drawing range is given the second priority. Thus, it is possible to start control in advance for individual images in a wider range than the above configuration while well distributing control start timing.

  However, in the present configuration, the individual image for control update in the display CPU 72 will increase more than the above configuration, so the processing load of the process for control update in each processing cycle will increase. In order to reduce the processing load of the process for the control update, it is preferable that a partial range of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 be set as a control start target as described above.

  Further, the switching destination of the drawing range may be determined in advance. In this configuration, it is preferable that the control start process of the individual image to be included in the drawing range of the switching destination is performed in advance at or before the period when the switching becomes possible. . As a result, even if the drawing range is switched at an arbitrary timing, it can be dealt with.

  Further, the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which the switching of the drawing range is not performed. In this case, since the presence or absence of the control start target may be determined based on the fixed drawing range, the processing configuration for performing the confirmation can be simplified. In this configuration, an individual image displayed so as to move in the depth direction of the display screen G, for example, can be considered as an individual image to be a control start object at the timing when the display screen G is displayed.

  In addition, the configuration in which the control start timing is dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which the display mode such as the background image or the symbol is changed based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect. Even in this case, the control start timing can be well dispersed.

<Configuration for Displaying Scroll Background Image>
Next, a configuration for displaying a scroll background image will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a scroll background image is set as a type of background image. The scroll background image is a background image displayed so as to scroll and change in a predetermined direction, specifically, in the horizontal direction as time passes. The scroll background image is set to have a plurality of frames of background images in the scroll direction. Further, the scroll background image has a start point portion and an end point portion, but the image of the start point portion is set to have continuity with the image of the end point portion. As a result of the scroll display, when the scroll background image reaches the end portion, the start portion is displayed continuously. That is, the scroll background image is repeatedly displayed so as to circulate.

  As image data for displaying a scroll background image, scroll background data PD1 is set. The scroll background data PD1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the background data PD1 for scrolling.

  The scroll background data PD1 is still image data, and as shown in FIG. 48A, the size in the vertical direction is set to one frame or larger, and the size in the horizontal direction which is the scroll direction is , It is set to be a plurality of frames. The scroll background data PD1 is not set as one image data, but is set as a set of a plurality of divided parts data PD2 to PD10. The divided part data PD2 to PD10 are set so as to divide the scroll background data PD1 in the scroll direction, and the scroll background data PD1 is configured by arranging the scroll background data PD1 in the scroll direction.

  The contents of the images set in each of the divided part data PD2 to PD10 are different from each other. However, the divided part data adjacent in the scroll direction is set such that the contents of the image have continuity in the scroll direction.

  The divided part data PD2 to PD10 are set to have the same size in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction. In this case, the size in the horizontal direction is set smaller than one frame, and in order to form a background image for one frame, a plurality of divided parts data which are part of divided parts data PD2 to PD10 are set and arranged There is a need to. Specifically, in the case of setting divided parts data with an initial setting size, it is possible to form a background image for one frame by arranging two or three divided parts data in a horizontal direction. Size is set. It should be noted that a background image of one frame may be formed by always arranging three divided parts data or arranging four or more divided parts data, and the background by one divided parts data The configuration may be such that an image can be formed.

  Also, the divided part data adjacent in the scroll direction are set to overlap each other at the boundary portion. The divided parts data PD5 and PD6 adjacent in the scroll direction will be described as an example.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (b) and 48 (c), each pixel constituting one line in the direction (longitudinal direction) orthogonal to the scroll direction at the end point portion of divided part data PD5 on the scroll destination side and the scroll rear side The coordinates in the scroll direction are set to the same coordinates when drawing on the frame areas 82a and 82b with each pixel forming one line in the direction (longitudinal direction) orthogonal to the scroll direction at the start portion of the divided part data PD6. Also, the same data is set to each line. When both divided part data PD5 and PD6 are drawn, the lines will overlap. That is, in the divided part data PD5 and PD6 adjacent in the scroll direction, the overlapping area PA1 is set at the boundary portion.

  The operation of setting the overlapping area PA1 will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (a-1) and (a-2) show the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set, and FIGS. 49 (b-1) and (b-2) set the overlapping area PA1. The divided part data PD5 and PD6 which are not shown are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (b-1), in the case of divided parts data in which the overlapping area PA1 is not set, both divided parts data are enlarged from the size of the initial setting and drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b. As shown in b-2), a gap may be generated at the boundary of both divided parts data. For example, in the case of expanding the divided part data, the above-described event occurs due to the contents of linear interpolation performed when making each pixel of the divided part data after enlargement correspond to each dot of the frame areas 82a and 82b. And since drawing data is not set to the dot of the above-mentioned gap part, in display screen G, ground color is displayed on the dot. If so, it is not preferable in appearance.

  On the other hand, in the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set as shown in FIG. 49 (a-1), both divided part data PD5 and PD6 are enlarged from the size of the initial setting and frame area Even in the case of drawing in 82a and 82b, as shown in FIG. 49 (a-2), no gap is generated because the overlapping area PA1 exists at the boundary between both divided part data PD5 and PD6. Thus, it is possible to display an image using the divided part data PD5 and PD6 without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  Further, a portion constituting one overlapping area PA1 is a pixel for one line in each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6. As a result, it is possible to minimize the data capacity allocated for providing the overlapping area PA1.

  Further, the same data is set in the parts constituting one overlapping area PA1 in each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6. Thereby, when the divided part data PD5 and PD6 are individually enlarged and set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, even if the overlapping portions of the both are slightly deviated, the deviated portions are in the same data range Deviation will occur, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain a good display mode.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the scroll background image will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for scroll background executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the scroll background is executed in the calculation processing for background of step S2315 in the task processing (FIG. 46). Further, the calculation process for the scroll background is started when information about the scroll background is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S2401, the scroll position information is updated. The scroll position information is information for specifying which area is displayed on the display screen G in the scroll background image. The scroll position information is determined by the numerical information of the scroll counter provided in the work RAM 73. A large number of frame parts included in the scroll background image correspond one-to-one to each numerical value of the scroll position information. In step S2401, the numerical value information of the scroll counter is updated so as to be incremented by one.

  In the following step S2402, the scale of the background image of this time is grasped. In the following step S2403, the divided part data included in the display range is grasped by referring to the scroll position information updated in step S2401 and the scale grasped in step S2402. In this case, at least two divided parts data are grasped. Incidentally, the process for starting control on these divided part data has already been completed.

  In the following step S2404, among the divided parts data grasped in step S2403, the coordinates of the divided parts data on the scroll destination side are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived coordinates is supported in the work RAM 73 for the divided parts data The control information is updated by writing in the reserved area.

  In the subsequent step S2405, as coordinates of the next divided part data, coordinates for generating an overlapping area with respect to adjacent divided parts data on the scroll destination side are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived coordinates is obtained by the work RAM 73. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the divided part data in.

  In the following step S2406, it is determined whether or not coordinates have been grasped for all of the divided part data grasped in step S2403. If divided part data that has not been grasped exists, the process of step S2405 is executed for the divided part data. If divided part data that has not been grasped does not exist, the process advances to step S2407.

  In step S2407, information on parameters other than the size and the coordinates is updated for the divided part data grasped in step S2403. Thereafter, in step S2408, scroll background designation information is stored, and then the arithmetic processing ends.

  When the above process is executed, the divided parts data grasped in step S 2403 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S 408). Further, scroll background designation information is set in this drawing list.

  Next, the process of setting divided part data executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process of the divided part data is executed in the content grasping process of step S2204 in the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, the setting process of divided parts data is started when the scroll background designation is set in the drawing list.

  First, in step S2501, the type of divided part data to be drawn and the addresses to which the divided parts data are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Thereafter, the scale of each divided part data is grasped in step S2502, the coordinates of each divided part data are grasped in step S2503, and the other parameters are grasped in step S2504, and this setting process is ended.

  By executing the setting process of divided parts data, in the subsequent writing process (step S2205), each divided parts data is in a state where the above parameters are applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. It is drawn. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, whereby a background image using the respective divided part data is displayed on the display screen G.

  Here, the divided part data to be drawn partially protrudes from the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. For example, as shown in FIG. 48A, in the case where three divided parts data PD2 to PD4 are drawn in an area PL4 of one frame divided by a two-dot chain line, each divided parts data PD2 to PD4 is There is a portion that protrudes from the area PL4 for one frame. In the VDP 76, when drawing image data in the frame areas 82a and 82b, it is not possible to extract and draw only a part of pixels. Therefore, although the above-mentioned protruding part is not written in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the same processing as the processing executed in the case of drawing the non-projecting part on the frame areas 82a and 82b is executed for the pixels of the protruding part. Ru.

  As described above, by pre-storing scroll background data including data for a plurality of frames as a plurality of divided parts data, the size that can be stored as single image data in the NAND flash memory 102 is set too large. There is no need to In addition, when it is attempted to transfer the background data for scrolling as a single image data, the transfer time will be extended, but since it can be transferred in divided parts data units, the timing adjustment of data transfer is It will be easy.

  Further, the VDP 76 executes the drawing processing also for the parts extending from the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in the same manner as the non-outgoing parts, but when the scroll background data is used as a single image data There will be many places, and the processing load will be large. On the other hand, by using only the divided part data in which at least a part is included in the frame areas 82a and 82b, it is possible to suppress the protruding part and to reduce the processing load. The display CPU 72 does not derive parameter information for divided part data that is not to be displayed. Thus, the processing load of the display CPU 72 can be reduced.

  Further, by setting the divided part data small and increasing the divided part data used in each frame, it is possible to suppress the part protruding from the frame areas 82a and 82b, but as the divided part data increases, the display CPU 72 As a result, the amount of image data to be calculated for parameters increases, and the processing load on the display CPU 72 increases. On the other hand, since the size of each divided part data is set so that there are two or three divided parts data used in each frame, the processing load on the display CPU 72 can be suppressed.

  The scroll direction is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction.

  In addition, when focusing on the effect that the data volume of a single image data can be reduced, a configuration in which a plurality of divided part data are set as image data for displaying a series of images may be essential. The divided part data may not have the overlapping area PA1. In this case, if the individual size adjustment of each divided part data is not performed, the possibility of the occurrence of a gap is reduced.

  In addition, the overlapping area PA1 may not be configured by each row of pixels but may be configured by a plurality of rows of pixels. In this case, although the data capacity allocated to the overlapping area PA1 increases, the generation of the gap can be more reliably prevented. In addition, the same data may not be set in a portion constituting one overlapping area PA1.

<Configuration for displaying displacement background image of small unit group>
Next, the configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a displacement background image of a small unit group is set as a type of background image. The displacement background image of the small unit group is a background image displayed so that a large number of small unit images are displaced in a predetermined direction with the lapse of time before the image of the backmost surface. Although the image of a flower villa is set as this small unit image, it is not limited to this, and an image of rain or an image of snow may be set.

  Background data PD11 for the small unit group is set as image data for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group. The small unit group background data PD11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the background data PD11 for small unit groups.

  The small unit group background data PD11 is not set as one image data, but as a set of a plurality of divided data groups PD12 to PD15 as shown in FIG. 52 (a). Each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 has a plurality of (for example, four) divided parts data.

  The number of divided part data possessed by each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 is the same, and the order of reading the images for one frame in each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 is predetermined. That is, each divided part data set as the first order in each divided data group PD12 to PD15 is arranged at the corresponding position, so that a displacement background image for one frame is displayed, and the next order By arranging the divided parts data set as each in the corresponding positions, the displacement background image for the next frame is displayed. And this is sequentially performed with respect to the combination of each order.

  In each divided part data, data for a plurality of small unit images are set. The data set for the small unit image is different in each set of divided parts data, and a combination of each divided parts data is sequentially selected in the above-mentioned predetermined order, as shown in FIG. 52 (b). As shown, each of a large number of small unit images is displayed so as to be displaced in a predetermined direction as time passes.

  The specific processing configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described below. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for displacement background performed by the display CPU 72. The computation process for the displacement background is executed in the computation process for background in step S2315 in the task process (FIG. 46).

  First, in step S2601, the value of the parts counter for specifying the order of the divided parts data corresponding to the current frame is updated. The parts counter is provided in the work RAM 73. In the following step S2602, the divided data group to be set is grasped. At the time of this grasping, the object counter provided in the work RAM 73 is referred to.

  In the following step S2603, the divided part data to be controlled is grasped from the information of the order indicated by the part counter and the information of the target divided data group indicated by the target counter. In the subsequent step S2604, control is performed by calculating and deriving the parameters of the divided part data grasped in step S2603, and writing the information of the derived parameters in the area secured corresponding to the divided parts data in the work RAM 73. Update information for

  In the following step S2605, it is determined whether the setting of all the divided parts data corresponding to the current order is completed. If the setting has not been completed, the target counter is updated in step S2606 to update the setting target to the next divided data group, and the processing in step S2602 and subsequent steps is executed. On the other hand, if the setting is completed, the displacement background designation information is stored in step S2607, and the computation processing for the main displacement background is ended.

  When the above process is executed, each divided part data corresponding to the current order is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). Further, displacement background designation information is set in the drawing list. The VDP 76 that has received the drawing list draws the divided part data in the frame areas 82a and 82b according to the drawing list. Then, the output of the drawing list and the drawing corresponding thereto are repeatedly performed for each frame, whereby an animation as shown in FIG. 52B is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, when displaying an animation for displacing the small unit group, instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite, it is possible to sequentially switch still images in which a plurality of small unit images are collectively set. Since the configuration is to control, the processing load of arithmetic processing of parameters in the display CPU 72 is reduced. Therefore, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while suppressing the processing load in the display CPU 72.

  The number of divided data groups PD12 to PD15 and the number of divided parts data allocated to each divided data group PD12 to PD15 are arbitrary as long as they are plural.

  In addition, divided parts data groups may not be allocated to each of divided data groups PD12 to PD15, and a common divided data group in which a large number of divided parts data are set may be provided. In this case, divided parts data may be distributed to each divided position from the common divided data group.

<Addition processing of effect image>
Next, addition processing of the effect image will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the addition processing of the effect image.

  The effect image includes an image representing blast, an image representing water droplets, a light emission image representing a state in which light is emitted from the light source to the surroundings, and an aura image representing that the circumference of the character is emitting light. Is an image for enhancing visual effects. Among these effect images, an image representing blast and an image representing water droplets are not limited to be applied, but an aura image is applied to a predetermined sprite.

  In detail, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the effect data PD17 is set corresponding to the sprite data PD16 as shown in FIG. 54 (a). The sprite data PD16 includes an image area PA2 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image and a frame area PA3 surrounding the periphery of the image area PA2, and is defined to be rectangular as a whole. There is. On the other hand, the effect data PD17 is defined along the outer edge of the image area PA2, and an effect area PA4 to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image and the effect area PA4 so as to be rectangular as a whole. And a frame area PA5 defining an inner side and an outer side.

  Incidentally, the sprite data PD16 and the corresponding effect data PD17 are defined to have the same size and the same shape at the time of initial setting. In addition, since information of “0” which is complete transmission information is set as the α value to the pixels constituting each frame area PA3 and PA5, it is not a display target on the display screen G, and the image area PA2 and The effect area PA4 is to be displayed on the display screen G. However, the non-display of the frame areas PA3 and PA5 may be configured to be performed using dedicated α data. Details of the α data will be described later.

  By applying the effect data PD17 to the sprite data PD16, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), an effect image CH2 appears as to the character CH1 as if the surroundings were emitting light. . In this case, the effect image CH2 overlaps a part of the background image in front of it. On the other hand, since the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are set individually, it is possible to display the character CH1 alone.

  As described above, the frame areas 82a and 82b in which the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are drawn include many unit areas, and areas for storing color information are set in each unit area. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), color information storage areas 121a to 121c each consisting of one byte are set in each unit area 121 in one-to-one correspondence with each color of RGB. The setting of 256 colors is possible for each of RGB.

  As the value of the numerical information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c is smaller, a darker color is finally displayed in RGB, and in the case of the minimum value, black is displayed. In addition, as the value of the numerical information is larger, the color of the brighter in RGB is finally displayed, and in the case of the maximum value, white is displayed. In the configuration that can display only 256 colors instead of the full color method, the color information storage areas 121a to 121c may be only 1 byte.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), color information composed of numerical information is set to each pixel 122 of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 using a pallet table or the like. In this case, the color information set in each of the pixels 122 is not full color but data capable of displaying only 256 colors, but in order to be able to perform drawing on the frame areas 82a and 82b favorably, each color of RGB Are set as information within the range of 1 byte.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set not to 3 bytes but to 1 byte, and in a configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors, The color information may also be set by one byte.

  In addition to the color information, information of α value is set in each pixel 122. Although a storage capacity of 1 byte is secured as the information of the α value, actually, any decimal value “0 to 100” numerical information is set. Further, the information of the α value is numerical information of “0 to 100”, which corresponds to the α value of “0 to 1”, and is treated as a value less than 1 in the calculation using the α value.

  When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 to be drawn, each numerical information obtained by integrating the alpha value to each numerical information of RGB in each pixel 122 is for storing color information in the unit area 121 It is stored with respect to each area of RGB of areas 121a-121c. In this case, when the α value is set as the non-transparent information of “1”, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten on the corresponding unit area 121 as it is. On the other hand, when the α value is less than 1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is executed between the image to be superimposed on the back side of the display screen G, and the calculation result for the unit area 121 Is written.

  In the case of the effect data PD17, an α value less than 1 is set for all pixels. Specifically, complete transmission information with an α value of “0” is set to all pixels included in the frame area PA5, and each pixel included in the effect area PA4 is semi-transmissive with 0 <α value <1. Information is set. Then, in the case of drawing the effect data PD17 in the frame areas 82a and 82b, for each unit area 121 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the alpha value is selected for the numerical information of each pixel of the effect data PD17. The accumulated result is added.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying an image using the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the calculation processing for the first effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the first effect effect is executed in the effect calculation process of step S2316 in the task process (FIG. 46). Further, the calculation processing for the first effect presentation is started when the information about the first effect presentation is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S2701, the sprite data PD16 included in the display area is grasped based on the currently set data table. In step S 2702, control is performed by calculating and deriving parameters of sprite data PD 16 grasped in step S 2701, and writing information of the derived parameters in an area secured corresponding to the sprite data PD 16 in work RAM 73. Update information for

  In the following step S2703, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the effect data should be applied. If it is not necessary to apply the effect data, this arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for producing the first effect is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the sprite data PD16 is a drawing object, and further drawing including parameter information of the sprite data PD16. A list is created and sent to VDP 76.

  On the other hand, when it is necessary to apply the effect data PD17, in step S2704, the effect data PD17 to be applied this time is grasped. In the following step S2705, in step S2702, the same coordinates as the coordinates grasped about sprite data PD16 to be applied are grasped as the coordinates of effect data PD17, and in the work RAM 73 an area secured corresponding to the effect data PD17. Update the control information by writing.

  In the subsequent step S2706, information on parameters other than the coordinates is calculated and derived for the effect data PD17, and information on the derived parameters is written in the secured area, thereby updating control information. In this case, when the size and rotation angle of the sprite data PD 16 to be applied are changed from those at the time of initial setting, the size and rotation angle of the effect data PD 17 are adjusted to be the same. Thereafter, after storing the effect designation information in step S2707, the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for producing the first effect is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), a drawing list in which both sprite data PD16 and effect data PD17 are set as drawing objects is created Be done. Further, the drawing list includes parameter information of each of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17, and effect designation information indicating that the effect data PD17 is to be applied. Then, the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the setting process for the first effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the first effect presentation is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, the setting process for the first effect effect is activated when the specification relating to the first effect effect is set in the drawing list.

  In step S 2801, the current sprite data PD 16 to be drawn shown in the drawing list and the address to which the sprite data PD 16 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In the following step S2802, the parameters of the sprite data PD16 are grasped.

  In the following step S2803, it is determined whether or not the effect designation information is set in association with the sprite data PD16 in the drawing list. If the effect designation information is not set, this setting processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the effect designation information is set, in step S 2804, while grasping the effect data PD 17 to be drawn together with the sprite data PD 16, the effect data PD 17 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know which address Thereafter, in step S2805, after the parameter of the effect data PD17 is grasped, the present setting process is ended.

  That is, the effect data PD17 is set in association with the sprite data PD16 to be applied in the drawing list, and is processed simultaneously in the processing of processing the sprite data PD16 to be applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect data PD 17 may be set independently for the sprite data PD 16 to be applied in the drawing list. Even in this case, as described above, since the parameter is set by the effect data PD 17 alone, it is possible to draw the effect data PD 17 in the frame areas 82 a and 82 b to be drawn.

  Incidentally, as described above, the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are individually handled, and as described above, it is possible to display the character CH1 alone corresponding to the sprite data PD16 using the same sprite data PD16. While being able to do, it is also possible to display the character CH1 in a state in which the effect image CH2 is applied.

  By executing the setting process for the first effect, the sprite data PD16 is applied with the above parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the subsequent writing process (step S2205). And the above effect data PD17 are drawn.

  Next, a first effect addition process performed by the VDP 76 when the effect data PD 17 is drawn will be described. FIG. 57 (a) is a flowchart showing the first effect addition process, and FIG. 57 (b) is an explanatory diagram for describing the state of the first effect addition process. The first effect addition process is performed as a part of the writing process performed in step S2205 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). The first effect addition process is activated when the effect data PD 17 is set.

  First, in step S2901, the target pixel is updated. In the process of updating the target pixel, a process for updating the pixel to be drawn at this time in the effect data PD 17 is executed. Specifically, the pixel update counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

  In the subsequent step S2902, numerical value information stored in a dot (that is, a unit area) in which the current target pixel is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b is read out and grasped. In this case, as indicated by “r1”, “g1”, and “b1” in FIG. 57 (b-1), each numerical value information of RGB is grasped.

  In the following step S2903, numerical value information set to the current target pixel in the effect data PD17 is grasped. This numerical value information is each numerical value information as a result of integrating the numerical value information of alpha value to each numerical value information of RGB. That is, as shown by “α × r2”, “α × g2”, and “α × b2” in FIG. 57 (b-2), each numerical value information of RGB is grasped.

  In addition, in the case of the said integration, calculation is performed so that the alpha value defined as a value of "0-100" by a decimal number functions as "0.00-1.00" which is a value of 1 or less, Furthermore, the value is rounded down or rounded off so that the value of the decimal point is not included in the integration result. The handling of the α value and the handling of numerical values after the decimal point are the same in the following description. Also, the α value is determined as a decimal number of “0 to 10”, and the calculation is performed so that it functions as “0.0 to 1.0” which is a value of 1 or less. Good.

  In the following step S2904, the RGB numerical value information grasped in step S2902 and the RGB numerical value information grasped in step S2903 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (b-3), each numerical value information of RGB becomes “r1 + α × r2”, “g1 + α × g2”, and “b1 + α × b2”. In the following step S2905, each numerical value information of RGB calculated in step S2904 is written in the current target dot.

  Thereafter, in step S2906, it is determined whether drawing has been completed for all the pixels of the effect data PD17. When the processing is not completed, the processing of steps S2901 to S2905 is repeated. If it has been completed, this addition processing is ended.

  By performing the addition processing, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is in a state in which the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, background image) on which the effect image CH2 is to be superimposed are reflected. Is displayed. As already described, the effect image CH2 is an image that transmits light and water droplets on the back side, so that it causes discomfort when it is displayed regardless of the background image. On the other hand, by performing the addition process as described above, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state in which the background image is reflected, and it is preferable that the effect image CH2 be displayed without causing the above-mentioned sense of incongruity. Become.

  Note that the specific process of reflecting the individual image on the back side when displaying the individual image on the front side is not limited to the addition process, and other arithmetic processes as long as the reflection can be satisfactorily performed. May be executed.

  Further, after the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side is set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, addition processing to the frame areas 82a and 82b of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side is performed. Instead, the image data resulting from the addition process may be set in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

<Partial addition processing of effect image>
Next, partial addition processing of an effect image will be described.

  When the effect image is applied as described above, the addition processing is executed, but when the same bright effect image is superimposed on the bright image, each numerical value of RGB in the unit area of the frame area 82a, 82b Information is at a maximum value, and it may be displayed in white outside the intention of the designer (so-called occurrence of whiteout). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, partial addition is performed when a predetermined effect image is to be displayed in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-described whitening.

  Regarding the data configuration for performing the partial addition, referring to FIG. 58A as an example, an effect treated independently of the sprite data of the character, such as an image representing blast or an image representing water droplets, is taken as an example. While explaining. FIG. 58 (a) is an explanatory diagram for describing a data configuration for performing partial addition.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a-1), the effect data PD 18 to which partial addition is applied includes a plurality of pixels and an effect area PA 6 to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image. And a frame area PA7 that defines the periphery of the effect area PA6 so as to have a shape. In each of the pixels constituting the effect area PA6, as described above, color information having numerical information corresponding to each of RGB and information of α value to be integrated with each numerical information of the color information are included. It is set. Note that “0”, which is complete transmission information, is set as an α value for each pixel constituting the frame area PA7.

  Partial addition data PD19 defined so that the size and the outer shape at the time of initial setting are made equal to those of the effect data PD18, as shown in FIG. 58 (a-2), in one-to-one correspondence with the effect data PD18. Is set. The partial addition data PD19 has an effect corresponding area PA8 defined to have the same shape and the same number of pixels as the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18 and the periphery of the effect corresponding area PA8 so as to have a rectangular shape as a whole. And a frame corresponding area PA9 defining

  Unlike the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, color information is not set in each pixel constituting the effect corresponding area PA8, and only information of the α value is set. By the way, the information of the α value set in each pixel is set individually according to the execution target of the partial addition, and if there is a pixel in which the information of the same α value is set mutually, mutual information There are also pixels in which different α value information is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the α value set to each pixel may be identical.

  When partial addition is performed, partial addition data PD19 is first applied to each dot (that is, each unit area) in which effect data PD 18 is drawn in frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Thereafter, effect data PD18 is drawn for each dot. The specific processing configuration in which the drawing is performed will be described below.

  FIG. 58 (b) is a flowchart showing the calculation process for the second effect effect performed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the second effect effect is executed in the effect calculation process of step S2316 in the task process (FIG. 46). Further, the calculation processing for the second effect presentation is started when the information about the second effect presentation is set in the data table currently set.

  First, in step S3001, based on the currently set data table, the effect data PD 18 to be designated for drawing this time is grasped. In the subsequent step S3002, control is performed by calculating and deriving the parameters of the effect data PD18 grasped in step S3001 and writing the information of the derived parameters in the area secured corresponding to the effect data PD18 in the work RAM 73. Update information for

  In the subsequent step S3003, based on the currently set data table, the partial addition data PD19 to be designated for application this time is grasped. In the subsequent step S3004, in step S3002, the same coordinates as the coordinates grasped for the effect data PD 18 to be applied are grasped as the coordinates of the partial addition data PD19, and the information of the grasped coordinates is selected in the work RAM 73 The control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the data PD19.

  In the subsequent step S3005, information on parameters other than the coordinates is calculated and derived for the partial addition data PD19, and information on the derived parameters is written in the secured area, thereby updating the control information. In this case, when the size and the rotation angle of the effect data PD 18 to be applied are changed from those at the time of initial setting, the size and the rotation angle of the partial addition data PD 19 are adjusted to be the same. . Thereafter, after partial addition designation information is stored in step S3006, the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for producing the second effect is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the drawing list in which both the effect data PD18 and the partial addition data PD19 are set as the drawing target Is created. Further, the drawing list includes parameter information of each of the effect data PD 18 and the partial addition data PD 19 and partial addition designation information indicating that the partial addition data PD 19 is to be applied. The created drawing list is sent to the VDP 76.

  Next, the setting process for the second effect effect performed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for the second effect presentation is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). The setting process for the second effect presentation is activated when the partial addition designation is set in the drawing list.

  In step S3101, the partial addition data PD19 to be applied currently indicated in the drawing list and the address to which the partial addition data PD19 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In the following step S3102, the parameters of the partial addition data PD19 are grasped.

  In the following step S3103, the effect data PD 18 of the current drawing object shown in the drawing list and the address to which the effect data PD 18 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Thereafter, after the parameters of the effect data PD 18 are grasped in step S3104, the present setting process is ended.

  That is, the partial addition data PD19 is set to be attached to the effect data PD18 to be applied in the drawing list, and is processed simultaneously in the processing of processing the effect data PD18 to be applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the partial addition data PD19 may be set independently in the drawing list with respect to the effect data PD18 to be applied. In this case, since the parameter is set by the partial addition data PD19 alone, if the drawing order is set such that the partial addition data PD19 is processed before the effect data PD18, the partial addition is performed. It is possible to appropriately draw the data PD 19 in the frame areas 82 a and 82 b to be drawn.

  By performing the setting process for the second effect, the partial addition is performed with the above parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the subsequent writing process (step S2205). The data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn.

  Next, a second effect addition process performed by the VDP 76 when the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn will be described. FIG. 60 (a) is a flowchart showing the second effect addition process, and FIG. 60 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the second effect addition process. The second effect addition process is performed as a part of the writing process performed in step S2205 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). The second effect addition process is activated when the partial addition data PD 19 is set.

  First, in step S3201, the target pixel is updated. In the process of updating the target pixel, a process for updating a pixel to be drawn at this time in the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 is executed. Specifically, the pixel update counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

  In the subsequent step S3202, numerical value information stored in a dot (that is, a unit area) in which the current target pixel is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b is read out and grasped. In this case, as indicated by “r3”, “g3”, and “b3” in FIG. 60 (b-1), each numerical value information of RGB is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S3203, the α value set to the current target pixel in the partial addition data PD19 is grasped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60 (b-2), “α1” is set as the α value.

  In the following step S3204, the alpha value grasped in step S3203 is integrated with respect to each of the RGB numerical information grasped in step S3202. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 60 (b-3), each numerical value information of RGB corresponding to the integration result becomes “α1 × r3”, “α1 × g3”, and “α1 × b3”.

  In the following step S3205, numerical value information set to the current target pixel in the effect data PD18 is grasped. This numerical value information is each numerical value information as a result of integrating the numerical value information of the α value predetermined for the pixel with respect to each of the RGB numerical value information. That is, as shown in FIG. 60 (b-4), each numerical value information of RGB is “α2 × r4”, “α2 × g4”, and “α2 × b4”.

  In the following step S3206, the RGB numerical value information grasped in step S3205 and the information of each RGB integration result grasped in step S3204 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 60 (b-6), each numerical value information of RGB becomes “α1 × r3 + α2 × r4”, “α1 × g3 + α2 × g4”, and “α1 × b3 + α2 × b4”. In the following step S3207, each numerical value information of RGB calculated in step S3206 is written in the current target dot.

  Thereafter, in step S3208, it is determined whether drawing has been completed for all the pixels of partial addition data PD19 and effect data PD18. If not completed, the processing of step S3201 to step S3207 is repeated. If it has been completed, this addition processing is ended.

  After the above addition processing is performed, numerical information already stored in the unit area in which the effect data PD 18 is drawn is reduced in numerical value at a rate of the α value of the partial addition data PD 19 The numerical value information of the result obtained by adding the numerical value information of the effect data PD 18 to the numerical value information of is set. As a result, after the effect data PD 18 is drawn, it is possible to suppress that each numerical value information of RGB in the unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b becomes the maximum value, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of whiteout.

  Further, for example, when the numerical value information and the α value of the effect data PD 18 are suppressed, the effect image becomes familiar with the image to be superimposed, and the visual effect can not be enhanced by the effect image. On the other hand, since it is the structure which suppresses the numerical information of the image by the side which is piled up by data PD19 for partial addition, generation | occurrence | production of white jump can be suppressed, emphasizing an effect image.

  In addition, although it is conceivable to set the numerical information of the images to be superimposed in a state in which the numerical information is originally suppressed, in this case, when the image is used without applying the effect image, It is limited to color information. On the other hand, by setting the partial addition data PD 19 separately as described above, it becomes difficult to create restrictions on the images to be superimposed.

  Since partial addition data PD19 has a configuration in which numerical information corresponding to color information is not set but numerical information corresponding to the α value is set, the data capacity of partial addition data PD19 is an effect. It is smaller than the data PD18. Therefore, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the storage capacity required for the NAND flash memory 102.

  A method other than the method of applying the partial addition data PD 19 may be adopted as a method for reducing the ratio of reflecting the individual image on the back side. For example, in the configuration in which the α value of the image data can be manipulated in pixel units in the processing of VDP 76, the numerical information in the corresponding part of the individual image on the back side is reduced at a predetermined ratio in the processing of VDP 76 It is also good.

  Further, in the individual image on the back side, the influence is exerted even to the place other than the overlapping part with the individual image on the front side, but also the configuration for setting the uniform α value for partial addition to the individual image on the back side Conceivable.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the limit numerical values of the frame areas 82a and 82b are the darkest and the minimum numerical value is the brightest, instead of the above addition processing, the individual image on the back side is reflected in the individual image on the front side. , Subtraction processing needs to be performed. Further, in order to suppress overexposure, it is necessary to apply partial subtraction data instead of partial addition data PD19.

Further, instead of the above configuration, not only the α value but also numerical information corresponding to color information may be set in the partial addition data PD19. In this case, in step S3203 in the second effect addition process, the alpha value and numerical information of the target pixel in the partial addition data are grasped, and in step S3204, instead of the integration process, the processing for fusion is executed. . Specifically, when the α value of partial addition data PD19 is α1 and the color information of partial addition data PD19 is “r5, g5, b5”, in step S3204
R: r3 x (1-α1) + r5 x α1
G: g3 × (1−α1) + g5 × α1
B: b3 × (1−α1) + b5 × α1
An operation for fusion is performed.

Then, the processing of step S3205 to step S3207 is performed on the calculation result.
R: r3 × (1−α1) + r5 × α1 + α2 × r4
G: g3 × (1−α1) + g5 × α1 + α2 × g4
B: b3 × (1−α1) + b5 × α1 + α2 × b4
It becomes.

  Even when the partial addition data PD 19 in which the numerical information corresponding to the color information is set as described above, the timing before drawing the effect data is performed by executing the processing for the fusion operation. Because the numerical information that has already been stored is lowered, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

<Compounded data combining multiple effect images>
Next, a configuration for creating composite data in which a plurality of effect images are combined will be described.

  As described above, a plurality of effect images may be displayed in an image of one frame to enhance visual effects. For example, an image representing a blast and a luminescent image may be displayed simultaneously. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of separately storing the effect data, which are originally set individually, in a combined and synthesized state. Specific processes for creating the composite data and specific processes for using the composite data will be described below.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for a plurality of effect effects performed by the display CPU 72. Arithmetic processing for a plurality of effect effects is executed in the effect calculation processing of step S2316 in the task processing (FIG. 46). Further, the calculation processing for the plurality of effect effects is started when information on the plurality of effect effects is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not composite data has been created in the VDP 76. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the work determination determination flag is set in the work RAM 73. However, the determination is not limited to this, and composite data is created in the currently set data table. It may be configured that information on whether or not it has been set is set.

  If the composite data has not been created yet, in step S3302, a plurality of effect data to be applied this time are grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S3303, the parameters of each effect data grasped in step S3302 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to each of the effect data in the work RAM 73 and controlled. Update information for In the following step S3304, multiple effect presentation specification information is stored.

  In the following step S3305, it is determined whether it is time to create composite data. Specifically, a plurality of types of timings at which a plurality of effect effects are performed are set, and at each timing, the number of individual images other than the effect image is relatively large and the processing load in VDP 76 is large, and the effects There is a timing at which the number of individual images other than images is relatively small and the processing load on the VDP 76 is small. The creation timing of the combined data is the timing at which the processing load is small.

  If it is determined that it is not the creation timing of the combined data (step S3305: NO), the present arithmetic processing is ended as it is. If it is determined that it is time to create composite data (step S3305: YES), the present calculation processing ends after storing composite data creation designation information in step S3306.

  As described above, in the case where arithmetic processing for a plurality of effect effects is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), a plurality of sprite data are drawing targets, and a drawing list further including parameter information of these sprite data Is created. Further, the drawing list includes multiple effect presentation designation information which is information indicating that a plurality of effect presentation should be performed. Further, when the composite data creation designation information is stored, the drawing list includes the composite data creation designation information which is information indicating that the composite data should be created.

  On the other hand, if composite data has been created (step S3301: YES), composite data to be applied this time is grasped in step S3307. In the following step S3308, the parameters of the composite data grasped in step S3307 are calculated and grasped.

  In the subsequent step S3309, the additional effect data is grasped based on the information set as the case where the synthetic data has been created in the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S3310, the parameter of the additional effect data grasped in step S3309 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the area secured corresponding to the additional effect data in the work RAM 73 for control. Update the information of. That is, when the composite data is applied, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 have an allowance in the processing time for drawing, so the setting of the additional effect data is performed using the processing time.

  Thereafter, the plural effects presentation designation information is stored in step S3311, and the combined data use designation information is stored in step S3312, after which the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for a plurality of effects is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the synthetic data and the additional effect data are to be drawn, and the synthetic data and the additional effect data are further processed. A drawing list including parameter information is created. Further, the drawing list includes multiple effect presentation specification information, and also includes composite data use specification information which is information indicating that composite data should be used.

  Next, setting processing for a plurality of effect effects performed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for a plurality of effect effects is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, in the case where the multiple effect presentation specification is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the multiple effect presentation is activated.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether the combined data use designation is set in the drawing list. If the synthetic data use designation is not set, in step S3402, a plurality of effect data designated as the current drawing target and the addresses to which these effect data are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are selected. To grasp. That is, when a plurality of effect data are drawn at the same time, these effect data are not set individually in the drawing list, but are set to be processed simultaneously in one processing cycle.

  In the following step S3403, the parameters of each effect data are grasped. Thereafter, in step S3404, it is determined whether synthetic data generation designation is set. If the synthetic data creation designation is not set, this setting process is ended as it is. If the synthetic data generation designation is set, the process proceeds to step S3405.

  In step S3405, composite data is created in a state where the parameters grasped in step S3404 are applied to the plurality of effect data grasped in step S3402. Thereafter, this setting process is ended.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), a synthetic data area 81c is set in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The combined data created in step S3405 is written to the combined data area 81c. The synthetic data area 81 c stores and holds the written synthetic data while the power supply to the VRAM 75 is continued, and further image data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the VRAM 75. It is an area not to be overwritten. Therefore, the composite data once created is stored and held until the power supply to the VRAM 75 is cut off.

  By executing the setting process for a plurality of effect effects as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S2205), the above parameters are applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The above effect data is drawn. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, whereby the effect image using the above respective effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

  On the other hand, if the combined data use designation is set in the drawing list (step S3401: YES), in step S3406, the combined data specified as the current drawing target and the combined data in the combined data area 81c Figure out what address is stored. In the following step S3407, the parameters of the composite data are grasped.

  In the subsequent step S3408, the additional effect data specified as the current drawing object and the address to which the additional effect data is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. That is, when the composite data and the additional effect data are drawn simultaneously, the composite data and the additional effect data are not individually set in the drawing list, but are set to be simultaneously processed in one processing cycle. It is done. Thereafter, in step S3409, after the parameter of the additional effect data is grasped, the setting process ends.

  As described above, by executing the setting process for a plurality of effect effects, in the subsequent writing process (step S2205), the composite data in a state where the parameter is applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Is drawn, and additional effect data is drawn with parameters applied. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, whereby a rendering image using composite data and additional effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, composite data for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effect images is created, and the composite data is used for subsequent use, so that the plurality of effect data are generated each time when multiple effects are to be performed. The processing load of the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced compared to the configuration for drawing.

  In particular, since the display CPU 72 instructs the creation of composite data at a timing when the processing load on the VDP 76 is small, the composite data can be created while preventing a processing drop in the VDP 76.

  When a plurality of effect effects are executed using the composite data, an additional effect image using the additional effect data is displayed by utilizing the fact that the processing time has a margin. This makes it possible to apply more effect images, and can enhance visual effects by the effect images.

  Further, as compared with a configuration in which composite data is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102, the storage capacity required for effect data in the NAND flash memory 102 can be suppressed. In addition, since effect data set individually is used to create composite data, it is also possible to use the effect data individually.

  Further, since the composite data is stored in the composite data area 81c after creation, the composite data can be used for a plurality of non-consecutive frames after the composite data is created.

  In addition, composite data is created in accordance with each of the effect data that constitutes the composite data, when it is used for display. As a result, it is not necessary to set processing timing for creating composite data independently of image display.

  The composite data is created after the parameter information is applied to each of the effect data making up the composite data. Thus, when using the synthetic data, the parameter information may be derived and applied to the synthetic data, and it is not necessary to derive and apply the parameter information to each of the effect data constituting the synthetic data. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced when using the combined data.

  In the case where a plurality of effect effects are executed using the composite data, the additional effect data may not be drawn. Even in this case, the generation of the composite data facilitates the adjustment of the processing time in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76.

  The composite data may be created at a timing different from the timing at which each effect data is used for display, such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

<Partial Display of Individual Image Using α Data>
Next, a configuration for partially displaying an individual image using α data will be described.

  The α data is, as already described, transmission information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 as image data. The α data is set individually for image data defining individual images such as background data and sprite data, but for the sprite data, α data for whole and α data for part are set respectively It is done.

  The overall alpha data and the partial alpha data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view for describing α data, and FIG. 63 (a) shows symbol sprite data PD20 corresponding to a predetermined symbol, and FIG. 63 (b) is set in association with the symbol sprite data PD20. 63 (c) shows the case where the overall alpha data PD21 is applied to the symbol sprite data PD20, and FIGS. 63 (d) to 63 (g) are associated with the symbol sprite data PD20. The set alpha data PD22 to PD25 are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 63A, the symbol sprite data PD20 includes an image area PA10 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image, and a frame area PA11 surrounding the image area PA10. The frame area PA11 enables the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to treat the symbol sprite data PD20 as image data defined in a rectangular shape regardless of the outer edge shape of the image area PA10, thereby facilitating designation of coordinates.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the size of the overall α data PD21 is set such that the outer shape thereof matches the symbol sprite data PD20 to be applied. The overall alpha data PD21 includes an image corresponding area PA12 that occupies the inside of the outer edge area and a frame corresponding area PA13 that occupies the outside of the outer edge area, with the outer edge part of the image area PA10 in the symbol sprite data PD20 to be applied as a boundary Is equipped.

  In each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA13, “0” which is complete transmission information is set as an α value. On the other hand, “1” which is opaque information is set as an α value for each pixel included in the image corresponding area PA12 excluding the outer edge portion, and an α value for each pixel included in the outer edge portion 0 <α value <1 which is partial transmission information is set.

  By applying the overall alpha data PD21 to the symbol sprite data PD20, the alpha value of each pixel included in the image corresponding area PA12 is applied to each pixel included in the image area PA10, and further, the frame area PA11 The α value of each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA13 is applied to each pixel included in.

  In this case, as described above, the size of the overall α data PD 21 is set such that the outer shape thereof matches the symbol sprite data PD 20 to be applied. Therefore, by setting both data PD20 and 21 such that the size and the rotation angle of both data PD20 and 21 are the same and furthermore that the reference pixels such as the central one pixel overlap, the overall alpha data PD21 for the pattern sprite data PD20 The application can be performed, and the processing load related to the setting can be reduced. The same applies to the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

When the symbol sprite data 20 to which the overall α data PD21 is applied is to be superimposed on the image data overlapping on the back side of the display screen G, each dot related to the overlay is determined by the overall α data PD21. Fusion (ie, blending) of numerical information is performed on the basis of the α value being used. In particular,
R: "R value of back side image" × ("1"-"α value") + "R value of front side image" × "α value"
G: "G value of back side image" × ("1"-"α value") + "G value of front side image" × "α value"
B: "B value of back side image" × ("1"-"α value") + "B value of front side image" × "α value"
It becomes. The same applies to the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

  By applying the overall α data PD21, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the frame area PA11 of the pattern CH3 after application becomes completely transparent, and only the image area PA10 can be viewed. In addition, jaggies generated in the outline of the pattern CH3 are reduced, and the color can be changed smoothly so that the outline of the pattern CH3 is fused to the background. That is, it becomes possible to perform antialiasing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63 (d) to FIG. 63 (g), the sizes of partial α data PD22 to PD25 are set such that the outer shape thereof matches symbol sprite data PD20 to be applied. Partial α data PD22 to PD25 is a partial image corresponding region PA14 that occupies the inside of the outer edge portion with the outer edge portion corresponding to a part of the image region PA10 in the symbol sprite data PD20 to be applied, and the outer edge portion And a corresponding area PA15 except for a part that occupies the outside of the.

  In each pixel included in the other corresponding region PA15, “0” which is complete transmission information is set as the α value. On the other hand, in the partial image corresponding area PA14, “1” which is opaque information is set as an α value for each pixel included in a portion excluding the outer edge portion, and α for each pixel included in the outer edge portion As the value, 0 <α value <1 which is partial transmission information is set.

  In each of the partial α data PD22 to PD25, portions corresponding to the partial image corresponding area PA14 in the image area PA10 of the symbol sprite data PD20 are different from each other. Specifically, the partial α data PD22 of FIG. 63 (d) corresponds to 1⁄4 of the destination side when the image area PA10 is variably displayed, and the partial α of FIG. 63 (e). The data PD23 corresponds to the half on the advancing side, the partial α data PD24 in FIG. 63 (f) corresponds to the half on the advancing source side, and the partial α data PD25 in FIG. 63 (g) proceeds It corresponds to 1/4 of the former side.

  The partial α data PD22 to PD25 set for one symbol sprite data PD20 is not limited to four, and may be two, three or five or more. Moreover, one may be sufficient. Further, a combination of the above-mentioned overall alpha data and a plurality of partial alpha data is set in one-to-one correspondence with each type of symbol sprite data.

  By using the alpha data PD22 to PD25 for each part, it is possible to perform partial display of a symbol. Also, even when partial display is performed in this manner, jaggies generated in the outline of the design are reduced in the partially displayed range, and the color changes smoothly so that the outline of the design is fused to the background It is possible to That is, even when partial display is performed, anti-aliasing can be performed.

  Hereinafter, processing in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 in the case of applying α data will be described.

  First, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the symbol calculation process is a process executed in step S2317 of the task process (FIG. 46) as described above, and various parameters are calculated for the symbols to be subjected to variable display in each game round Is a process to derive.

  In step S3501, it is determined whether it is time to execute partial display. The determination as to whether or not it is the timing is performed by referring to the information designated by the current pointer in the currently set data table.

  If it is not time to execute partial display (partial display), in step S 3502, the current sprite data to be controlled is grasped. In the following step S3503, various parameters such as coordinates, size and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all the grasped symbol sprite data, and information of the derived various parameters is made to correspond to the symbol sprite data in work RAM 73 The control information is updated by writing in the selected area.

  In the following step S3504, the overall alpha data corresponding to each of the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3502 is grasped. In this case, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 also grasps the information of the address to which each whole alpha data is transferred. Thereafter, in step S3505, after storing the combination designation information in the register, the present symbol calculation processing ends.

  When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3502 is the drawing target, and further, parameter information of each of the symbol sprite data A drawing list including the type and address of the overall alpha data and the combination designation information indicating that the overall alpha data is to be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  On the other hand, if it is time to execute partial display (step S3501: YES), the coordinates and size of the partial display area are grasped in step S3506. The partial display area is an area displayed so as to partition a part of the display screen G (refer to an area partitioned by a frame indicated by reference numeral PL5 in FIG. 65 (b)).

  In the following step S3507, figure sprite data displayed this time on the display screen G including the partial display area is grasped. In the pachinko machine 10, when the partial display area is displayed, the symbol is displayed only in the partial display area, and the background and the effect character are displayed outside the partial display area on the display screen G. Will not be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol may be displayed outside the partial display area.

  In the following step S3508, various parameters such as coordinates, size and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all of the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3507, and the information of the various parameters derived therefrom corresponds to the symbol sprite data in work RAM 73 The control information is updated by writing in the reserved area. In this case, the size information is calculated so that the symbols displayed in the partial display area are displayed in a smaller size than the normal display state in the situation where the partial display area is not displayed.

  In the following step S3509, it is determined whether or not partial α data needs to be set. If it is necessary to set the part α data, it is the part α data corresponding to the symbol sprite data that requires the setting in step S 3510, and is the part corresponding to the target of creation of the current drawing list. Understand the α data. In this case, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 also grasps the information of the address to which each part α data is transferred.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3509 or after the process of step S3510 has been executed, it is determined in step S3511 whether or not it is necessary to set the overall α data. Even if it is the symbol sprite displayed in the partial display area, it is necessary to set the overall alpha data for those for which the partial alpha data is not applicable, so in this case, the determination in step S3511 is positive. do. If it is necessary to set the overall alpha data, the process of step S3504 is executed to grasp the overall alpha data.

  Regardless of whether or not the overall alpha data is grasped in step S3504, finally, after storing the combination designation information in step S3505, the present symbol arithmetic processing ends.

  When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), a partial display area should be set in addition to the information described as the case where only the whole alpha data is applied. A drawing list is created that includes information, parameter information of the partial display area, the type and address of the partial alpha data, and compositing designation information indicating that the partial alpha data is to be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data. And sent to the VDP 76.

  Next, setting processing of symbol sprite data executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process of the symbol sprite data is executed in the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, the setting process of the symbol sprite data is activated when the combination designation is set in the drawing list.

  In step S3601, the current sprite data shown in the drawing list is grasped. In the subsequent step S3602, it is determined whether or not the overall alpha data is to be applied to the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3601.

  When the overall alpha data is to be applied, the overall alpha data is read from the designated address in step S3603 and is synthesized with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. Thus, the alpha value set for each pixel of the overall alpha data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the symbol sprite data. By the way, when synthesizing the whole α data, the whole of the α data is synthesized so as to overlap with the whole of the symbol sprite data. The same applies to the case of the partial α data.

  On the other hand, when the partial α data is applied, the partial α data is read from the designated address in step S3604, and is synthesized with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. Thus, the α value set for each pixel of the partial α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the symbol sprite data.

  After executing step S3603 or step S3604, the process proceeds to step S3605. In step S3605, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) to be referred to when writing the synthetic sprite data created in step S3603 or step S3604 in the frame areas 82a and 82b are grasped. Thereafter, this setting process is ended.

  The various parameters grasped at step S3605 are information set for the symbol sprite data grasped at step S3601. That is, although information of various parameters necessary for writing in the frame areas 82a and 82b is set for the symbol sprite data, it is not set for the overall alpha data or the partial alpha data, and the symbol sprite Information on various parameters set for the data is applied to the composite sprite data. As a result, the amount of information designated in the drawing list can be reduced and the processing load on the display CPU 72 can be reduced as compared to the configuration in which various parameter information is set for the overall α data and the partial α data as well. Be

  Incidentally, in the case of writing the symbol sprite data for which the setting process is completed in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the background data and effect data already written in the frame areas 82a and 82b have already been described. An operation for blending (blending operation) is performed.

  Next, how partial display of a symbol is performed using the partial display region PL5 will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (b). FIG. 65 (b) is an explanatory view for describing a state in which partial display of a symbol is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 65B, the partial display area PL5 is displayed as a smaller range than the display screen G at a position close to the corner portion of the display screen G. Further, the outer edge of the partial display area PL5 is not in contact with the outer edge of the display screen G, and a gap is generated between all the outer edges of the partial display area PL5 and the outer edge of the display screen G.

  In the partial display area PL5, variable display of the symbols CH3 and CH4 is performed in a predetermined direction. The predetermined direction is the same as that in the case where the variable display of symbols is performed on each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without displaying the partial display area PL5, but may be a different direction.

  The symbols CH3 and CH4 variably displayed in the partial display area PL5 appear from a predetermined side of the partial display area PL5 and disappear from the side opposite to the partial display area PL5. In this case, these symbols CH3 and CH4 are partially displayed so as not to protrude from the partial display area PL5.

  As described above, by combining the partial α data with the pattern, partial display of the pattern can be performed using the α data that can be anti-aliased.

  Further, as described above, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can not recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, and can recognize only the coordinates of the reference pixel. Then, in the processing on the program, it is not possible to perform processing of dividing only a part of the symbol sprite data. On the other hand, a configuration may be considered in which a plurality of symbol sprite data necessary for partial display are set in advance for one symbol. However, the symbol sprite data is data including color information, and the data capacity is larger than that of the alpha data in which only the alpha value is set for each pixel. Therefore, by performing partial display using α data, partial display can be performed while suppressing the data capacity of the image data and further the data capacity required in the NAND flash memory 102.

  When the VDP 76 performs partial display, it only needs to read out the partial α data and apply it to the image data to be applied. Therefore, partial display can be performed while suppressing an increase in the processing load of VDP 76.

  Note that anti-aliasing may not be performed when the partial α data is applied. Further, the application target of the partial α data is not limited to the design, and may be a background character or an effect character. Further, the parameter information may be uniquely set to the overall alpha data and the partial alpha data.

<First Alternative to Partial Display>
A first alternative for partially displaying will be described.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory view for explaining the first alternative embodiment, and FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (c) show symbol sprite data, and FIGS. 66 (b) and 66 (d) show alpha data for whole 66 (e) to 66 (h) show alpha data for a part.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (h), the overall alpha data PD28 and PD29 are set individually for each of the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27, and the partial alpha data PD30 .About.PD33 are set in common to the respective symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. Incidentally, the initial size in the state of being stored in the NAND flash memory 102 is the same for all the data PD26 to PD33. Further, the above data configuration is the same for the symbol sprite data other than the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27 illustrated in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (c).

  In the case of this configuration, when partial display is not performed, antialiasing can be performed by combining the corresponding overall alpha data PD28 and PD29 with each of the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. When partial display is performed, first, the corresponding overall alpha data PD28 and PD29 are combined, and then the partial alpha data PD30 to PD33 corresponding to the part to be partially displayed are combined to form the anti-aliasing. While performing, partial display can be performed using the common part α data PD30 to PD33.

  According to the above configuration, compared to the configuration in which the alpha data for partial is set individually for the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27, it is possible to suppress the types of alpha data PD30 to PD33 for partial, and alpha for partial It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the data PD30 to PD33.

<Second Alternative for Partial Display>
A second alternative form for partially displaying will be described.

  FIG. 67 (a) is an explanatory diagram for describing a second alternative embodiment, and FIG. 67 (b) is a flowchart showing setting processing of symbol sprite data in the second alternative embodiment.

  In this alternative embodiment, antialiasing is performed and partial display of a symbol is performed by using α palette data instead of using α data. The α pallet data PD 34 is data obtained by adding α value information to each color information of pallet data for 256 colors, as shown in FIG. 67 (a-1).

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a-2), the image area PA16 and the frame area PA17 are set in the symbol sprite data PD35, but color information not set in the image area PA16 is set in the frame area PA17. It is done. On the other hand, in the general α palette data, complete transmission information is set as the α value for the color information set in the frame area PA17. Further, in the image area PA16, the color information of the portion excluding the outer edge portion is “1” which is opaque information as the α value, and the color information of the outer edge portion is the partially transmitted information as the α value. 0 <α value <1 is set. As shown in FIG. 67 (a-3), antialiasing can be performed by combining the overall alpha palette data with the symbol sprite data PD35.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (a-2), a plurality of partial areas PA18 to PA21 in which the same color information is not used are set in the symbol sprite data PD35. On the other hand, complete transparency information is set as the alpha value for the color information set in the partial areas PA18 to PA21 and the frame area PA17, and the color information set in the other areas. A partial alpha pallet data is prepared in which the opaque information is set as the alpha value. A plurality of types of partial α pallet data are prepared so that partial areas PA18 to PA21 to which the α value of complete transmission information is to be applied are mutually different. By combining the alpha pallet data for part with the symbol sprite data PD 35, it is possible to display a part of the symbol as shown in FIG. 67 (a-4).

  The process of setting the symbol sprite data in the VDP 76, which is executed when the alpha palette data is used, will be described below with reference to FIG. 67 (b).

  First, in step S3701, symbol sprite data of the current drawing target shown in the drawing list is grasped. In the following step S3702, it is determined whether or not the general alpha palette data is to be applied to the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3701.

  When the overall alpha palette data is to be applied, in step S3703, the overall alpha palette data is read from the designated address, and combined with the graphic sprite data read from the designated address. As a result, the α value set by adding to each color information in the overall α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data.

  On the other hand, when the partial alpha pallet data is applied, the partial alpha pallet data is read from the designated address in step S3704, and is synthesized with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. As a result, the alpha value set by adding to each color information in the partial alpha palette data is applied to the graphic sprite data.

  After executing step S3703 or step S3704, the process proceeds to step S3705. In step S3705, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) to be referred to when writing the combined sprite data created in step S3703 or step S3704 in the frame areas 82a and 82b are grasped. Thereafter, this setting process is ended.

  By executing the above processing, the overall alpha palette data or the partial alpha palette data is combined with the pattern sprite data. Even with this configuration, although the data configuration of the symbol sprite data is restricted compared to the case where α data is used, the anti-aliasing and partial display of the symbol sprite can be performed. Also, partial display settings can be performed in accordance with the setting of color information.

<Another Embodiment for Character Transition Display Using α Data>
An alternative form for performing character transition display using α data will be described.

  FIG. 68 (a) is a flow chart showing the character transition process performed by the VDP 76, and FIGS. 68 (b) to 68 (f) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the state in which the character transition display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 68A, in the character transition process, first, in step S3801, an overlapping process of the character sprite data PD36 is executed. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the character sprite data PD36 is arranged such that a plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 are arranged in a predetermined direction, specifically in a lateral direction, and the external shape is rectangular. The data is defined such that the periphery of the plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 is surrounded by the frame area PA27. In step S3801, two identical character sprite data PD36 are read out, and those data are set so that the whole of them is overlapped in the front and back.

  In the following step S3802, pallet data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the back side. As a result, the same color information is set for each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PA36 on the back side. In the following step S3803, the overall alpha data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the back side. Thereby, anti-aliasing is performed on each character area PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite on the back side.

  In the subsequent step S3804, pallet data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the front side. The palette data is different from the palette data set in step S3802 in color information set for each numerical information of bitmap data. As a result, color information different from that of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the back side is set for each character area PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

  In the following step S3805, it is determined whether or not the general-use α data is to be combined with the character sprite data PD on the front side. When the overall alpha data is to be combined, in step S3806, the overall alpha data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the front side, and then the present character transition processing is ended. The overall α data is the same as the overall α data used in step S3803. Thereby, anti-aliasing is performed on each character area PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

  When the process of step S3806 is executed, finally, on the display screen G, each character area PA22 to PA26 set in the character sprite data PD36 on the back side is not displayed, and character sprite data on the front side is displayed. The character areas PA22 to PA26 set in the PD 36 are displayed. In this case, characters are displayed in the color information set in the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3805 that the overall alpha data is not to be combined, the partial alpha data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the front side in step S3807, and then the present character transition processing is performed. finish. As shown in FIGS. 68C and 68D, partial alpha data PD37 and PD38 are completely transmitted information as alpha values for each pixel of a region corresponding to a part of character regions PA22 to PA26 and frame region PA27. Is set. Further, in the other character areas PA22 to PA26, opaque information is set as an α value for each pixel included in the portion excluding the outer edge portion, and partially transmitted as an α value for each pixel included in the outer edge portion The information 0 <α value <1 is set. The partial α data PD37 and PD38 are set in a plurality of types so that the character areas PA22 to PA26 are erased one character by one character in a predetermined direction, specifically, sequentially from the left.

  When the process of step S3807 is executed, the character area of the character sprite on the back side is displayed on the display screen G for the character area that is not displayed in the character sprite on the front side. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 68 (e) and 68 (f), part of the characters continuing from the left side is displayed in the character sprite on the back side with the color information set in each character area. The remaining characters are displayed in color information set in each character information in the character sprite on the front side. Alternatively, all the characters are displayed in the character sprite on the back side with the color information set in each character information.

  As described above, character transition display of karaoke style can be performed using α data. Incidentally, the above-mentioned character transition display is executed when a karaoke style effect is performed, and an effect is performed such that the corresponding lyric part is discolored in accordance with the melody outputted from the speaker unit 45.

  The character sprite data PD36 may not be set in an overlapping manner, but a single character sprite data PD36 may be set, and the display range may be narrowed sequentially. In this case, the character areas are displayed so as to be erased sequentially, instead of being displayed so as to be sequentially applied with different colors.

  In addition, the character sprite data on the front side may not be anti-aliased, and the influence of the image on the rear side may not be applied to the outline portion of each character area.

<Configuration for performing wipe switching effect>
Next, the configuration for performing the wipe switching effect will be described.

  In the wipe switching effect, the image of the previous display timing is gradually erased at the timing when the background image or a large number of characters are changed, and instead, the image of the later display timing is divided gradually using the erased area. It is an effect to be displayed on the.

  A link display function is used for the wipe switching effect. This link display function is a function that integrates dependent side image data (relative sprite) with one type of reference side image data (absolute sprite) and allows VDP 76 to handle it as one image data. is there. When a plurality of image data are integrated by the link display function, the subordinate image data is visually displayed only within the image range of the reference image data. Further, when the image data is integrated by the link display function, the processing performed on the reference side image data is also applied to the subordinate side image data.

  Further, in the wipe switching effect, α data for the wipe switching effect is used in order to gradually reveal the image of the later display timing while gradually erasing the image of the earlier display timing. The alpha data for the wipe switching effect is composited with the reference side image data of the previous display timing, but as described above, the subordinate side image data is one image data integrated into the reference side image data. As it is handled, the alpha data is also applied to subordinate image data.

  Here, each image data which comprises an image of first display timing, each image data which constitutes an image of second display timing, and alpha data for wipe change effects are explained, referring to FIG.

  FIG. 69 (a) shows image data PD39 to PD42 constituting an image of the previous display timing. Among them, the image data PD39 is image data for displaying the image on the back of the first display timing, and is used as reference side image data in the link display function (hereinafter, the image data PD39 is used as the reference side image data) It is called PD39). The plurality of image data PD40 to PD42 are image data for displaying an image for decoration displayed on the image on the backmost side, and are used as subordinate image data in the link display function (hereinafter, referred to as The image data PD40 to PD42 are referred to as subordinate image data PD40 to PD42).

  By applying the link display function to the image data PD39 to PD42, the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 can be visually displayed only within the image range of the reference image data PD39 as described above. It becomes. Even if the entire subordinate side image data is included in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b, the part extending from the reference side image data PD39 is not considered as the drawing object.

  FIG. 69 (b) shows image data PD43 to PD45 constituting an image at the post display timing. The image data PD43 is image data for displaying the image on the back of display timing, and the plurality of image data PD44 and PD45 are image data for displaying the image for decoration displayed on the image on the back. It is. The link display function is not applied to the image data PD43 to PD45 constituting the image of the post display timing.

  69C and 69D show α data PD46 and PD47 for effecting wipe switching. Since these α data PD46 and PD47 are synthesized with respect to the reference side image data PD39, they have the same size and outer shape as the reference side image data PD39 at the time of initial setting. In each of the α data PD46 and PD47, complete transmission areas PA28 and PA30 in which the α value of each pixel is set to “0” which is complete transmission information, and “1” in which the α value of each pixel is opaque information And the opaque areas PA29 and PA31 set in FIG. In each of the α data PD46 and PD47, regions inside the boundary line are the non-transmissive regions PA29 and PA31, and regions outside the boundary are the complete transmissive regions PA28 and PA30. Each of the α data PD 46 and PD 47 is switched and used each time the image for one frame is updated when performing the wipe switching effect, but the α data PD 46 used at the earlier timing is later The sizes of the complete transmission areas PA28 and PA30 are set larger than the α data PD47 used in the timing.

  A specific processing configuration for executing the wipe switching effect using the respective image data will be described.

  FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the operation processing for the wipe switching effect performed by the display CPU 72. The operation processing for the wipe switching effect is executed in the background operation processing of step S2315 in the task processing (FIG. 46). Further, the arithmetic processing for the wipe switching effect is started when information on the wipe switching effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S3901, based on the currently set data table, while grasping each image data PD43 to PD45 corresponding to the image of the later display timing, grasping the respective image data PD43 to PD45 as a priority side in drawing Do. In the subsequent step S3902, the parameters of the image data PD43 to PD45 grasped as the post-display timing are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the image data PD43 to PD45. Update control information by writing to.

  Thereafter, in steps S3903 to S3909, processing for instructing drawing of an image at the previous display timing is executed. First, in step S3903, reference side image data PD39 of the image of the previous display timing is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S3904, information for control is obtained by calculating and deriving the parameters of the reference side image data PD39, and writing the information of the derived parameters in the area secured corresponding to the reference image data PD39 in the work RAM 73. Update

  In the following step S3905, the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 of the image of the first display timing are grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S3906, the parameters of the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42. Update control information with.

  Thereafter, in step S3907, link designation information is stored. The link designation information is information for designating execution of drawing of image data using the link display function. In the following step S3908, the alpha data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect corresponding to the current drawing instruction are grasped based on the currently set data table. The alpha data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect are set in association with the reference side image data PD39, and the application target is the reference side image data PD39.

  Thereafter, after storing the wipe designation information in step S3909, the present arithmetic processing ends. The wipe designation information is information for instructing that the alpha data PD 46 and PD 47 for effecting wipe switching be combined with the reference side image data PD 39.

  When the operation processing for the wipe switching effect is performed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a drawing list for drawing an image corresponding to the wipe switching effect is created. The drawing list will be described below. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for describing a drawing list created when the wipe switching effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 71, a plurality of image data are set in association with each drawing order. In this case, since each image data forming the image of the post-display timing is grasped as the priority side in step S3901 of the calculation processing, each image data forming the image of the post-display timing is also in the drawing list. The drawing order is set earlier than the image data constituting the image of the previous display timing.

  A link is designated for each piece of image data constituting an image of the pre-display timing. When the link specification is made, the image data related to the link specification is processed within the range of one processing cycle of the drawing processing (FIG. 44) in the VDP 76, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be processed separately. In addition, although the description by the illustration is omitted, the parameter P (4) of the background data corresponding to the reference side image data among the image data constituting the image of the previous display timing is the α data for the wipe switching effect Information is set.

  By the way, the symbol sprite data is set in the drawing order after each image data constituting the image of the previous display timing. Therefore, an image in which the variable display of the symbol is being performed is displayed in front of the background image on which the wipe switching effect is performed.

  Next, the setting process for the wipe switching effect performed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for the wipe switching effect is performed as a part of the content grasping process performed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, at the timing when the setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed, each image data forming an image of the display timing after being designated in the current drawing list is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. It has been done.

  In step S4001, it is determined whether link designation is set in the drawing list. If the link specification is not set, this setting processing is ended as it is. If the link specification is set, the reference side image data PD39 specified as the current drawing object and the reference side image data PD39 are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S4002. Know the address. In the following step S4003, the parameters of the reference-side image data PD39 are grasped.

  In the subsequent step S4004, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 designated as the current drawing object, and the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 grasp the addresses to which these subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are transferred. In the subsequent step S4005, the parameters of the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 are grasped.

  In the following step S4006, link setting is performed. As a result, the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 grasped at step S4004 are linked to the reference image data PD39 grasped at step S4002. Incidentally, upon this link, the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 to which the parameter grasped in step S4005 is applied is linked to the reference image data PD39 to which the parameter grasped in step S4003 is applied. .

  In the following step S4007, it is determined whether the wipe designation is set. If the wipe designation is not set, this setting processing is ended as it is. When the wipe designation is set, the alpha data PD46 and PD47 are transferred in the alpha data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect designated at this time and the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S4008. Know which address Then, the .alpha. Data read out based on the grasped address is combined with the reference side image data PD39 to which the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 are linked. Thereafter, this setting process is ended.

  Next, the state of the wipe switching effect using the link display function will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing before the wipe switching effect is started, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), the image PC12 of the first display timing is displayed. In the front of the image PC12 at the pre-display timing, variation display of symbols is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, when the wipe switching effect is started, after the respective image data PD43 to PD45 constituting the image PC 13 of the later display timing are drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the reference side image data The subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are linked to the PD 39, and the image data in a state where the alpha data PD 46 for the wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 69 (c) is combined is drawn.

  In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 at the previous display timing are drawn so as to overlap the image data PD43 to PD45 at the later display timing, but at the time of the drawing, the fusion operation as described above is executed. Be done. Therefore, in each dot corresponding to the pixel to which the complete transmission area PA28 is synthesized, the numerical information of the image data of the later display timing remains as it is. On the other hand, since the numerical information of the pixel on which the opaque area PA29 is synthesized at the first display timing is overwritten on the dot to be drawn as it is, the numerical information of the image data of the second display timing is erased and the first display is performed. Image data of timing is written. As a result, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), a wipe image is displayed in which the outside of the boundary is the image PC13 of the later display timing and the inside of the boundary is the image PC12 of the earlier display timing. In the front of the wipe image, variable display of symbols is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, in place of the α data PD 46 for the wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 69 (c), the drawing process is executed using the α data PD 47 for the wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 69 (d). As shown in 73 (c), the area where the image PC 12 of the first display timing is displayed is narrowed, but the area where the image PC 13 of the second display timing is displayed is widened.

  As described above, since switching of the background image is performed gradually over a plurality of frames while performing wipe switching effects, the switching mode of the background image can be made innovative and the switching mode of the background image can be changed. It also becomes possible to diversify.

  Further, the image data PD 39 to PD 42 constituting the image of the front side display timing are linked, and the alpha data PD 46 and PD 47 for the wipe switching effect are combined with the linked image data. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the alpha data for the wipe switching effect is individually synthesized for the image data PD39 to PD42.

  Further, after simply drawing the image data PD43 to PD45 at the rear display timing in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the image data PD39 to PD42 at the front display timing is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b. It is a structure. That is, with regard to the image data PD43 to PD45 at the rear side display timing, the image data may be drawn normally according to the drawing list. Therefore, the complexity of the processing configuration can be suppressed.

  The α data may be individually applied to the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 for the purpose of antialiasing or partial display. Further, the link specification may be performed also for the image data PD43 to PD45 of the rear side display timing.

  In addition, the direction of the wipe switching is not limited to the configuration in which the image of the first display timing narrows from the outside to the inside over a plurality of frames, and may be narrow from the inside to the outside. It may be configured to be narrowed from a predetermined side of one to the side opposite to it.

<Configuration for moving and displaying sprites smoothly>
Next, a configuration for moving and displaying a sprite smoothly will be described.

  When displaying an animation in which a sprite is moving in a predetermined moving direction, the sprite is drawn at a position shifted by a predetermined dot in the moving direction for each frame or for each plurality of frames. A sprite for smooth movement is set as the sprite.

  A sprite for smooth movement will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, and FIGS. 74 (b) and 74 (c) are sprite data PD48 and PD49 for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement. It is an explanatory view for explaining.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image representing a cloud displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction as time passes. Further, the display size is smaller than that of the other individual image PC 14 simultaneously displayed as an image of one frame. Note that Sprite CH5 for smooth movement is not limited to an individual image representing a cloud, and if it is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction, it is an individual image representing another object such as an airplane It may be.

  Plural pieces of sprite data are set as image data for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement. Specifically, two pieces of sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set. Although these sprite data PD48 and PD49 are both for representing the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, the second sprite data PD49 is based on the frame areas 82a and 82b in the movement direction with respect to the first sprite data PD48. Corresponds to the state of moving by half a dot.

  The two sprite data PD48 and PD49 are data shifted by a half dot due to the difference in the α value at the boundary portion. When the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are compared by taking each pixel forming the same boundary as an example, as shown in FIGS. 74 (b) and 74 (c), the α value of the pixel on the movement direction ahead side is different. ing.

  As described above, when the α value is “0”, it corresponds to complete transmission information, and in the pixel where the α value is “0”, all the images overlapping on the back side of the display screen G are transmitted. On the other hand, when the α value is “1”, it corresponds to the nontransparent information, and in the pixel where the α value is “1”, the image overlapping on the back side of the display screen G is filled. Further, in the case of 0 <α value <1, the overlapping image on the back side of the display screen G is transmitted in a state in which it becomes translucent by the α value.

  Incidentally, when the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is superimposed on the image on the back side, an operation for fusion is executed. The fusion operation is as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (b), the first sprite data PD48 has the α value of the boundary set, while the second sprite data PD49 has the boundary as shown in FIG. 74 (c). The α value of the portion is set to a value corresponding to a state shifted by a half dot with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b in the movement direction. Thus, when the second sprite data PD49 is set at the same position as the coordinates at which the first sprite data PD48 is set, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 74 (b) and (c), The sprite CH5 for smooth movement is viewed as if it were moved by a half dot with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b or a corresponding amount with respect to the display screen G.

  Incidentally, the second sprite data PD49 is created by doubling the first sprite data PD48, shifting it by one dot with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b, and then halving it. .

  Next, a processing configuration for performing smooth movement display using the sprite data PD48 and PD49 will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the arithmetic processing for smooth movement executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for smooth movement is executed in the background calculation processing of step S2315 in the task processing (FIG. 46). Further, the calculation process for the smooth movement is started when the information about the smooth movement is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S4101, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the smooth movement display. This determination is made based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, the area for progress target flag set in the work RAM 73 is cleared in step S4102. In the following step S4103, numerical information of the progress counter set in the work RAM 73 is initialized.

  In the following step S4104, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as the current drawing target. In the following step S4105, the coordinate information of the first sprite data PD48 is calculated and derived by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter, and the information of the derived coordinate is derived from the first sprite data PD48 in the work RAM 73. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to. Incidentally, the coordinate information is set to correspond to the numerical information of the progress counter on a one-to-one basis.

  Thereafter, in step S4106, parameters other than coordinate information are calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and control information is updated by writing the derived parameter information in the secured area. . Furthermore, after storing the smooth movement designation information in step S4107, the present arithmetic processing ends. When the above process is executed, in the drawing list, the first sprite data PD 48 is set as a drawing target, and initial value coordinates are set as the coordinates. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing, it is determined in step S4108 whether or not the progress target flag is set. If the progress target flag is not set, this means that the first sprite data PD 48 has been set in the previous frame, and therefore the process proceeds to step S4109.

  In step S4109, a progress target flag is set. In the following step S4110, the second sprite data PD49 is grasped as the current drawing target. In the subsequent step S4111, control is performed by grasping the information of the coordinates of the second sprite data PD49, and writing the information of the grasped coordinates in the area secured corresponding to the second sprite data PD49 in the work RAM 73. Update information for In this case, since the process of updating the progress counter is not executed, the information of the same coordinate as the information of the coordinate at which the first sprite data PD 48 was drawn in the previous frame is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S4112, a parameter other than coordinate information is calculated and derived for second sprite data PD49, and control information is updated by writing the derived parameter information in the secured area. . Furthermore, after storing the smooth movement designation information in step S4107, the present arithmetic processing ends. When the above process is executed, in the drawing list, the second sprite data PD 49 is set as a drawing target, and the same coordinates as the previous frame are set as the coordinates. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  If it is determined in step S4108 that the progress target flag is set, it means that the second sprite data PD49 has been set in the previous frame, and the process advances to step S4113.

  In step S4113, the progress target flag is cleared. In the following step S4114, the progress counter is updated so as to be incremented by one. In the following step S4115, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as the current drawing target. In the following step S4116, the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 is calculated and derived by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter updated in step S4114, and the information of the derived coordinate is secured as described above Update control information by writing to the area. In this case, with respect to the coordinates set in the previous frame, the information of the coordinates advanced by one dot in the movement direction with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S4117, parameters other than the coordinate information are calculated for the first sprite data PD48 and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the secured area to update the control information. . Furthermore, after storing the smooth movement designation information in step S4107, the present arithmetic processing ends. When the above process is executed, in the drawing list, the first sprite data PD 48 is set as the drawing target, and the coordinates deviated in the moving direction by one dot from the coordinates set in the previous frame as the coordinates. Is set. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  Next, the setting process for smooth movement executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 76 (a). The setting process for smooth movement is executed in the content grasping process of step S2204 in the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, the setting process for smooth movement is activated when the smooth movement designation is set in the drawing list.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether the current drawing target is the first sprite data PD48. If it is the first sprite data PD48, the process proceeds to step S4202, and the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as a drawing target, and the first sprite data PD48 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address. On the other hand, if it is not the first sprite data PD48, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the second sprite data PD49 is grasped as a drawing target, and the second sprite data PD49 in the change area 81b in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Figure out what address is being transferred.

  After the process of step S4202 or step S4203 is executed, the coordinates of the current drawing object are grasped in step S4204, and after the other parameters are grasped in step S4205, the present setting process is ended.

  By performing setting processing for smooth movement, in the subsequent writing processing (step S2205), the sprite to be drawn this time out of both sprite data PD48 and PD49 for the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn Data is drawn at the specified coordinates. In this case, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the first frame, the first sprite data PD48 is set such that the coordinate in the movement direction is "n", and in the second frame, the coordinate in the movement direction is The second sprite data PD 49 is set so as to be the same for "n". Also, the first sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinate of the movement direction is "n + 1" in the third frame, and the coordinate of the movement direction is the same in "n + 1" in the fourth frame. Sprite data PD49 of is set. Then, after the first sprite data PD 48 and the second sprite data PD 49 are alternately set for the same coordinates, the state in which the moving direction is updated by one dot is repeated. As a result, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is viewed as if progressing by a half dot on the basis of the frame areas 82a and 82b for each frame or a corresponding part on the basis of the display screen G, and the sprite CH5 is It can be moved and displayed smoothly.

  In particular, since the display size of the sprite CH 5 for smooth movement is smaller than that of the other individual images PC 14 simultaneously displayed, one dot portion or display screen G with respect to the frame areas 82 a and 82 b is displayed for each frame. In the configuration in which movement is performed by the amount corresponding to the one dot as a reference, the movement amount with respect to the area of itself becomes a large ratio, and there is a concern that the movement may be noticeable as rattle. On the other hand, according to this configuration, the sprite CH5 can be moved and displayed smoothly without causing such a problem.

  Also, although the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image representing a cloud, when the frame rate is dropped as if the cloud is moving slowly, the frame areas 82a and 82b are referenced at the timing of movement. In the configuration in which one dot is moved or a portion corresponding to one dot with reference to the display screen G, it is feared that it may become noticeable as rattling. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, even if movement is made by one dot or a plurality of frames corresponding to a plurality of frames, movement by less than one dot is performed with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b. , Sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed.

  Incidentally, as a configuration for reducing the frame rate, specifically, information of the same coordinates is applied to the first sprite data PD 48 for the first plurality of frames, and the information of the same coordinates is the second. When the second plurality of frames is applied to the sprite data PD 49, a configuration may be considered in which the coordinate information is advanced by one dot. In this case, the first plurality of frames and the second plurality of frames may have the same number, or may have different numbers. However, if it is desired to display so that the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is progressing at a constant speed, it is preferable to make the first plurality of frames the same as the second plurality of frames.

  The smooth movement display as described above can be realized only by alternately drawing the sprite data PD 48 and PD 49 shifted by a half dot. That is, the above excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complication of the processing configuration. Further, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 can be created by a simple method of making the α values of the outer edge portions different.

  Further, since the difference between both sprite data PD48 and PD49 is a half dot, the apparent movement amount is made to be the same when switching from one to the other and switching from the other to the other. Can.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by half a dot is provided, and sprite data shifted by less than one other dot such as 1/4 dot or 1/4 dot may be provided. . In addition to sprite data as a reference, a plurality of sprite data for less than one dot, such as 1/4 dot, half dot, and 3/4 dot, may be provided so that the movement amounts are different. .

  Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b corresponds to the number of dots in the display screen G on a one-to-one basis, the second sprite data PD49 is based on the display screen G with respect to the first sprite data PD48. The data is shifted by a half dot as

  Further, in the configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b is smaller than the number of dots in the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is shifted by half a dot with respect to the first sprite data PD48 based on the display screen G. It may be configured as data. In this case, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data shifted by less than a half dot with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b. In addition, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 may be set as data shifted by less than one dot instead of the half dot with reference to the display screen G.

  Further, in the configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b is larger than the number of dots in the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is shifted by half a dot with respect to the first sprite data PD48 based on the display screen G. It may be configured as data. In this case, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data shifted by a half dot or more with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b. In addition, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 may be set as data shifted by less than one dot instead of the half dot with reference to the display screen G.

  Also, both sprite data PD 48 and PD 49 are not stored in advance in the memory module 74, only one is stored in advance, and the other is based on one sprite data after the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It may be created and stored separately. In this case, although it is necessary to create one of the sprite data and store it separately, the processing load is increased, but the storage capacity required for storing the sprite data in the memory module 74 can be reduced.

  In addition, the above-described configuration for smooth movement may be applied to sprites that are displayed so that a part moves, not a sprite that is displayed so that the whole moves.

<Configuration for performing zoom-in effect using scaler 97>
Next, a configuration for performing a zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 will be described.

  As described above, the VDP 76 outputs an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data created in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be output, and the above display screen G of the symbol display device 31 A display circuit 94 for displaying an image corresponding to drawing data is provided (see FIG. 41). Incidentally, an image signal is a signal including gradation data for determining a display color in each dot (each pixel) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and is output to the symbol display device 31 based on a predetermined clock signal. .

  The display circuit 94 converts the number of pixels of the drawing data read from the frame regions 82a and 82b of the output target into the number of pixels specified by the display CPU 72, and each dot constituting the liquid crystal display unit 31a of the symbol display device 31. A scaler 97 is provided to generate gradation data of (each pixel).

  The scaler 97 is provided in the display circuit 94 as a dedicated circuit for resolution adjustment. As shown in FIG. 41, the scaler 97 is provided with a resolution adjustment buffer 97a. When gradation data is generated by the scaler 97, the drawing data created in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be output is transferred to the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, and gradation data for the number of designated pixels is generated. The drawing data is converted so that In this conversion, linear interpolation processing is performed. Specifically, bilinear filtering can be used to convert the number of pixels.

  An image signal is generated by the image signal output unit 98 provided in the display circuit 94 based on the gradation data created in the resolution adjustment buffer 97 a and is also output to the symbol display device 31, and is output to the symbol display device 31. Thus, an image of one frame is displayed. Incidentally, the image signal output unit 98 is provided with a line buffer 98a, and the detail control is performed using the line buffer 98a when generating and outputting an image signal.

  Here, when drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, data is written to all unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800. The number of dots is × 600. On the other hand, the resolution of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is 1024 × 768 dots. That is, the resolution of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is higher than that of the frame regions 82a and 82b.

  When the adjustment value (information for adjustment) of resolution in the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value (information for initial adjustment), drawing data created at a resolution of 800 × 600 corresponds to the liquid crystal display unit 31 a 1024 It is converted into gradation data of × 768 resolution. The state of this conversion will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a).

  The range divided by the solid line in FIG. 77A is the range of the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, and the range divided by the alternate long and short dash line is the range into which the drawing data PD50 transferred is written. When resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data PD50 at a resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, it is converted into gradation data PD51 of a size indicated within the range divided by the two-dot chain line. In this case, the number of pixels of the gradation data PD51 matches the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and all the data constituting the gradation data PD51 are output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. That is, when converting to the resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, gradation data for all dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is created by using all pixels of the drawing data, so the number of pixels of the drawing data can be calculated. The number of pixels of gradation data increases.

  The initial adjustment value is set based on execution of the initial setting process (FIG. 10) in the display CPU 72 as described above. Further, the area in the resolution adjustment buffer 97a to which the drawing data PD50 is to be transferred is always constant.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a zoom-in effect of an image is performed using the scaler 97. In this zoom-in effect, the adjustment value of the resolution in the scaler 97 is set to the adjustment value for enlargement. A plurality of enlargement adjustment values are set such that the corresponding resolutions are different from one another, and each resolution is higher than the resolution of the initial adjustment value. The manner in which the drawing data is converted into gradation data of a resolution corresponding to the predetermined enlargement adjustment value will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b).

  When resolution adjustment is performed at a resolution corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value with respect to the drawing data PD 52 indicated by an alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 77 (b), gradation data of a size indicated within a range divided by an alternate long and short dash line It is converted to PD53. In this case, since the number of pixels of the gradation data PD53 is larger than the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, it is not possible to output all data constituting the gradation data PD53 to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal.

  On the other hand, the display CPU 72 designates a range to be output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal among the gradation data PD53. In this specification, the address of the dot serving as the drawing reference point is specified in the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, but the specification method is arbitrary as long as the specification can be satisfactorily performed.

  In the display circuit 94, by designating the drawing reference point, data of the range indicated by the broken line in FIG. 77 (b) in the gradation data PD53 is output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. In this case, since the image signal is output using a part of pixels of the drawing data, the image display on the symbol display device 31 in a state where a part of the image substantially corresponding to the drawing data is enlarged. Is done.

  Although the drawing reference point corresponds to any of the dots at the four corners in the range to which the image signal is to be output, it is arbitrary which dot is to be targeted. The information capacity of the resolution adjustment buffer 97a is set to an information capacity capable of storing all pixels of the gradation data even if conversion from drawing data to gradation data is performed using any enlargement adjustment value. It is done.

  A specific processing configuration for performing an image zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 will be described.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the zoom-in effect executed by the display CPU 72. Note that although the calculation process for the zoom-in effect is shared and executed in each calculation process of steps S2315 to S2317 in the task process (FIG. 46), for convenience of explanation, it is shown as a single flow chart here.

  First, in step S4301, background image data is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S4302, the parameter of the background image data thus grasped is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data for the background in the work RAM 73. Update control information.

  In the following step S4303, the effect image data is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S4304, the parameter of the grasped effect image data is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to the effect image data. Update control information.

  In the following step S4305, it is determined based on the data table currently set, whether or not it is a timing to be expanded relative to the initial adjustment value of the scaler 97. If it is not the timing to enlarge, in step S4306, the image data for a symbol (that is, symbol sprite data) is grasped based on the data table currently set. In the following step S4307, the parameters of the figure image data for the symbol are calculated and derived based on that the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value, and the information of the derived parameters is calculated in the work RAM 73 The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the image data for symbols. Thereafter, the arithmetic processing ends.

  When the calculation processing for the zoom-in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), a drawing for drawing an image corresponding to the scaler 97 being set to the initial adjustment value. A list is created and sent to VDP 76.

  On the other hand, if it is the timing at which the enlargement is made relative to the initial adjustment value of the scaler 97, information on the adjustment value for enlargement is grasped in step S4308. Information on the adjustment values for enlargement is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 and transferred to the work RAM 73 by the timing required by the display CPU 72. In the data table, information on one of the enlargement adjustment values is set, and in step S4308, information on the enlargement adjustment value indicated in the currently set data table is grasped.

  In the following step S4309, the information of the current drawing reference point is grasped. The information of the drawing reference point is set in one-to-one correspondence with the information of the enlargement adjustment value. Further, information of each drawing reference point is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102, and is transferred to the work RAM 73 by the timing required by the display CPU 72. In the data table, information on one of the drawing reference points is set, and in step S4309, the information on the drawing reference point indicated in the currently set data table is grasped. In the following step S4310, zoom-in designation information is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S4311, the image data for symbols is grasped based on the data table currently set. In the following step S4312, the parameters of the grasped symbol image data are calculated and derived based on the fact that the scaler 97 is set to the enlargement adjustment value this time, and the information of the derived parameters is stored in the work RAM 73. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the image data for the symbol in the above. In this case, the coordinates and the size of the image data for the symbol are calculated so that the display position of the symbol on the display screen G and the size of the symbol are not changed at the pre-execution timing and the execution timing of the zoom-in effect.

  Specifically, when the resolution of the image data of the same size is adjusted by the scaler 97, the size of the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is larger than the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the size information of the image data for the design designated in the drawing list is the initial adjustment value so that the size after the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is the same as the size after the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. It is specified smaller than in the case of.

  When the resolution of the image data is adjusted by the scaler 97, the position of the image in the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is displaced in the direction in which the image is enlarged as compared with the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the coordinate information of the image data for the design designated in the drawing list is the initial adjustment value so that the position after resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is the same as the position after resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. The case of displacing in the direction opposite to the expanding direction is designated.

  After the process of step S4312 is performed, the present arithmetic process ends. When the calculation processing for the zoom-in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the image corresponding to the setting of the scaler 97 to any of the enlargement adjustment values is drawn A drawing list for creating the image is created and sent to the VDP 76. In this case, the drawing list includes information on the enlargement adjustment value, information on the drawing reference point, and zoom-in designation information indicating that the zoom-in effect should be performed. Further, for the image data for symbols, information of parameters corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value designated at the same time is set.

  Incidentally, as described above, the number of image data for which the adjustment for enlargement is performed on the information of the parameter is equal to or less than the number of image data for which the adjustment for enlargement is not performed.

  Next, the setting process for the zoom-in effect performed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The setting process for the zoom-in effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the zoom-in designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the zoom-in effect is performed. Here, in the drawing list, since the zoom-in designation information is set in association with the image data for the symbol, the setting process for the zoom-in effect is the drawing order of the image data for the symbol in the current drawing list. Will be launched if

  In the drawing order in the drawing list, since the image data for background and the image data for effect are set as the order before the image data for symbol, the setting process for the zoom-in effect is executed. At the timing, drawing of the image data for background and the image data for effect is completed.

  First, in step S4401, information on the enlargement adjustment value designated in the drawing list is set by writing in the dedicated area of the register 92 (see FIG. 41). Here, the dedicated area is set as an area different from the area where the information of the initial adjustment value is written. Therefore, even if the information of the enlargement adjustment value is set, the information of the initial adjustment value is not erased.

  In the subsequent step S4402, information on the drawing reference point designated in the drawing list is set by writing the information in the dedicated area of the register 92. Here, in the case where resolution adjustment is performed with the initial adjustment value, the drawing reference point corresponding to the initial adjustment value is determined in advance by the display circuit 94 because it is sufficient to always use a constant drawing reference point.

  In the following step S4403, the enlargement flag is set in a predetermined area set in the register 92. When the image signal is output in the display circuit 94 by setting the enlargement flag, resolution adjustment is performed with the enlargement adjustment value set in step S4401, and set in step S4402. A range to be an output target of the image signal is defined with reference to the drawing reference point. Note that the enlargement flag is deleted based on an instruction from the display CPU 72 when ending the zoom-in effect.

  In the subsequent step S4404, the image data for the symbol designated as the current drawing object and the address to which the image data for the symbol is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Also, in step S4405, the parameters of the image data for symbols are grasped. Thereafter, this setting process is ended.

  By executing the setting process for the zoom-in effect as described above, the drawing data created on the basis of the drawing list designated this time undergoes resolution adjustment with the corresponding enlargement adjustment value, and is converted to gradation data. The data is converted, and further, data in a predetermined range is output as an image signal with reference to the drawing reference point.

  An output process performed by the display circuit 94 to output an image signal will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The output process is activated when an instruction to output an image signal is issued from the display CPU 72, and is activated each time the image update start timing (eg, 20 msec) is reached.

  First, in step S4501, it is determined whether the enlargement flag is set in the register 92 or not. If the enlargement flag is not set, linear interpolation processing corresponding to the initial adjustment value is executed in step S4502. In this case, the information of the initial adjustment value is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the linear interpolation process is executed according to the initial adjustment value. In the linear interpolation process, in order to interpolate an increase in the number of pixels due to the increase in resolution, the numerical information (or pixel value) of each pixel after enlargement is linearized from the numerical information set in the four pixels before enlargement. Perform bilinear interpolation found by interpolation. The bilinear interpolation is not performed collectively for all pixels, but sequentially performed for each predetermined number of pixels.

  In the following step S4503, it is determined whether or not conversion to gradation data is completed. If it is not completed, the process returns to step S4502. If completed, in step S4504, the dot to be output is grasped based on a predetermined initial reference point.

  Thereafter, in step S4505, the image signal output process is performed, and the output process ends. In the image signal output process, image signals for the dots grasped in step S4504 are sequentially output.

  On the other hand, if the enlargement flag is set (step S4501: YES), in step S4506, linear interpolation processing corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value currently designated is executed. In this case, the information on the enlargement adjustment value is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the linear interpolation process is executed according to the enlargement adjustment value. The contents of the linear interpolation process are as described above.

  In the following step S4507, it is determined whether or not conversion to gradation data is completed. If it is not completed, the process returns to step S4506. If completed, in step S4508, the drawing reference point designated this time is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the dot to be output is grasped based on the grasped drawing reference point.

  Thereafter, in step S4505, the image signal output process is performed, and the output process ends. In the image signal output process, image signals for the dots grasped in step S4508 are sequentially output.

  Next, the state of the zoom-in effect will be described. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation of the zoom-in effect. Further, FIG. 81 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining an image at the image update timing immediately before the zoom-in effect is performed, and FIG. 81 (b) is an image update timing next to the image update timing and zooms in. It is an explanatory view for explaining an image of timing when an effect is started.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), just before the zoom-in effect is performed, the character CH6 is displayed in front of the background image PC15 and near the center thereof, and the symbols CH7 and CH8 are displayed on the upper left and upper right. ing. The image is a reach display with the symbols CH7 and CH8, and the character CH6 is displayed as an effect of the reach display. Note that, when the image is displayed, each image data is drawn in the same size and position as in FIG. 81A in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the output target.

  At the next image update timing in the above state, the zoom-in effect is started. In this case, in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be output, the respective image data are drawn with relative sizes and relative positions as shown in FIG. 81 (b-1). As shown in FIG. 81 (b-2), resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data with the enlargement adjustment value, and an image signal is output based on the area grasped based on the drawing reference point. Images are displayed.

  In the image, the background image PC15 and the character CH6 are enlarged so as to zoom in on the character CH6 as compared with the image of FIG. 81 (a). On the other hand, the positions and sizes of the symbols CH7 and CH8 are the same as, substantially the same as, or similar to the positions and sizes in the case of FIG. 81 (a).

  Incidentally, when the comparison is made with the same line of the character CH6, the line is displayed with gradation (and color) as shown in FIG. 81 (c-1) in the state of FIG. 81 (a). In the state b-2), lines are displayed with gradations (and colors) as shown in FIG. 81 (c-2).

  Further, after displaying the image shown in FIG. 81 (b-2), the image shown in FIG. 81 (a) is displayed, and the VDP 76 has only returned to the resolution adjustment by the initial adjustment value. As a display of, it is in a state of being zoomed out. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, not only the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 but also the zoom-out effect using the scaler 97 can be performed. Furthermore, as described above, since a plurality of combinations of the enlargement adjustment value and the drawing reference point are set, the above-described zoom-in effect and the above-described zoom-out effect can be performed in stages.

  As described above, the zoom-in effect can be performed using the scaler 97, and the zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. For example, when drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b, drawing in a state in which each image data is enlarged can similarly perform a zoom-in effect, but in this case, all the image data to be drawn in the VDP 76 are enlarged. The processing needs to be performed, and the processing load of the VDP 76 increases. Also, for example, a configuration in which image data for normal size and image data for enlargement size are set in advance for the same image is conceivable, but in this case, it is necessary to store the image data. This leads to an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, the processing for displaying the image in an enlarged scale is performed not by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 but by the display circuit 94. Therefore, it is possible to perform the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the influence on the storage capacity required to store the image data.

  Further, regardless of whether or not a zoom-in effect is performed, the sizes of the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b are the same. As a result, drawing data can be created in the frame areas 82a and 82b with the same processing configuration regardless of whether or not a zoom-in effect is performed.

  Further, in the display circuit 94, when the zoom-in effect is not performed, the resolution adjustment is performed with the designated initial adjustment value, and the range to be the output target of the image signal based on the predetermined initial reference point is grasped. In the case where the zoom-in effect is performed, the reference adjustment value and the reference point are only changed. Therefore, the zoom-in effect can be performed while utilizing the hardware configuration of the display circuit 94 when the zoom-in effect is not performed.

  In addition, even if a zoom-in effect is performed, the symbol is not displayed enlarged. Thereby, it is prevented that the visibility of a symbol falls in the case of a zoom-in effect. In particular, a parameter of image data for symbols is designated as a parameter not to be enlarged and displayed in display CPU 72, and VDP 76 only needs to draw image data for symbols according to the parameters, so the influence on processing load of VDP 76 is suppressed. The visibility of the design can be improved.

  Further, when the zoom-in effect is finished, the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is returned to the initial adjustment value. Thereby, when the zoom-in effect is finished, the display of the image according to the resolution of the display screen G can be resumed.

  The display circuit 94 may be configured to execute a process corresponding to the output process (FIG. 80) only by the operation of the hardware circuit without using a program. Further, the display circuit 94 may not be built in the VDP 76, but may be provided separately from the VDP 76. In this case, the display circuit 94 may be provided on the signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and a signal path is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path. A display circuit 94 may be provided thereon.

  Alternatively, the initial adjustment value and the enlargement adjustment value may be written to the same area in the register 92. In this case, after the zoom-in effect, it is preferable to execute processing for restoring the information of the area to the initial adjustment value. The processing may be configured to be performed based on designation from the display CPU 72, or may be configured to be uniquely performed by the VDP 76.

  Further, the initial reference point may be set in the same register 92 when setting the initial adjustment value in the register 92. In this case, the area in which the initial reference point is set and the area in which the drawing reference point is set may be set separately, or the information may be set in the same area. In the case where the same area is set, it is preferable to execute processing to restore the information of the area to the initial reference point after the zoom-in effect. The processing may be configured to be performed based on designation from the display CPU 72, or may be configured to be uniquely performed by the VDP 76.

  Further, the image data for which adjustment for enlargement is performed on the information of the parameter is not limited to the image data for design, and may be image data for a predetermined effect or image data for a background . In this case, for example, the adjustment for enlargement may be performed so that at least the entire character for effect that is not the enlargement target is displayed, or the adjustment for enlargement is performed so that at least the position does not change. It is good also as composition.

  In addition to the scaler 97, a circuit may be provided to adjust the size of drawing data in order to perform a zoom-in effect or a zoom-out effect.

  When the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is an initial adjustment value, only a part of the drawing data may be output as an image signal. In this case, when the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is set to the adjustment value for reduction, the range from which the image signal is output in the drawing data is expanded, so that zooming from the state displayed by the initial adjustment value is performed. It becomes possible to perform out production.

<Direction using moving image data>
Next, effects using moving image data will be described.

  The moving image data is image data which has been compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to still image data of one frame, and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 system. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data of a plurality of frames.

  Moving image data set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c), moving image data PD54 for before branching, moving image data PD55 for after A, and moving image data PD56 for after B as moving image data. , Is set. The moving image data PD54 to PD56 are set to perform super reach display which is developed after normal reach display or without normal reach display among reach displays.

  In each of these moving image data PD54 to PD56, file data is set at the first address, and compressed data of each frame is set subsequently. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame.

  The compressed data is I frame data for one frame corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the first difference data, and B picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the second difference data And.

  The I picture data is data that can generate still image data of one frame by the data alone at the time of decoding. P picture data is data that can generate still image data of one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data of one or more frames prior to decoding. . B picture data is bi-directionally predicted by referring to I picture data or P picture data of one frame or plural frames before and I picture data or P picture data of one frame or plural frames after decoding. , One frame worth of still image data can be created.

  In the compressed data of each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, I picture data is set as data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M−1 frame. In addition, P picture data is set as data of the mth frame. Also, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) -th frame,..., N-1 frame. In addition, P picture data is set as data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  The contents of the images set in the moving image data PD 54 to PD 56 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 (a) shows the contents of a part of the image set in moving image data PD 54 for before branching, and FIG. 83 (b) is set in moving image data PD 55 for after A FIG. 83 (c) shows the contents of a part of the image set in the post-branching B moving image data PD56.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a-1), the moving image data PD 54 for pre-branching is superimposed on the background image PC 16 for pre-branching, which shows a state of waves, so that the movement target character is a boy character. Reference data (I picture data) PD 57 corresponding to the image to which CH 9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 83 (a-2) and (a-3), difference data (P picture corresponding to an image in which the movement target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction but does not have the background image PC16 Data, B picture data) PD 58 and PD 59 are set. The still image data for one frame is created by the reference data PD57 and the difference data PD58 and PD59 are applied to the reference data PD57, whereby each difference data PD58 and background image PC16 set in the reference data PD57 is obtained. Still image data of one frame to which the movement target character CH9 set in the PD 59 is added is created.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b-1), the moving image data PD 55 for post-branch A is superimposed on the post-branch A background image PC 17 in which a large number of jellyfish are shown, and the same boy character is used. Reference data (I picture data) PD60 corresponding to an image to which a certain movement target character CH9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 83 (b-2) and (b-3), difference data (P picture corresponding to an image in which the movement target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction but does not have the background image PC17 Data, B picture data) PD 61 and PD 62 are set. While still image data for one frame is created by the reference data PD60, the difference data PD61 and PD62 are applied to the reference data PD60, whereby each difference data PD61 is set for the background image PC17 set in the reference data PD60. , And still image data of one frame to which the movement target character CH9 set in the PD 62 is added.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c-1), the moving image data PD56 for post-branch B is superimposed on the background image PC18 for post-branch B in which a large number of fish are shown, and the same boy character is used. Reference data (I picture data) PD63 corresponding to an image to which a certain movement target character CH9 is added is set. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 83 (c-2) and (c-3), although there is no background image PC 18, the difference data (P picture corresponding to an image in which the movement target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction) Data, B picture data) PD64 and PD65 are set. While still image data for one frame is created by the reference data PD63, the difference data PD64 and PD65 are applied to the reference data PD63, whereby each difference data PD64 for the background image PC18 set in the reference data PD63 , And still image data of one frame to which the movement target character CH9 set in the PD 65 is added.

  Super reach display corresponding to the effect branch is executed using the moving image data PD54 to PD56. Specifically, when the super reach display is started, the pre-branch effect is executed by each still image data created from the pre-branch moving image data PD 54.

  Thereafter, at the branch timing, either one of the post-branch A effect or the post-branch B effect is selected. In this selection, when the operation device for effect 48 is operated at the determination timing prior to the branch timing, the effect after branch A is selected, and the operation device for effect 48 is not operated at the timing for determination. After branching to, the effect for B is selected. When the post-branch A effect is selected, the post-branch A effect is executed by each still image data created from the post-branch A moving image data PD 55. On the other hand, when the post-branch B effect is selected, the post-branch B effect is executed by each still image data created from the post-branch B moving image data PD 56.

  In addition, the specific trigger which selects either of the production for A after branch or the production for B after branch is not limited to said thing, The operating device 48 for effects is a specific operation mode in the timing for the said determination. When operated, when the operation device for effect 48 is operated for a specific number of times or for a specific period at the determination timing, or it is predetermined from when the current super reach display is started to when the branch timing comes. When one or a plurality of game balls are placed in the ball entry portion, one of the effects may be selected.

  A specific processing configuration for performing super reach display using the moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described.

  FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing operation processing for a moving image executed by the display CPU 72. Arithmetic processing for moving images is executed in the arithmetic processing for background in step S2315 in task processing (FIG. 46). Note that the operation processing for the moving image is activated when the data table corresponding to the game times for which the super reach display is performed is set.

  First, in step S4601, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is after the branch timing. If it is the timing before the branch, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the effect before the branch is being executed based on the currently set data table.

  If the pre-branch effect is not being executed, it means that the timing is before the start timing of the super reach display, and therefore the process proceeds to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is a timing to decode moving image data PD 54 for before branching.

  If it is time to decode the pre-branch moving image data PD 54, in step S4604, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table. Specifically, in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the address to which the moving image data PD 54 for pre-branching has been transferred in advance and the moving image data PD 54 for the pre-branch to decode still image data for a plurality of frames. When it is created, the address of the area for storing the still image data in the change area 81b is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S4605, pre-branch decoding specification information is stored. Incidentally, the timing determined in step S4603 is set so that the decoding of moving image data PD54 for before branching is completed before the effect before branching is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4603, or after execution of step S4605, arithmetic processing corresponding to the timing before the pre-branch effect is generated is performed in step S4606. Specifically, based on the currently set data table, while grasping the image data for background, various parameters of the image data are calculated and the information for control is updated. Thereafter, the arithmetic processing ends.

  When the operation processing for a moving image is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the image data for background in the image corresponding to the timing before the pre-branch effect is generated is a drawing target Is created and sent to the VDP 76. In addition, when it is time to decode the moving image data PD54 for before branching by the present arithmetic processing, the above-mentioned decoding specification information indicating that the decoding should be performed, and the moving image data PD54 for before branching Information on various addresses is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S4602 that an effect before branching is being executed, the process proceeds to step S4607. In step S4607, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is time to decode moving image data PD55 and PD56 for use after branching.

  If it is time to decode the post-branching moving image data PD55 and PD56, it is determined in step S4608 whether or not the decoding target is the post-branching A moving image data PD55. Specifically, a key is set in the data table to determine whether the operation device for effect 48 has been operated at the determination timing prior to the branch timing, and the key is confirmed. It is determined whether a flag indicating that the operation device for effect 48 has been operated is set in the work RAM 73. Incidentally, the flag is set in the command corresponding process of step S403 when the reception of the operation generation command is confirmed in step S402 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72. In step S4608, an affirmative determination is made if a flag indicating that the effect operating device 48 has been operated is set, and a negative determination is made if the flag is not set.

  If the decoding target is moving image data PD 55 for post-branch A (step S4608: YES), various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table in step S4609. Specifically, in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the address to which moving image data PD55 for after branch A has been transferred in advance and the moving image data PD55 for after branch A concerned are decoded to a plurality of frames of still images When the data is created, the expansion buffer 81 grasps the address of the area for storing the still image data. Thereafter, in step S4610, the post-branch A decode specification information is stored.

  On the other hand, if the decoding target is moving image data PD 56 for post-branch B (step S4608: NO), in step S4611, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table. Specifically, an address to which moving image data PD56 for post-branch B has been transferred in advance in the expansion buffer 81 of VRAM 75, and moving image data PD56 for post-branch B are decoded to obtain still images of a plurality of frames. When the data is created, the expansion buffer 81 grasps the address of the area for storing the still image data. Thereafter, in step S4612, the decode specification information for post-branch A is stored.

  Incidentally, the timing determined in step S4607 is set such that decoding of the post-branch moving image data PD55 and PD56 to be targeted is completed before any post-branch effect is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4607 or after execution of step S4610 or step S4612, the process proceeds to step S4613. In step S4613, among still image data created from moving image data for before branching, an address at which still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. The grasp of the address is performed based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S4614, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information for the derived parameter is updated in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to the still image data, and the control information is updated. Do. Thereafter, in step S4615, moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used is stored, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

  When the operation processing for moving images is performed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), still image data created from moving image data for before branching is included as a drawing target, and A drawing list in which parameters of still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. In addition, when it is the timing to decode and specify moving image data PD55 for post-branch A in the current arithmetic processing, the decoding specification information indicating that the decoding should be performed and moving image data PD55 for post-branch A Information on the various addresses is set in the drawing list. On the other hand, when it is the timing to decode and specify moving image data PD56 for post-branch B in the present arithmetic processing, the decoding specification information indicating that the decoding should be performed and moving image data PD56 for post-branch B Information on the various addresses is set in the drawing list.

  In addition, since the background image and the image for presentation are mixed in the said still image data, it is not necessary to set the image for presentation separately from the said still image data. Therefore, when the still image data is set as a drawing target, the effect calculation process of step S2316 is skipped. However, since the symbol is displayed separately from the still image data, symbol operation processing is not skipped. The same applies to the case where still image data is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S4601 that it is after the branch timing, the process proceeds to step S4616. In step S4616, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether the effect to be executed is the effect for after-branch A. By the way, when the affirmation determination is made in step S4608, data corresponding to the effect for after-branch A is set as data to be referred to after branching in the data table, and when the negative determination is made in the data table As data to be referred to after branching, data corresponding to the effect for after branching B is set.

  If the effect to be executed is the effect for after-branch A, the process proceeds to step S4617. In step S4617, among the still image data created from the post-branch A moving image data, the address at which the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. The grasp of the address is performed based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S4618, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information for the derived parameter is updated in the work RAM 73 to the area secured corresponding to the still image data, and the control information is updated. Do. Thereafter, in step S4619, moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing ends.

  When the operation processing for moving images is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), still image data created from moving image data for A after branching is included as a drawing target, and A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  If the effect to be executed is the effect for after-branch B, the process proceeds to step S4620. In step S4620, of the still image data created from the post-branching B moving image data, the address at which the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. The grasp of the address is performed based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4621, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information for the derived parameter is updated in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to the still image data and the control information is updated. Do. Thereafter, in step S4622, after storing moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used, the present arithmetic processing ends.

  When the operation processing for moving images is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), still image data created from the moving image data for B after branching is included as a drawing target, and A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the decoding process performed by the moving picture decoder 93 of the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The decoding process is activated when any of the decoding specification information is set in the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72. The decoding process is activated asynchronously with the drawing process (FIG. 44) executed by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 and the output process (FIG. 80) executed by the display circuit 94.

  First, in step S4701, the address of moving image data specified this time is grasped from the information of the transfer destination address specified in the drawing list. In the following step S4702, the area to which the moving image data is to be expanded is grasped from the information on the expansion destination address specified in the drawing list.

  In the following step S4703, the moving image data is read out from the address grasped in step S4701, and the moving image data is decoded. Then, each still image data of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S4702. Thereafter, the present decoding process is ended.

  Next, setting processing for a moving image performed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The setting process for moving images is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when moving image designation information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for the moving image is executed. Here, in the drawing list, the moving image designation information is set in association with the still image data to be drawn, so the setting process for the moving image is the drawing order of still image data in the current drawing list. It is started when it becomes.

  In the drawing order in the drawing list, the still image data is set as the order prior to the image data for symbols, so after the setting process for the moving image is executed and the still image data is drawn , The drawing of the symbol is done.

  First, in step S4801, information on an address at which still image data to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In the following step S4802, still image data to be drawn at this time is grasped from the information of the address grasped in step S4801. In the following step S4803, the parameters of the still image data are grasped from the information set in the drawing list. Thereafter, this setting process is ended.

  By executing the setting process for moving images as described above, still image data in a state where the parameters are applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the subsequent writing process (step S2205). Is drawn. Further, since the image data for symbols is also set in the current drawing list, the image data for symbols is drawn so that the symbol is displayed in front of the still image corresponding to the still image data. . Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, whereby an image of one frame constituting the super reach display is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, since a series of images corresponding to super reach display are displayed using the moving image data PD54 to PD56, images for each frame of the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are individually set as still image data. Compared with the configuration to store, the effect of the above-mentioned super reach display is performed using a photographed image and a high definition image while suppressing the storage capacity required to store the image data in the NAND flash memory 102 be able to.

  Further, in the super reach display, the effect before the branch is performed until the branch timing, and after the branch timing, the content of the effect of the advance destination is switched according to the operation mode to the operation device 48 for effect. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the super reach display becomes uniform, and various effects can be provided.

  In this case, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 includes moving image data PD54 for before branching corresponding to the effect before branching, moving image data PD55 for after A corresponding to the effect for A after branching, and B after branching Are set separately from the post-branch B moving image data PD 56 corresponding to the for-effect. Therefore, until the branch timing, branch is made only by sequentially drawing each still image data created by decoding the moving image data PD 54 for before branching in the frame order set in the moving image data PD 54. It is possible to perform the pre-representation. Further, after the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target of the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both after branching is set by the moving image data PD55 and PD56. It is possible to perform the target post-branching effect only by sequentially drawing in the order of the frames being displayed.

  When still image data for a plurality of frames is generated by decoding from moving image data, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data. It is difficult to cope with the above branch in moving image data. Also, prepare in advance both single moving image data in which pre-branch effects and post-branch effects are set, and single moving image data in which pre-branch effects and post-branch effects are set. It is also conceivable to have a configuration. However, since it is necessary to output moving image data from still image data corresponding to the first order frame, it is difficult to output the still image data from the middle order frame. Then, when the super reach display is started, it is necessary to decode both of the moving image data. In this case, there is a concern that the processing load of the VDP 76 may increase, and the storage capacity of the VRAM 75 also needs to be increased. By distinguishing and preparing the moving image data PD54 to PD56 as described above in comparison with each configuration assumed, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used are switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Therefore, the super reach display as described above can be suitably performed.

  In addition, when the super reach display is started, the moving image data PD54 for before branching is decoded, and the moving image data PD55 for after A and the moving image data PD56 for after B are branched. Do not decode. As a result, compared to the configuration in which all moving image data PD54 to PD56 are decoded collectively, the processing load upon starting super reach display can be reduced.

  In addition, it is determined in the middle of the execution of the effect before branch and before the branch timing that the judgment as to which of the effect for after branch A and the effect for after branch B is to be distributed is performed before the branch timing. Of the moving image data PD55 for A and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching, decoding is performed only for moving image data corresponding to the effect of the distribution destination. This makes it possible to smoothly start the new video display after the completion of the effect before branching. Further, compared to a configuration in which both moving image data for branching are decoded, the processing load for decoding is suppressed, and the storage capacity required for decoding in the VRAM 75 can be reduced.

  Even if the configuration in which the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are distinguished and stored as described above is applied to an effect different from the effect for which the effect at the destination is arbitrarily selected according to the situation up to the branch timing. Good. For example, in the configuration in which the first effect (first reach display) and the second effect (second reach display) are set, which are common from the start timing to the middle and different in the aspect from the middle. It may be configured to have first moving image data for displaying an image from the start to the middle, and second moving image data and third moving image data corresponding to an aspect from the middle. In this case, since the first moving image data can be used in common, the entire data volume can be suppressed as compared with a configuration in which the moving image data for the entire effect is individually provided for each effect.

  Further, for example, when only normal reach display is performed as the display effect, the first super reach display is performed after normal reach display is performed, and the second super reach display is performed after normal reach display is performed. In the configuration where the case is set, moving image data for normal reach display, moving image data for first super reach display, and moving image data for second super reach display are set. It is good also as composition. In this case, in the game session where normal reach display is performed, still image data created from moving image data for normal reach display may be sequentially displayed. In addition, in the game session where the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the moving image data for the normal reach display is sequentially displayed, and then the first moving image for the super reach display is displayed. Still image data created from the data may be sequentially displayed. In addition, in the game session where the second super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the moving image data for the normal reach display is sequentially displayed, and then the moving image for the second super reach display Still image data created from the data may be sequentially displayed.

  According to this configuration, the moving image data for normal reach display may be used in common in each of the game times for performing the first super reach display and the game times for performing the second super reach display. Compared with a configuration in which the content of the normal reach display is included in each of the moving image data of the super reach display and the moving image data of the second super reach display, the entire data capacity can be suppressed.

  In addition, the mode after the effect before branching or after the common effect is not limited to two patterns, and may be three patterns, four patterns, or five patterns or more. In this case, as described above, the effects of individually providing the moving image data PD54 to PD56 can be further enhanced.

  Further, the moving picture decoder 93 may be configured to execute the processing corresponding to the decoding processing (FIG. 85A) only by the operation of the hardware circuit without using the program. Also, the video decoder 93 may not be built in the VDP 76, but may be provided separately from the VDP 76. In this case, the video decoder 93 may be provided on the signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and a signal path is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path. A video decoder 93 may be provided on the top.

  In addition, in a configuration in which the timing for determination of effect after branching is the same as or near timing to the branch timing, moving image data PD55 for after branch A and B for after branch during the period before the effect before branch is being executed. Decoding may be performed on both of the moving image data PD 56.

  In addition, the configuration using a plurality of types of moving image data as described above may be applied not to reach effect but to jackpot effect or advance notice effect before reaching.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The NAND flash memory 102 provided in the display control device 70 has a data transfer rate slower than that of the NOR flash memory due to its specification. On the other hand, supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started because the boot data for initial boot is stored in advance in the boot memory 119 which is faster than the NAND flash memory 102 in reading speed. In the case where the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display CPU 72 can promptly start the process for the initial activation. Therefore, compared with the configuration in which program data for initial startup is stored in the NAND flash memory 102, control in the display CPU 72 can be smoothly started.

  The ROM 53 of the main control unit 50 uses a random-access memory such as a NOR flash memory, and the memory module 74 of the display control unit 70 uses the NAND flash memory 102 to control the upstream side. With regard to a certain main controller 50, while simplifying the configuration related to reading of control program data, the display control device 70 which is the control means on the downstream side is configured to emphasize a large capacity of data that can be stored in advance. Can.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47, the display CPU 72 is not included in the display target on the display screen G in the predetermined frame, but may be included in the display target on the display screen G in the subsequent frame. A control start process for parameter derivation is performed in advance on image data corresponding to an individual image having a property. As a result, control start timings can be dispersed so that a large number of individual images to be controlled start does not exist in one processing operation, and generation of processing omission can be prevented.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51, scroll background data including data for a plurality of frames is stored in advance as a plurality of divided parts data, and thus, as single image data in the NAND flash memory 102. There is no need to set the storable size too large. In addition, when it is attempted to transfer the background data for scrolling as a single image data, the transfer time will be extended, but since it can be transferred in divided parts data units, the timing adjustment of data transfer is It will be easy.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53, when displaying an animation for displacing the small unit group, a plurality of small unit images are collectively set instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite. It is configured to control so as to sequentially switch the received still images. Thereby, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while suppressing the processing load in the display CPU 72.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57, when the effect data PD 17 is set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the addition process is performed. Thereby, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is displayed in a state in which the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, the background image) on which the effect image CH2 is to be superimposed are reflected. The effect image CH2 is an image that transmits the rear side such as light or water splash, so that it causes a sense of discomfort if it is displayed regardless of the background image. On the other hand, execution of the addition processing causes the effect image CH2 to be displayed in a state in which the background image is reflected, which is preferable in appearance without causing the above-mentioned sense of incongruity.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60, in the unit area in which the effect data PD 18 is drawn, the numerical information already stored therein is reduced in proportion to the value of the α value of the partial addition data PD 19 The numerical value information as a result of adding the numerical value information of the effect data PD 18 to the numerical value information after being set is set. As a result, after the effect data PD 18 is drawn, it is possible to suppress that each numerical value information of RGB in the unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b becomes the maximum value, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of whiteout.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, composite data for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effect images is created, and the composite data is used for subsequent use. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 as compared with a configuration in which a plurality of effect data are drawn each time a plurality of effect effects are to be executed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68, partial display of an individual image such as a symbol or a character is performed using the α data and the α pallet data. Thus, partial display of individual images can be performed in a configuration in which the VDP 76 can not partially handle image data. In addition, these α data and α pallet data have a smaller data capacity than image data. Therefore, while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity required to store the image data, as compared with the configuration in which the image data for the entire display and the image data for the partial display are individually prepared for the individual image of the partial display target , Partial display of individual images can be performed.

  As described with reference to FIG. 69 to FIG. 73, switching of the background image is gradually performed over a plurality of frames while performing wipe switching effect, thereby making the switching mode of the background image innovative. While being able to do, it also becomes possible to diversify the switching aspect of a background image. In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 constituting the image of the front side display timing are linked, and the alpha data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect are combined with the linked image data. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which α data for wipe switching effect is individually synthesized for each of the image data PD 39 to PD 42.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76, as the image data for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, first sprite data having a relation mutually shifted by a half dot in the movement direction of the sprite CH5. The PD 48 and the second sprite data PD 49 are stored. Then, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are used alternately. As a result, it becomes possible to display the sprite CH 5 for smooth movement as if it is progressing by a half dot on the basis of the frame areas 82 a and 82 b or on the basis of the display screen G on a frame basis. The sprite CH5 can be moved and displayed smoothly.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 81, the zoom-in effect can be performed using the scaler 97, and the zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. . For example, when drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b, drawing in a state in which each image data is enlarged can similarly perform a zoom-in effect, but in this case, all the image data to be drawn in the VDP 76 are enlarged. The processing needs to be performed, and the processing load of the VDP 76 increases. Also, for example, a configuration in which image data for normal size and image data for enlargement size are set in advance for the same image is conceivable, but in this case, it is necessary to store the image data. This leads to an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, the processing for displaying the image in an enlarged scale is performed not by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 but by the display circuit 94. Therefore, it is possible to perform the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the influence on the storage capacity required to store the image data.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85, the moving image data PD 54 to PD 56 are for moving image data PD 54 for before branching corresponding to the effect before branching, and for after A for branching corresponding to the effect for after A The moving image data PD 55 and the after-branching B moving image data PD 56 corresponding to the after-branch B effect are set separately. Therefore, until the branch timing, branch is made only by sequentially drawing each still image data created by decoding the moving image data PD 54 for before branching in the frame order set in the moving image data PD 54. It is possible to perform the pre-representation. Further, after the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target of the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both after branching is set by the moving image data PD55 and PD56. It is possible to perform the target post-branching effect only by sequentially drawing in the order of the frames being displayed.

  When still image data for a plurality of frames is generated by decoding from moving image data, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data. It is difficult to cope with the above branch in moving image data. Also, prepare in advance both single moving image data in which pre-branch effects and post-branch effects are set, and single moving image data in which pre-branch effects and post-branch effects are set. It is also conceivable to have a configuration. However, since it is necessary to output moving image data from still image data corresponding to the first order frame, it is difficult to output the still image data from the middle order frame. Then, when the super reach display is started, it is necessary to decode both of the moving image data. In this case, there is a concern that the processing load of the VDP 76 may increase, and the storage capacity of the VRAM 75 also needs to be increased. By distinguishing and preparing the moving image data PD54 to PD56 as described above in comparison with each configuration assumed, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used are switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Therefore, the super reach display as described above can be suitably performed.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the display control device 190 is different from those of the above-described embodiments. FIG. 86 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display control device 190. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the display control board 191 of the display control device 190 is provided with a first display CPU 193 and a second display CPU 194 as control means for creating a drawing list and transmitting it to the VDP 192. Further, in order to control the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194, a management CPU 195 is provided.

  The management CPU 195 determines the contents of the effect based on the instruction from the voice emission control device 60 received through the input port 196, and based on the determination result, one frame of each of the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194. Provides information that is the basis for determining the content of the image. Information corresponding to different frames is provided to the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194, and the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194 correspond to an image of one frame based on the received information. Send the drawing list to VDP 192.

  The control program of each of the CPUs 193 to 195 is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory of the memory module 197, and is transferred to the work RAM 198 in advance based on the transfer instruction from the management CPU 195 by the timing required for each of the CPUs 193 to 195. Ru. Each of the CPUs 193 to 195 executes various processes while accessing the work RAM 198. Also, image data is stored in advance in the memory module 197, and the image data is transferred in advance to the expansion buffer 202 of the VRAM 201 based on a transfer instruction from the management CPU 195 by the timing required by the VDP 192. .

  A first drawing unit 203 and a second drawing unit 204 are provided in the VDP 192 in a one-to-one correspondence with the display CPUs 193 and 194, respectively. The drawing list transmitted from the first display CPU 193 is transmitted to the first drawing unit 203, and the drawing list transmitted from the second display CPU 194 is transmitted to the second drawing unit 204. Here, the drawing units 203 and 204 may be for 3D display as in the first embodiment or may be for 2D display as in the second embodiment.

  Each of the drawing units 203 and 204 operates independently, and creates, in the VRAM 201, drawing data of one frame corresponding to the received drawing list. A first frame area 206, a second frame area 207, and a third frame area 208 are provided in the frame buffer 205 of the VRAM 201, and drawing data by each of the drawing units 203 and 204 is stored in one of the frame areas 206-208. It is drawn.

  The drawing units 203 and 204 and the frame regions 206 to 208 are connected through the selector unit 211. The drawing unit 203 sets the drawing target of each of the drawing units 203 and 204 in one of the frame regions 206 to 208. Ru. Not only the drawing units 203 and 204 but also the display circuit 212 are connected to the selector unit 211, and the frame regions 206 to 208 to which the display circuit 212 outputs image signals are also switched by the selector unit 211.

  In the above configuration, each drawing unit 203, 204 creates drawing data in each of the frame areas 206 to 208 using drawing periods for two frames, and when the drawing units 203, 204 compare them, one frame Create drawing data by shifting the time difference of the drawing period of. That is, creation of drawing data is completed every drawing period of one frame. Then, the display circuit 212 outputs an image signal with the frame area that is not the drawing target of the drawing units 203 and 204 as the output target at each update timing. By creating drawing data by the triple buffer method as described above, the image is updated each time one frame is updated while securing a drawing period for two frames as a generation period for drawing data for one frame. It can be done. Therefore, a margin is created in the drawing data creation period compared with the above-described embodiments, and even if a complex image or a large screen image is displayed, the image can be displayed favorably.

  In the above configuration, the first drawing unit 203 alternately generates drawing data for one frame in the first frame area 206 and the second frame area 207 in the drawing period for one frame, and the second drawing unit 204 Alternatively, drawing data for one frame may be created in the third frame area 208 in a drawing period for a plurality of frames. In this case, basically, the drawing data can be created by the double buffer method, and the drawing data corresponding to a particularly complex image can be created over the drawing period of a plurality of frames.

  The number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be two and four or more frame areas may be provided, and the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit is three. In addition, four or more frame regions may be provided, and the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be five and the frame regions may be six or more. . That is, by providing a plurality of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit and providing a number of frame areas equal to or greater than the number obtained by adding 1 to the number of combinations, drawing data for one frame is created using drawing periods for a plurality of frames. be able to.

Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of background calculation processing executed by the display CPU 131 is different from that of the first embodiment. The operation processing for this background will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S4901, the backmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4902, various control parameters of the rearmost image thus grasped are calculated to update control information. In the following step S4903, the background update target object is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4904, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update control information.

  After that, in step S4905, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the current processing cycle is a processing cycle for creating a drawing list corresponding to a frame immediately before the development effect. .

  The development effect is at least one of an effect in which the number of effect characters is increased, an effect in which an action of the effect character is newly added, and an effect in which an effect character with a large processing load is displayed. It is an effect corresponding to Further, in the development rendition, the operation processing for rendering (step S504) in the task processing (FIG. 12) of the display CPU 131 executes an object comprehension processing corresponding to the development rendition and an update processing of information for control thereof. In the rendering process (FIG. 14) of the VDP 135 (step S603), geometry calculation and rendering are performed as already described for the object corresponding to the development effect.

  If it is determined in step S4905 that it is the timing immediately before the development effect, this execution processing ends after storing execution designation information of another storage in step S4906.

  When background arithmetic processing is performed as described above, background image data corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and Execution specification information of separate save is set. The background drawing data creation process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed in the VDP 135 for this drawing list, and background drawing data corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is separately stored. Be done. In this case, in the present embodiment, a separate storage buffer is provided instead of the mode buffer 145 for the VRAM 134, and the background drawing data is separately stored in the separate storage buffer.

  If it is determined in step S4905 in the background calculation processing (FIG. 87) that the timing is not immediately before development effect, in step S4907, development effect is in progress based on the currently set data table. It is determined whether or not. If the development effect is not in progress, the present arithmetic processing ends. In this case, by outputting a drawing list corresponding thereto, the VDP 135 creates drawing data for background as usual using the designated rearmost image and object.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4907 that the development effect is being performed, the use designation information of another storage data is stored in step S4908, and the present arithmetic processing is ended.

  As described above, when the background calculation process is executed, at least use specification information of different storage data is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. By executing the background drawing data creation process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment in the VDP 135 on this drawing list, at least rendering is not performed on the background drawing data. The separately stored background drawing data is diverted as background drawing data under development effects.

  According to the above configuration, rendering of the background drawing data is omitted in a situation where the processing load for displaying the effect character is large. As a result, in the situation where the development effect is performed, the occurrence of the inconvenience that the processing load of the VDP 135 becomes extremely large and the processing drop occurs is suppressed.

  In addition, drawing data for the background, which is stored separately, corresponds to the background image displayed in the frame immediately before the development effect is started. As a result, even if the background image is diverted during the development effect, the player feels uncomfortable.

  When the background image is an image displayed so as to be scrolled in a predetermined direction over a display period for a plurality of frames, scroll display is performed until immediately before the development effect, and during the development effect, scroll display is performed. It will be in the stopped state.

  Further, in the above-described processing configuration, during the development effect, the display CPU 131 may not calculate and update the parameters of the image data for the background, and the VDP 135 may not calculate the geometry. In this case, the processing load can be further reduced.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments alone, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination. In addition, the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment that is not illustrated as an application target of the configuration.

  (1) In order to improve the data reading speed in the display CPUs 72 and 131 and the VDPs 76 and 135, the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 are not used as the memory modules 74 and 133, but NOR The configuration relating to the pre-transfer of data and the configuration relating to the reading of boot data from the boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to a configuration in which a randomly accessible memory such as a flash memory is used.

  (2) When focusing on the effect that the initial setting process can be smoothly performed, the boot memories 119 and 179 are not provided, and boot data is stored in the NAND flash memories 102 and 162, and the initial stage The boot data may be pre-transferred to the work RAMs 73 and 132 before the setting process is started. In this case, it is preferable that the display CPUs 72 and 131 execute wait processing until the transfer of boot data to the work RAMs 73 and 132 is completed. In the case of the above configuration, although the time from the power supply start timing to the display CPUs 72 and 131 to the substantial start timing of the initial setting process is longer than in the above embodiments, it is possible to smoothly advance the initial setting process It becomes possible.

  (3) In each of the above-described embodiments, program data may be stored in advance in another randomly accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162. Further, a part or all of the image data may be stored in advance in another randomly accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162.

  (4) The boot memories 119 and 179 may be provided separately from the memory modules 74 and 133. In this case, the signal paths between the boot memories 119 and 179 and the display CPUs 72 and 131 are the signal paths between the memory modules 74 and 133 and the display CPUs 72 and 131, and the memory modules 74 and 133 and the respective RAMs 73 and 75. , 132 and 134 separately, data transfer from the memory modules 74 and 133 to the work RAMs 73 and 132 and the VRAMs 75 and 134 can be performed using a period during which boot data is read to the display CPUs 72 and 131. It becomes possible.

  (5) The program data of the initial setting process (FIG. 10) may be configured only by boot data without requiring data of the second half. In this case, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity required in the boot memories 119 and 179 more than in the above embodiments, but it is not necessary to transfer program data for the initial setting process during the initial setting process. Incidentally, in the configuration, program data for instructing transfer of the regular program data and the regular image data in the boot data needs to be set.

  (6) In addition to the memory modules 74 and 133, a memory for storing image data in advance may be provided. Specifically, for the configuration, a NOR flash memory is provided as the other memory, and the normal image data is stored in the NOR flash memory. Then, by connecting the NOR type flash memory to the VDP 76, 135, when displaying an image corresponding to the normal use image data, the normal use image data may be read out from the NOR type flash memory. According to this configuration, it is necessary to provide a plurality of memories for storing image data in advance. However, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or the like, transfer of the regular image data is not necessary. It becomes possible to display the selected image well. Even in this configuration, only regular image data is stored in the NOR type flash memory, and the memory modules 74 and 133 are stored with change image data that tends to have a large data capacity as the effects are diversified. With the configuration, since it is sufficient to use a NOR type flash memory having a small storage capacity, the above effect can be achieved while achieving cost reduction. In addition, the above configuration may be applied to routine program data.

  (7) In the above embodiments, when backup power is not supplied to the RAMs of the display control devices 70 and 130 and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data group stored in the RAMs until then is Instead of being destroyed or erased, backup power may be supplied to the RAM.

  As means for supplying the backup power, the power-supply and discharge control device 57 may also serve as a power-off during power-supply unit that supplies the backup power to the RAM 54 of the main control device 50 or the like. A middle power supply unit may be provided.

  (8) The storage means to which program data and image data are transferred in advance has a higher speed required for reading data than the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 and, if it can be overwritten, it is a volatile storage means RAM It is not limited.

  (9) The configuration of prior transfer of program data and image data and the configuration of boot data reading from the boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to control devices other than the display control devices 70 and 130. For example, the present invention may be applied to the sound emission control device 60. Also, the present invention may be applied to the main control unit 50, the payout control unit 55 or the power supply and release control unit 57. Further, in a configuration provided with a movable object in which an operation for gaming is performed instead of the symbol display device 31, the above configuration may be applied to a control device that drives and controls the movable object.

  (10) With respect to an image displayed so as to perform a predetermined operation over a display period for a plurality of frames, after the operation in a predetermined order is reproduced in the forward direction, it may be configured to be reproduced reversely . In this case, since the first operation and the last operation do not have to be continuous, it is possible to facilitate the creation of the image data in the design stage as compared to the case of loop reproduction.

  (11) When the processing load on the display CPUs 72 and 131 and the VDPs 76 and 135 increases, such as when the effect character performs complex motion or the effect character increases, the background character The display of the non-focused character may continue but the operation may not be updated. This reduces the processing load.

  (12) A plurality of image data for displaying a predetermined character may be simultaneously set in the frame areas 82a and 82b. This makes it possible to display a plurality of characters while suppressing the number of image data stored in advance. Further, in this case, the image data may be reversed horizontally and set, or the coordinate setting may be performed so that the timing of passing the predetermined position is different when performing an effect of passing the predetermined position.

  (13) The memory module 74 may be configured to store image data in which a plurality of effect images are combined in advance. In this case, the visual effect by the effect image can be enhanced while suppressing the increase in processing load.

  (14) In the first embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, but instead, all cameras arranged in the world coordinate system are arranged. A configuration may be adopted in which a single camera is commonly set for image data.

  (15) In the first embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of the background image, the effect image and the symbol image, but it is summarized in the unit of the background image and the effect image It may be configured to be projected, may be projected together in units of the effect image and the symbol image, or may be projected as all together.

  (16) In the first embodiment, when texture mapping processing is performed, a texture may be attached to only a plane to be projected for a single object. In this case, the processing load of rendering can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of performing texture mapping before projection, texture mapping may be performed after projection.

  (17) In the first embodiment, the display of the design may be performed based on disposing, in the world coordinate system, data obtained by attaching two-dimensional image data to a plate polygon. In this case, display may be performed as if the design is illuminated by light by sequentially changing the vertex colors of the four corners of the plate polygon.

  (18) In the first embodiment, by combining the camera work in the world coordinate system and the enlargement / reduction of the object, while the predetermined character is displayed in a certain size, the moving distance of the character is calculated. You may perform a display effect to show for a long time.

  (19) When focusing on the characteristic configuration related to display control using image data in each of the above embodiments, NAND flash memories 102 and 162 are used as storage means for storing program data and image data in advance. The configuration and the configuration to be transferred in advance to the RAMs 73, 75, 132 and 134 for reading are arbitrary, and storage means capable of random access such as NOR type flash memory are used as storage means for storing program data and image data in advance. The above-described characteristic configuration relating to display control may be applied to the configuration described above or the configuration without advance transfer to the RAMs 73, 75, 132, and 134.

  (20) Hold information relating to the winning to the upper operation port 23 and hold information relating to the winning to the lower operation port 24 are distinguished and stored, and hold information relating to the winning to the lower operation port 24 has priority A configuration to be digested may be applied, and conversely, a configuration may be applied to which priority-retaining information relating to winning of the upper operating port 23 is preferentially digested.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not vertically arranged side by side, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 24 are on the left and right It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, and it is good also as a structure which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 41, both operation ports may be arranged apart from each other so as to aim for winning only to the first operation port or only to winning to the second operation port.

  Further, in the above configuration, the main display section 33 is obtained based on the first display area displaying the result of the acceptance / rejection determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operation opening 23, and the winning of the lower operation opening 24. A second display area may be provided to display the result of the pass / fail judgment of the held information. In this case, the variation display of the pattern in the first display area is performed prior to or on the basis of the fact that the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the upper operation port 23 is the object of the acceptance or rejection determination. At the same time as the game start is started, the stop result corresponding to the determination of the success or failure is displayed, and the variable display of one game time is ended. In addition, the variation display of the pattern in the second display area is performed prior to or on the basis of the fact that the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the lower operation port 24 is the object of the acceptance determination. At the same time as it is started, the stop result corresponding to the judgment of success or failure is displayed, and the variable display of one game time is ended.

  (21) A player in the case where the on-hold information pertaining to the winning to the upper operation opening 23 becomes the target of the determination of yes or no and the case on which the on-hold information pertaining to the winning to the lower operation opening 24 becomes the target of the determination The benefits from which they are obtained may be different. Moreover, in the structure which provides multiple operating ports like each said embodiment, the number of operating ports is not limited to two, Three or more may be sufficient. In addition, only one operation opening may be provided.

  (22) Based on the command output from the main control device 50 instead of the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 are controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command output from the main control device 50, The display control devices 70 and 130 may control the sound emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices may be provided. The functions of the above may be integrated into the main control device 50, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated into the main control device 50. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 is also arbitrary.

  (23) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which a motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when gaming balls enter a specific area of a special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, and the like.

  In addition, non-ball-ball type game machines, for example, a plurality of reels as a plurality of orbiting bodies in which a plurality of kinds of symbols are attached in the circumferential direction, start the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever A slot for giving a player a benefit such as payout of medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by operating the switch. The invention is also applicable to machines. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various controls of the slot machine, and in a configuration provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device separately from the reel, the present invention can be applied to the control related to displaying an image in the display control device. Is applicable.

  A pachinko machine and slot machine including a loading device and starting rotation of the reel by operating the start lever after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which is integrated.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102 and 162) storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine provided with
A second storage unit (work RAM 73, 132) for storing the information read from the first storage unit and having a speed required to read out the information faster than reading from the first storage unit;
Transfer means for reading out from the first storage means the specific information used when executing the specific control at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means and storing the information in the second storage means (Controller 101, 161),
The control means stores in advance information for initial start-up used when executing the process for initial start-up based on a predetermined initial start-up state, and the speed required for reading out the information is the first Third storage means (boot memory 119, 179) faster than reading from the storage means;
Equipped with
The control means
Specific control execution means (function to execute V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) which reads the specific information stored in the second storage means and executes the specific control;
An initial execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading out the initial activation information stored in the third storage unit and executing the initial activation processing;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the specific information is stored at the timing before the specific control is executed by the control means in the second storage means whose speed required to read out the information is faster than when reading from the first storage means The control means is configured to read out the specific information stored in the second storage means and execute specific control. Therefore, the time required for reading out the specific information can be shortened in the control means, and the specific control can be smoothly performed.

  In addition, the initial startup information used when performing the initial startup process is not stored in the first storage unit, but is stored in advance in the third storage unit whose speed required to read the information is faster than the speed required when reading from the first storage unit. It is done. The initial activation process is executed by reading out the initial activation information from the third storage unit. As a result, there is no waiting time for transferring the information for initial activation to the second storage means when the processing for initial activation is performed, so the process from the initial activation state until the processing for initial activation is started Time can be shortened.

  As mentioned above, speeding up of the processing speed in execution of control can be realized satisfactorily.

  Note that the "first storage means" may be storage means used only for reading information when the control means executes control, or storage of information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means are included. The same is true for the following independent features.

Feature A2. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102 and 162) storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine provided with
The first storage means includes a NAND flash memory.
Furthermore, a second storage unit (work RAM 73, 132) which stores information read from the first storage unit and has a speed required to read information faster than when reading from the first storage unit;
Transfer means for reading out from the first storage means the specific information used when executing the specific control at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means and storing the information in the second storage means (Controller 101, 161),
The control means stores in advance information for initial start-up used when executing the process for initial start-up based on a predetermined initial start-up state, and the speed required for reading out the information is the first Third storage means (boot memory 119, 179) faster than reading from the storage means;
Equipped with
The control means
Specific control execution means (function to execute V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) which reads the specific information stored in the second storage means and executes the specific control;
An initial execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading out the initial activation information stored in the third storage unit and executing the initial activation processing;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A2, by using the NAND flash memory as the first storage unit, the capacity can be easily increased as compared with the configuration in which the NOR flash memory is used. The specific information is stored in the second storage means, which is faster than the speed required to read the information from the first storage means, at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means, and the control means Specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage unit, the control unit can shorten the time required to read out the specific information and smoothly perform the specific control. it can.

  In addition, the initial startup information used when performing the initial startup process is not stored in the first storage unit, but is stored in advance in the third storage unit whose speed required to read the information is faster than the speed required when reading from the first storage unit. It is done. The initial activation process is executed by reading out the initial activation information from the third storage unit. As a result, there is no waiting time for transferring the information for initial activation to the second storage means when the processing for initial activation is performed, so the process from the initial activation state until the processing for initial activation is started Time can be shortened.

  As mentioned above, speeding up of the processing speed in execution of control can be realized satisfactorily.

Feature A3. The specific control execution means starts the specific control after the execution of the initial startup process is completed,
Furthermore, the initial startup information includes reference information for specifying information indicating that the specifying information should be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit.
The initial execution means transfers the specific information to the second storage means to the transfer means by referring to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the initial activation process. The gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the processing to be performed (the processing of step S310 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) is executed.

  According to the feature A3, since the information for transferring the specific information is set in the information for initial startup, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control while the process for initial startup is being performed. An instruction is given. Thereby, specific control can be favorably started.

Feature A4. The control means reads the post-activation information transferred to the second storage means, and executes the post-activation process after the initial activation process (steps S307 to S307 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) Function to execute the process of S314),
The initial activation information includes reference information for post activation information indicating that the post activation information is to be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit.
The initial execution unit transfers the post-activation information to the second storage unit to the transfer unit by referring to the reference information for the post-activation information as at least a part of the initial activation process. Processing (processing of step S304 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for performing
Furthermore, when the execution of the initial activation process and the post-activation process is completed, the control means is configured to complete initial activation setting based on the initial activation state, and the specific control execution The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the specific control is started when the execution of the initial activation process and the post-activation process is completed.

  According to the feature A4, the information used to execute and complete the initial activation setting in the control means is set to be divided into the information for initial activation and the information after activation. Then, the initial activation information to be used first is stored in advance in the third storage unit, and the post-activation information to be used later is stored in advance in the first storage unit. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the third storage unit, as compared with the configuration in which the initial activation information and the post-activation information are stored in advance in the third storage unit.

  In addition, even in this configuration, since information for transferring post-start information is set in the initial start information, the post-start-up processing is performed during execution of the initial start processing. A required post-start information transfer instruction is issued. Thereby, post-startup processing can be favorably started.

Feature A5. The post-start information includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information should be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit.
The post-activation execution means refers to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the post-activation process to transfer the specific information to the second storage means to the transfer means. The gaming machine according to the feature A4, characterized in that processing to be performed (processing of step S310 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) is executed.

  According to the feature A5, since the information for transferring the specific information is set in the post-start information, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control while the post-activation process is being performed. An instruction is given. Thereby, specific control can be favorably started.

Feature A6. The transfer means selects a storage area corresponding to the transfer instruction information out of a large number of storage areas included in the first storage means based on the transfer instruction information transmitted by the control means, and the selected storage area It has a management means (controller CPU 113, 173) for reading out information stored in advance in the area,
When the control means reads out the initial activation information from the third storage means, the control means transmits the transfer instruction information corresponding thereto to the management means, and based on that, the information is read from the third storage means A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that

  According to the feature A6, since the management means is provided, the transfer of the information from the first storage means is favorably performed in response to the transfer instruction from the control means. In this case, the control means may transmit the transfer instruction information to the management means even when the information is read out from the third storage means. As a result, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control means are collected, and the configuration relating to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

  Feature A7. The management means, the first storage means, and the third storage means are provided as storage modules (memory modules 74, 133) having a port portion (I / F 111, 171) common to the control means. The gaming machine according to the feature A6, which is a feature.

  According to the feature A7, in both of the case where the control means instructs transfer from the first storage means to the second storage means and the case where the information is read from the third storage means, the common port of the storage module Transfer instruction information may be transmitted to the unit. As a result, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control means can be integrated, and the configuration relating to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

Feature A8. The first storage means is a NAND flash memory,
The transfer means is
Management information storage means (control ROMs 114 and 174) for storing management information in which information on the physical address of the first storage means is associated with information on the logical address transmitted by the control means;
By referring to the management information, a physical address identification process of identifying a physical address corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control means is executed, and of the multiple storage areas included in the first storage means Among them, management means (controller CPUs 113 and 173) for executing a reading process of reading information from the storage area of the physical address identified by the physical address identification process;
A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, comprising:

  According to the feature A8, although a defective block may occur in the NAND flash memory, specification of the physical address with respect to the logical address transmitted from the control means is performed in the management means. Reading is performed well.

Feature A9. The transfer means stores the information read from the storage area of the first storage means corresponding to the information of the logical address, and the speed required for reading the information is faster than when reading from the first storage means Means (cache memory 117, 177) for transferring information corresponding to the information of the logical address to the transfer destination after storing the information in the storage means, and transferring the information;
When the management means reads from the first storage means the information corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control means and stores the information in the storage means, the management means corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. The game according to the feature A8 is provided with prediction start means (function to execute the process of step S107 in the controller CPU 113, 173) for starting transfer of information from the storage area of physical address to the storage means. Machine.

  According to the feature A9, when the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, only the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means to the storage means and transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination. Instead, the logical address associated with the received logical address is predicted to be the logical address related to the next transfer instruction, and the information corresponding to the logical address is read out from the first storage means. As a result, when the information corresponding to each of the plurality of associated logical addresses is read out, transmission of the information of the logical address from the control means is performed for the information corresponding to the logical address on the rear side in the reading order. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required to read out such information can be shortened.

  However, in the above configuration, reading of information corresponding to the first logical address largely depends on the reading speed of the NAND flash memory. On the other hand, since it has the configuration of the feature A1 and the information for initial startup is stored in advance in the third storage unit instead of the first storage unit, the processing for initial startup is started after the initial activation state. The time required to

Feature A10. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
The specific control execution means is configured to perform display control of an image to be displayed on the display screen as the specific control,
A process of displaying an image (initial image) for the previous stage when the display of an image based on the specific control is started as the initial activation process (steps S311 and S312 in display CPUs 72 and 131) A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that the processing is performed.

  According to the feature A10, since the display of the image for the previous step is started on the display screen based on the execution of the process for initial activation, the image on the display screen is started until the display of the image based on the specific control is started. The display of the image on the display screen can be started earlier than in a configuration in which is not displayed at all.

Characteristics A11. A display unit (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) is provided, and the control unit is configured to perform display control of an image to be displayed on the display screen,
The first storage means stores in advance control program data used when the control means executes various processes, and image data used when an image is displayed on the display screen,
The control means causes the transfer means to perform transfer while adjusting the timing of information transfer so that the period for transferring the control program data and the period for transferring the image data do not overlap. A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising means (functions of executing step S306, step S309, step S313 and the like in the display CPUs 72 and 131).

  According to the feature A11, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in advance in the first storage unit, storage destinations of the information can be consolidated. Further, in the configuration, the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period in which the control program data is transferred and the period in which the image data is transferred do not overlap. Each information can be transferred favorably while suppressing the complication.

Feature A12. A plurality of types of control program data are stored, and the type of image data required for displaying an image based on processing using the control program data differs depending on the type of control program data
The transfer adjusting means transfers the control program data corresponding to the image data in priority to the transfer of the image data, and does not use the image data in processing using the control program data. A game machine according to feature A11, wherein transfer of the image data is performed while a process is being performed.

  According to the feature A12, since transfer of control program data corresponding to the image data is performed prior to transfer of the image data, occurrence of processing waiting can be suppressed. Further, since the transfer of the image data is performed while the process not using the image data is executed in the process using the control program data, the display of the image using the image data is not disturbed. It is possible to

Feature A13. Processing for displaying an image (initial image) for the previous stage when display of an image is started based on the specific control as the processing for the initial activation as the processing for the initial activation Processing of S312),
The transfer adjustment means is an image corresponding to the image for the previous step after the transfer of the information for initial activation is completed and before the transfer of control program data used in the specific control is started. A game machine according to feature A12, wherein data transfer is performed.

  According to the feature A13, since the display of the image for the previous step is started on the display screen based on the execution of the process for initial activation, the image on the display screen is started until the display of the image based on the specific control is started. The display of the image on the display screen can be started earlier than in a configuration in which is not displayed at all.

Feature A14. The control unit is a downstream control unit that performs the specific control in accordance with instruction information transmitted based on the upstream processing performed by the upstream control unit (main controller 50),
Furthermore, the first storage unit is a NAND flash memory, and the upstream storage unit (ROM 53) storing control program data used in advance when the upstream control unit performs the upstream processing is random. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A13, which is an accessible memory.

  According to the feature A14, with regard to the control means on the upstream side, random access can be performed for reading out control program data, thereby simplifying the configuration related to reading of control program data, and for the control means on the downstream side to be large. It can be set as the structure which made much of capacity-ization.

Feature A15. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102 and 162) storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine provided with
The first storage means includes a NAND flash memory.
Furthermore, a second storage unit (work RAM 73, 132) which stores information read from the first storage unit and has a speed required to read information faster than when reading from the first storage unit;
Transfer means for reading out from the first storage means the specific information used when executing the specific control at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means and storing the information in the second storage means (Controller 101, 161),
Equipped with
The control means
Specific control execution means (function to execute V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) which reads the specific information stored in the second storage means and executes the specific control;
The processing for the initial startup is executed based on the predetermined initial startup state, and the speed transferred to the second storage unit or the speed required for reading the information is read from the first storage unit An initial execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading out the initial activation information stored in advance in another storage unit faster than the above and executing the initial activation processing;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A15, by using the NAND flash memory as the first storage unit, the capacity can be easily increased as compared with the configuration in which the NOR flash memory is used. The specific information is stored in the second storage means, which is faster than the speed required to read the information from the first storage means, at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means, and the control means Specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage unit, the control unit can shorten the time required to read out the specific information and smoothly perform the specific control. it can.

  In addition, the information for initial startup used when executing the process for initial startup is read after being transferred to the second storage unit, or the speed required for reading the information is faster than that when read from the first storage unit. It is read from the storage means of Thereby, the process for initial startup can be performed satisfactorily.

  As mentioned above, speeding up of the processing speed in execution of control can be realized satisfactorily.

Feature A16. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G), first storage means (NAND-type flash memories 102 and 162) storing information in advance, and the first storage means A display control unit (display CPU 72, 131, VDP 76, 135) for performing display control of an image to be displayed on the display screen based on the information stored in the game machine,
The first storage means stores in advance control program data used when the display control means executes various processing, and image data used when an image is displayed on the display screen,
Second storage means (work RAMs 73 and 132, VRAMs 75 and 134) for storing the information read from the first storage means and having a speed required to read the information faster than reading from the first storage means;
And transfer means (controller 101, 161) for reading out the necessary information from the first storage means and storing the information in the second storage means at a timing before the timing required by the display control means.
Equipped with
The display control means is configured to execute processing using control program data transferred to the second storage means, and to display an image using image data transferred to the second storage means. ,
Furthermore, a transfer adjustment means (a display that causes the transfer means to perform transfer while adjusting the timing of information transfer so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap) A function of executing steps S306, S309, S313, etc. in the CPUs 72 and 131);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A16, the information is stored in the second storage unit, which is faster than the speed required to read out the information from the first storage unit, at a timing before the timing required by the display control unit. The control means performs processing using the information stored in the second storage means and displays an image. Therefore, the time required to read out the information can be shortened in the display control means, and the image can be displayed smoothly.

  Further, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in advance in the first storage means, storage destinations of the information can be consolidated. Further, in the configuration, the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period in which the control program data is transferred and the period in which the image data is transferred do not overlap. Each information can be transferred favorably while suppressing the complication.

  As mentioned above, speeding up of the processing speed in execution of control can be realized satisfactorily.

Feature A17. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102 and 162) storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine provided with
The first storage means includes a NAND flash memory.
Furthermore, a second storage unit (work RAM 73, 132) which stores information read from the first storage unit and has a speed required to read information faster than when reading from the first storage unit;
Transfer means for reading out from the first storage means the specific information used when executing the specific control at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means and storing the information in the second storage means (Controller 101, 161),
Equipped with
The transfer means is
Management information storage means (control ROMs 114 and 174) for storing management information in which information on the physical address of the first storage means is associated with information on the logical address transmitted by the control means;
By referring to the management information, a physical address identification process of identifying a physical address corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control means is executed, and of the multiple storage areas included in the first storage means Among them, management means (controller CPUs 113 and 173) for executing a reading process of reading information from the storage area of the physical address identified by the physical address identification process;
Storage means (cache memory 117, 177) for storing information read from the storage area of the first storage means corresponding to the information of the logical address;
When transferring information corresponding to the information of the logical address to a transfer destination, the information is transferred after being stored in the storage unit,
When the management means reads from the first storage means the information corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control means and stores the information in the storage means, the management means corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. A game machine characterized by comprising prediction start means (function to execute the process of step S107 in the controller CPU 113, 173) for starting transfer of information from the storage area of physical address to the storage means.

  According to the feature A17, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage unit, the capacity can be easily increased as compared with the configuration in which the NOR flash memory is used. The specific information is stored in the second storage means, which is faster than the speed required to read the information from the first storage means, at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means, and the control means Specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage unit, the control unit can shorten the time required to read out the specific information and smoothly perform the specific control. it can.

  In addition, although defective blocks may occur in the NAND flash memory, since the management means specifies the physical address for the logical address transmitted from the control means, the information read from the NAND flash memory is favorably performed. To be done.

  Further, when the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, the information corresponding to the logical address is read out from the first storage means to the storage means and transferred not only from the storage means to the transfer destination but also The logical address associated with the received logical address is predicted to be the logical address related to the next transfer instruction, and the information corresponding to the logical address is read out from the first storage means. As a result, when the information corresponding to each of the plurality of associated logical addresses is read out, transmission of the information of the logical address from the control means is performed for the information corresponding to the logical address on the rear side in the reading order. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required to read out such information can be shortened.

  The invention of the feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines have a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and the control board controls a series of games . A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state where they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Also, in recent years, the degree of attention to images is increased by diversifying the manner of presentation by images, or by using complex moving pictures and real-shot images as images, and the degree of attention to games is increased accordingly. An attempt has been made.

  Here, when an instruction to draw an image is generated, it is preferable that the display of the image be performed earlier. One possible method for early display of images is to increase the reading speed of memory for image data. As another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of a CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the freedom of selection of the memory is reduced in the gaming machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed is increased.

  The above problem is not limited to the configuration relating to the display of an image, and occurs similarly in other configurations relating to control.

  Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features A1 to A17, the following features B1 to B13, the following features C1 to C10, the following features C'1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, the following features F1 ~ F15, the following feature G1 to G9, the following feature H1 to H11, the following feature I1 to I10, the following feature J1 to J13, the following feature K1 to K9, the configuration limited by any one of the following features L1 to L19 is applied May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display control means for causing the display screen to display an image using the image data stored in the display storage means, and updating the contents of the image for one frame by becoming a predetermined update timing) CPU 72, VDP 76),
In the gaming machine provided with
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to individual images so that a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen in the image for one frame (function for executing writing process in VDP 76, in VDP 76 A function of executing the processing of step S3601, step S3605, step S3701, step S3705, and step S3801 to step S3804),
When the plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the transparency value set to a part of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side corresponds to the individual image on the back side Transparent value adjustment means for performing partial display of the individual image on the front side by setting the overlapping portion of the image data to be a display target (function of executing processing of step S3604, step S3704, step S3807 in VDP 76 )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the transparency value of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side. Thus, for example, since it is not necessary to separately prepare image data for partial display and image data for full display, the storage capacity of the display storage unit can be suppressed.

Feature B2. The image data has many unit image data (pixels) associated with color information,
The display storage unit is data for adjusting a transparency value (a part α data PD 22 to PD 25, a part α data PD 30 to PD 33, a pallet , Partial α data PD37, PD38) are stored in advance,
The gaming machine according to the feature B1, characterized in that the transparent value adjusting means performs the partial display by applying the data for adjusting the transparent value to the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side. .

  According to the feature B2, since the partial display is performed only by reading out the data for adjusting the transparent value from the storage means for display and applying it to the image data, the processing configuration for performing the partial display is complicated. Is reduced.

Feature B3. With respect to the unit image data corresponding to the contour portion of the area partially displayed in the individual image on the front side, the transparency value adjustment data is higher in transparency of the contour portion than in the adjacent portion inside thereof. The transparency value is set to be
Furthermore, the individual images displayed as the individual images on the front side include the first front individual image and the second front individual image, and one-to-one for each of the front individual images. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the data for adjusting the transparent value is provided correspondingly.

  According to the feature B3, since the data for adjusting the transparency value is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the first near side individual image and the second near side individual image, partial display is performed on these individual images Can. In addition, since the transparency value is set so that the transparency of the contour portion of the corresponding individual image is higher than that of the adjacent portion on the inner side, the transparency value adjustment for partial display is performed for each transparency value adjustment data When the application data is applied, jaggies of the partially displayed image can be alleviated at the same time.

Feature B4. The individual image displayed as the individual image on the front side is an individual image corresponding to the first front side individual image (an individual image corresponding to the symbol sprite data PD26) and a second front side individual image (the symbol sprite data PD27) Image is included,
The transparent value adjustment common to both the case where the transparent value adjustment means performs partial display of the first near side individual image and the case where partial display of the second near side individual image is performed A game machine according to feature B2, characterized in that the data for use (partial α data PD30 to PD33) is applied.

  According to the feature B4, performing partial display on each of the first near side individual image and the second near side individual image while suppressing the storage capacity required to store the transparency value adjustment data. it can.

Feature B5. The transparency adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and transparency value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Yes,
The transparent value adjusting unit applies the transparent value information included in each unit adjustment area of the transparent value adjustment data to color information associated with the corresponding unit image data in the image data, A game machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that the display is performed.

  According to the feature B5, when partial display is performed, the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data is applied to the color information associated with the corresponding unit image data. Since it is good, the complication of the process concerning the said application can be suppressed.

Feature B6. The image data setting unit is configured to display an image for one frame based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage unit, and the image data is stored in the setting storage unit. If the image data is set to, the coordinate information in the storage means for the setting of a part of the large number of unit image data included in the image data is specified, and the image data is set at a position according to the coordinate information. Configuration,
Further, the transparency adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and transparency value information is set in each unit adjustment area Has been
The partial display may be performed by applying the transparent value information included in each unit adjustment area of the transparent value adjustment data to color information associated with the corresponding unit image data in the image data. A game machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that

  According to the feature B6, when the image data is set in the setting storage unit, it is not necessary to specify coordinate information for all unit image data of the image data, so that complication of the processing configuration relating to the specification can be suppressed.

  In the configuration, the transparency adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and transparency value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Data structure. As a result, even if the coordinate information is not specified individually for all unit image data of the image data, the unit corresponding to the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the data for transparency value adjustment The present invention can be applied to color information associated with image data.

Feature B7. The image data setting unit is configured to display an image for one frame based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage unit, and the image data is stored in the setting storage unit. When the image data is set to, parameter information including coordinate information in the setting storage means of the image data is specified, and the image data is set according to the specification result,
When the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side is set in the setting storage unit, the transparent value adjustment unit is configured to set the image data according to the specified parameter information. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the transparent value adjustment data is applied to the image data at a previous timing.

  According to the feature B7, a predetermined parameter is applied to the image data to which the transparency adjustment data is applied, and data of the application result is set in the setting storage unit. As a result, there is no need to specify parameters for setting in the setting storage unit for the transparency value adjustment data, so that the processing load for specifying the parameters can be reduced.

Feature B8. Identification information is individually set for each unit image data, and
A combination of color information of unit image data and transparency value information in which the discrimination information is set is set in correspondence with the identification information in the transparency value adjustment data. The gaming machine according to any one of B2 to B4.

  According to the feature B8, it is possible to apply the transparent value for partial display in accordance with setting the color information to each unit image data.

  Feature B9. The transparent value adjusting means is characterized in that the transparent value is adjusted so that the transparency of the outline part of the area partially displayed in the individual image on the front side is higher than that of the adjacent part on the inner side. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

  According to the feature B9, when the adjustment of the transparency value is performed to perform partial display, jaggies of the image partially displayed can be reduced.

  Feature B10. The area for partial display in the individual image on the front side by switching the range in which the transparency value for which the transparent value adjustment means sets an overlapping portion of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side is displayed. The game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B9, characterized in that:

  According to the feature B <b> 10, it is possible to perform display effect in which the region partially displayed in the individual image on the front side transitions by switching the transparent value to be applied.

Feature B11. Partition area control means (function of executing the process of step S3506 in the display CPU 72) for controlling the display means so that a partition area (partial display area PL5) in which a partial area of the display screen is partitioned is displayed Equipped
The individual image on the front side is an individual image used to be displayed in the sectioned area, and the individual image on the back side is used to be displayed in a surrounding area including the periphery of the sectioned area It is an image,
The transparent value adjustment means does not protrude the front side individual image to the surrounding area when the front side individual image is displayed such that a part of the front side front image is displayed so as to partially cover the boundary of the divided area. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, characterized in that an individual image on the near side is partially displayed.

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to perform a display effect in which an individual image is displayed within the range of the sectioned area only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B12. Character color change control means (character transition processing in VDP 76 for controlling the display means so as to display a plurality of character images arranged in a specific direction on the display screen and to change the colors of the plurality of character images sequentially Have the ability to perform
The individual image on the front side is an individual image including the plurality of character images,
The individual image on the back side is an individual image including the plurality of character images and set so that the color of each character image is different from the individual image on the front side,
The image data setting unit is configured to display an image for one frame based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage unit, and the color of the character image is sequentially changed. Image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side is set in front of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the rear side,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, wherein the transparent value adjusting means is configured to display a part of the near side individual image when the display effect is performed.

  According to the feature B12, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the color of the character image is sequentially changed only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B13. Pattern determination means (function of executing the process of step S403 in the display CPU 72) for determining display effect pattern information composed of images for a plurality of frames based on establishment of a predetermined pattern determination condition;
Derivation means (performs task processing in display CPU 72) for deriving parameter information in the case of using image data corresponding to an individual image displayed in an image for each frame based on reference to the determined display effect pattern information Function),
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B12, wherein the image data setting means sets the image data in a state where the parameter information derived by the derivation means is applied. .

  According to the feature B13, the parameter information of the image data corresponding to each frame is derived based on reference to the display effect pattern information determined previously, and the image data is set in the state where the parameter information is applied. Thus, in the configuration in which an image of each frame is displayed, the excellent effects as described in the feature B1 and the like can be exhibited.

  The invention of the feature B group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  To explain in more detail the case where an image is displayed using 2D image data, the image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or a character. It is done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or a character in front of the background is created with respect to storage means such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or a character is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, for example, when displaying an image as if a character or character is moving in a predetermined manner in front of the above-mentioned background, at an update timing of the display device, at an coordinate according to the predetermined movement or Drawing data in which data of the character or character is set in a form is created.

  Here, as a display effect on the display device, the inventor of the present invention transitions from the state in which the entire character or character is displayed to the state in which only a portion is displayed in the process of movement of the character or character. I came up with a display effect that

  However, in order to perform the display effect, it is not preferable that the capacity of the memory for the image data is extremely increased, and it is necessary to be able to perform the display effect while suppressing the increase of the capacity to some extent .

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features B1 to B13, the above features A1 to A17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features C′1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, the following features F1 ~ F15, the following feature G1 to G9, the following feature H1 to H11, the following feature I1 to I10, the following feature J1 to J13, the following feature K1 to K9, the configuration limited by any one of the following features L1 to L19 is applied May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
An image is displayed on the display screen based on setting of the image data in the storage means for setting (frame areas 82a and 82b) set in advance, and at the same time as the update timing set in advance, one frame Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating the contents of the image;
In the gaming machine provided with
A plurality of division image data (division parts data PD2 to PD10, division data groups PD12 to PD15) are stored in advance in the display storage means,
The display control unit arranges and sets the plurality of division image data in the setting storage unit in accordance with a predetermined relative position, so that the same type of display mode corresponds to each division image data Set setting means for displaying a series of images crossing the boundaries of the divided individual images (function to execute calculation processing for scroll background in display CPU 72 or function to execute calculation processing for displacement background in display CPU 72 And a function for executing setting processing of divided parts data in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature C1, image data for displaying a series of images is divided and stored as a plurality of division image data. As a result, it is possible to suppress the data unit in the case of individually setting in the setting storage unit, and to suppress the processing load in handling single image data.

  Feature C2. The set setting unit sets, in the setting storage unit, the first division image data (division part data PD5) and the second division image data (division part data PD6) having an adjacent positional relationship. In the case, the gaming machine according to the feature C1 characterized in that an overlapping area (overlapping area PA1) of both data is generated over the entire boundary portion of the division image data.

  According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which each division image data is individually set in the setting storage unit, a gap may be generated between both data depending on, for example, the individual size adjustment of each division image data Are concerned. On the other hand, since both data are set in the storage means for setting so that an overlapping area occurs, the above-mentioned gap does not occur, and the effect of storing as each image data for division It can be exhibited well.

  Feature C3. The feature C2 is characterized in that color information that is identical to each other is associated with portions that constitute the overlapping region in the first division image data and the second division image data. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature C3, since the color information which becomes the same mutually is matched with the portion which constitutes the overlap region in both division image data, for example, the same magnification is applied to each division image data The size adjustment is performed individually, and even if the width of the overlapping area is slightly deviated, it is expected that the color information to be displayed as the overlapping area is reflected in the deviated portion. Therefore, even if each image data for division is an image of a result set individually to the storage means for setting, it can be set as a good display mode.

Feature C4. The image data has many unit image data associated with color information,
The overlapping area is composed of unit image data for one row in each of the first division image data and the second division image data, as described in the feature C2 or C3. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to achieve an effect that each division image data is set so that the overlapping area is generated while minimizing the data capacity allocated for generating the overlapping area.

  Feature C5. When all the division image data are set at a predetermined scale, the division image data is created so that the series of images formed thereby exceed the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing of the update timing to be set with the predetermined scale, a part of the image data for division is a display range of an image for one frame The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the gaming machine is created in a division size not included in the above.

  According to the feature C5, the series of images generated by setting all the division image data is configured to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen, so that the image is in a range exceeding the size of the display screen. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that the setting has been made, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the image. In this case, at least at a specific update timing, a part of the image data for division is not included in the display range of the image for one frame. This makes it possible to not set division image data not included in the display range of an image for one frame in the specific update timing in the setting storage means, and always set all the division image data The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which is performed.

Feature C6. The image data has many unit image data associated with color information,
When the image data is set in the setting storage unit, the display control unit executes a predetermined drawing process on each unit image data of the image data to thereby set color information of the unit image data. Even when unit image data of image data determined as a target to be set in the setting storage unit while being set in the setting storage unit is out of the setting storage unit, color information of the unit image data is Although not set in the setting storage unit, the drawing processing is executed.
When all the division image data are set at a predetermined scale, the division image data is created so that the series of images formed thereby exceed the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing of the update timing to be set with the predetermined scale, a part of the image data for division is a display range of an image for one frame The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the gaming machine is created in a division size not included in the above.

  According to the feature C6, in the case where image data is set in the storage means for setting in the display control means, even if there is unit image data out of the storage means for setting in the image data, the unit image data is On the other hand, the same drawing processing is performed. As a result, the display control means does not have to execute dedicated processing on the unit image data that is out of the setting storage means.

  In addition, since the series of images generated by setting all the division image data exceeds the size corresponding to the display screen, the image is set in a range exceeding the size of the display screen. It becomes possible to make the player recognize things, and it becomes possible to raise the attention to the image. However, in a configuration in which the same drawing processing is performed on unit image data that extends from the setting storage unit as described above, the image data forming the series of images is provided as a single unit. As a result, the frequency of unnecessary execution of the drawing process increases, and the processing load increases.

  On the other hand, at least at specific update timings, a part of the image data for division is not included in the display range of the image for one frame. This makes it possible to not set division image data not included in the display range of an image for one frame in the specific update timing in the setting storage means, and always set all the division image data The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which is performed.

Feature C7. The set setting means
The division image grasping means for grasping a part of the division image data included in the display range of the image to be updated among the division image data (performing operation processing for the scroll background in the display CPU 72 Function),
A division image setting unit (function to execute setting processing of division parts data in VDP 76) for setting division image data grasped by the division image grasping unit in the setting storage unit;
A game machine according to feature C5 or C6, comprising:

  According to the feature C7, the division image data not included in the display range of the image for one frame is not set in the setting storage unit at least at the specific update timing. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the setting of the image data for all divisions is always performed.

Feature C8. Parameter information specifying means (function to execute calculation processing for scroll background in display CPU 72) for specifying parameter information including information of coordinates in the setting storage means of the image data
The display control means is configured to set the image data in the setting storage means in a state in which parameter information according to the identification result of the parameter information identification means is applied.
When the parameter information specifying means specifies the parameter information for image data constituting an image of one frame corresponding to at least the specific update timing, the image of the one frame also includes a partial region. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C5 to C7, wherein the parameter information is not specified for division image data corresponding to no division individual image.

  According to the feature C8, the parameter information is not specified for the division image data which is not included in the display range of the image for one frame at least at a specific update timing. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which parameter information is always specified for all division image data.

  Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8, wherein the series of images are images scrolled in a predetermined direction over image display periods of a plurality of frames.

  According to the feature C9, a series of images can be scroll-displayed, and by including the configuration of the feature C1 and the like, the scroll display can be favorably performed.

Feature C10. The image data for division is created such that a plurality of unit images are included in the individual images for division, and a display in which the display mode of the plurality of unit images is sequentially changed over a plurality of frames A plurality of division image data are provided corresponding to each division position so as to be able to
Each division set in the storage means for setting such that the display mode of the plurality of unit images sequentially changes over the display period of a plurality of frames at each division position where the division individual images are displayed side by side A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C9, characterized in that it comprises image switching means (function to execute calculation processing for displacement background in the display CPU 72) for switching image data for image processing.

  According to the feature C10, instead of individually setting the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images to the setting storage unit, the display of the plurality of unit images is controlled collectively in units of the division image data By doing this, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed. Thus, in addition to the excellent effects as described in the feature C1, it is possible to execute display effects in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed while reducing the processing load.

  The invention according to the feature C1 is effective against the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using 2D image data, image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like are stored in a memory for image data. ing. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Here, for a large image, the volume of the image data also becomes large. For example, an image for background, which is scrolled and displayed on the display screen only for a part of the area for each frame, is a character image such that the entire image is displayed on the display screen at the initially set size. The volume of image data is larger than that in FIG.

  In this case, depending on the capacity, it is assumed that the image data can not be stored in advance as one unit of image data. In addition, even if storage is possible, if there are many areas that are not actually displayed on the display screen, the amount of calculation for display for each frame increases accordingly, and the processing load increases. On the other hand, a large image as described above may have a configuration in which the image data at the time of initial setting is always enlarged and displayed, but this causes a decrease in image quality.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features C1 to C10, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the following features C′1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, the following features F1 ~ F15, the following feature G1 to G9, the following feature H1 to H11, the following feature I1 to I10, the following feature J1 to J13, the following feature K1 to K9, the configuration limited by any one of the following features L1 to L19 is applied May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature C '>
Feature C'1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
An image is displayed on the display screen based on setting of the image data in the storage means for setting (frame areas 82a and 82b) set in advance, and at the same time as the update timing set in advance, one frame Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating the contents of the image;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display storage unit stores in advance aggregated image data (division data groups PD12 to PD15) including a plurality of unit images collectively as a display target, and the display mode of the plurality of unit images is in a plurality of frames A plurality of the consolidated image data are stored so that it is possible to perform a display that changes sequentially over time.
Furthermore, integrated image switching means (for displacement background in the display CPU 72) switches the integrated image data set in the storage means for setting so that the display mode of the plurality of unit images changes sequentially over the display period for a plurality of frames. A game machine characterized by having a function of performing arithmetic processing of

  According to the feature C'1, instead of individually setting image data corresponding to each of a plurality of unit images to the setting storage unit, display of a plurality of unit images is summarized in units of division image data By performing control, it is possible to perform display effects in which display modes of a plurality of unit images are sequentially changed. This makes it possible to execute display effects in which the display modes of a plurality of unit images sequentially change, while reducing the processing load.

  The invention according to the feature C'1 is effective against the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using 2D image data, image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like are stored in a memory for image data. ing. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Here, the processing load for each frame increases as the number of unit images included in the image for one frame increases. On the other hand, if the number of unit images included in one frame of image is reduced, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the image may be reduced.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features C'1, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, the following features F1 ~ F15, the following feature G1 to G9, the following feature H1 to H11, the following feature I1 to I10, the following feature J1 to J13, the following feature K1 to K9, the configuration limited by any one of the following features L1 to L19 is applied May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) configured by arranging a plurality of dots in a matrix.
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data;
In the gaming machine provided with
The image data of the individual image for operation (Sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so as to move at least a part in a specific direction, the at least part moved mutually by less than one dot in the specific direction The configuration is capable of acquiring a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to the state,
The display control means performs a plurality of times of operation image data used to display the operation individual image, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction. It is characterized by being provided with operation image switching means (function to execute calculation processing for smooth movement in display CPU 72, function to execute setting processing for smooth movement in VDP 76) to be sequentially switched over image update timing. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature D1, at least a part of the operation-use individual image moves in a specific direction by sequentially switching a plurality of operation-use image data corresponding to a state of moving less than one dot as a subject of use Will be displayed as As a result, it is possible to display so as to move in units of less than one dot, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the operation-use individual image.

Feature D2. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) configured by arranging a plurality of dots in a matrix.
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display storage means is at least a part of the display storage means as the image data of the operation individual image (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so as to move at least a part in a specific direction. A plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48 and PD49) corresponding to a state of mutual movement less than a dot are stored,
The display control means performs a plurality of times of operation image data used to display the operation individual image, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction. It is characterized by being provided with operation image switching means (function to execute calculation processing for smooth movement in display CPU 72, function to execute setting processing for smooth movement in VDP 76) to be sequentially switched over image update timing. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature D2, at least a part of the operation-use individual image moves in a specific direction by sequentially switching a plurality of operation-use image data corresponding to a state of moving less than one dot as a subject of use Will be displayed as As a result, it is possible to display so as to move in units of less than one dot, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the operation-use individual image.

  Further, in the present configuration, since it is only necessary to sequentially switch the plurality of operation image data used to display the operation individual image, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load. As described above, it is possible to favorably realize the smoothing of the movement of the operation-use individual image.

Feature D3. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) configured by arranging a plurality of dots in a matrix.
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
While setting the image data in setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on the above.
In the gaming machine provided with
The image data of the operation-use individual image (Sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so as to move at least a part in a specific direction, the at least part being more than one unit setting area in one specific direction The configuration is capable of acquiring a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48 and PD49) corresponding to the state of mutual movement by the small size,
The display control means performs a plurality of times of operation image data used to display the operation individual image, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction. It is characterized by being provided with operation image switching means (function to execute calculation processing for smooth movement in display CPU 72, function to execute setting processing for smooth movement in VDP 76) to be sequentially switched over image update timing. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature D3, at least one of the operation-use individual images is sequentially switched by using a plurality of operation-use image data corresponding to the mutually moved state by a size smaller than one unit setting area. The part is displayed as it moves in a specific direction. As a result, it is possible to display as moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the operation-use individual image.

Feature D4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) configured by arranging a plurality of dots in a matrix.
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
While setting the image data in setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on the above.
In the gaming machine provided with
The display storage means is at least a portion of the image data in the specific direction as image data of the operation-use individual image (Sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so as to move at least a portion in the specific direction. Stores a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48 and PD49) corresponding to a state of mutual movement by a size smaller than the unit setting area of
The display control means performs a plurality of times of operation image data used to display the operation individual image, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction. It is characterized by being provided with operation image switching means (function to execute calculation processing for smooth movement in display CPU 72, function to execute setting processing for smooth movement in VDP 76) to be sequentially switched over image update timing. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature D4, at least one of the operation-use individual images is sequentially switched by using a plurality of operation-use image data corresponding to the mutually moved state by a size smaller than one unit setting area. The part is displayed as it moves in a specific direction. As a result, it is possible to display as moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the operation-use individual image.

  Further, in the present configuration, since it is only necessary to sequentially switch the plurality of operation image data used to display the operation individual image, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load. As described above, it is possible to favorably realize the smoothing of the movement of the operation-use individual image.

Feature D5. The display control means determines coordinate information in the case where each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage means (coordinate information determination means (step S4105 in the display CPU 72, step S4111, step Function to execute the processing of S4116),
In the case where the operation image data used to display the operation individual image is sequentially switched over a plurality of specific update timings, the coordinate information determining means applies to all of the operation image data. A game machine according to feature D3 or D4, wherein information of the same coordinates is applied.

  According to the feature D5, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to a state of mutual movement by a size smaller than one unit setting area is sequentially set with respect to the same coordinates. It is possible to display the operation individual image as if it is moving in units corresponding to a size smaller than the unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the operation individual image.

Feature D6. The display control means determines coordinate information in the case where each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage means (coordinate information determination means (step S4105 in the display CPU 72, step S4111, step Function to execute the processing of S4116),
The coordinate information determining means updates information on the next coordinate after information on the same coordinate is applied to all of the plurality of operation image data, and the information on the next coordinate is updated before the update. The gaming machine according to the feature D3 or D4, wherein the information is updated to be information of coordinates shifted to the side corresponding to the movement in the specific direction by one unit setting area from the coordinates of.

  According to the feature D6, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to a state of mutual movement by a size smaller than one unit setting area is sequentially set with respect to the same coordinates. It is possible to display the operation individual image as if it is moving in units corresponding to a size smaller than the unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the operation individual image.

  Further, after the information of the same coordinates is applied to all of the plurality of operation image data, the update to the information of the next coordinate is performed, and in the information of the next coordinate, one of the coordinates before the update is The unit setting area is updated to be information of coordinates shifted to the side corresponding to the movement in the specific direction. As a result, the state in which the operation individual image moves in units corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area is repeated. Therefore, it is possible to smooth the movement of the operation-use individual image.

Feature D7. The display control means is configured to update the contents of the image for one frame by becoming a predetermined update timing.
The operation image switching means is configured to move the plurality of operation image data when the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction over a display period of a plurality of frames. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D3 to D6, wherein the setting storage unit is repeatedly set in a predetermined order.

  According to the feature D7, the processing load may be reduced because the processing for repeatedly switching the operation image data set in the setting storage unit in the predetermined order may be performed.

  Feature D8. At least a part of the plurality of operation image data may be specified by making a transparency value indicating a transmission ratio of image data overlapping on the back side different in a portion constituting an edge portion of the corresponding operation individual image A game machine according to any one of features D3 to D7, characterized in that it corresponds to a state in which it moves mutually in a direction smaller than one of the unit setting areas.

  According to the feature D8, by a simple method of making the transparency value of the portion constituting the edge portion different, for a plurality of operations corresponding to the mutually moved state by a size smaller than one unit setting area Image data can be provided.

  Feature D9. The plurality of operation image data are stored in advance in the display storage means, and the first operation image data (first sprite data PD48) and the first operation image data are more suitable than the first operation image data. And second image data for operation (second sprite data PD49) corresponding to a state in which at least a portion is moved by a size smaller than one unit setting area in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D8.

  According to the feature D9, only the first operation image data and the second operation image data are stored in the display storage unit in advance as operation image data for facilitating the movement of the operation individual image. Since it is good to save, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the storage capacity required to store the operation image data in the display storage means.

  Feature D10. The second operation image data corresponds to a state in which the at least one portion is moved by a half or substantially half size of one unit setting area in the specific direction with respect to the first operation image data. The gaming machine according to feature D9, characterized in that:

  According to the feature D10, the case where the setting object to the setting storage unit is switched from the first operation image data to the second operation image data, and the second operation image data to the first operation In the case of switching to the image data, it becomes possible to make the movement amount of the operation-use individual image the same or substantially the same.

  The configuration limited to any one of the features D5 to D10 may be applied to the feature D1 or D2. In this case, the configuration defined on the basis of "one of the unit setting areas" may be applied as a configuration defined on the basis of "one dot".

  The invention of the feature D group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, one having a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, is known. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using 2D image data, image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like are stored in a memory for image data. ing. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Also, for example, when displaying an image as if a character or the like is performing a predetermined movement in front of the background, each time the display device is updated, the coordinates or the shape according to the predetermined movement are displayed. The drawing data in which the data such as the character is set is created. Then, each time drawing data is created, a new signal output is made to the display device, and the image on the display screen is updated so that a character or the like moves in a predetermined manner.

  Here, in a display screen configured by arranging a large number of dots, for example, when trying to move a character or the like in a predetermined direction, the minimum movement unit that can be set at one update timing is limited to one dot. Ru. Then, even if it is attempted to smoothly move the character or the like in a predetermined direction, limitations occur. This is the same as when trying to cause a character or the like to perform a predetermined action. In order to solve this problem, it is conceivable to increase the number of dots included in the unit area, but as the number of dots increases, the cost of the display increases.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features D1 to D10, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the following features E1 to E8, the following features F1 ~ F15, the following feature G1 to G9, the following feature H1 to H11, the following feature I1 to I10, the following feature J1 to J13, the following feature K1 to K9, the configuration limited by any one of the following features L1 to L19 is applied May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 133) storing image data in advance;
While creating drawing data in the setting storage means by setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 142a and 142b), outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image of one frame on the display screen based on the above.
In the gaming machine provided with
The display control means
Depth information determining means (for the display CPU 131 for determining information on the depth direction of image data corresponding to each individual image, for a plurality of individual images displayed so as to overlap the depth direction of the display screen with the image for one frame A function of executing the processing of steps S503 to S505);
The image data corresponding to each individual image is set in the storage means for setting by applying the information in the depth direction determined by the depth information determination means, so that each individual image in the depth direction in the display screen Image data setting means (function to execute hidden surface processing using Z buffer in VDP 135) to be displayed so as to overlap with
Partial display of the specific individual image is performed by causing the information in the depth direction to be applied to a part of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image to be determined as the information for partial display Partial display setting means (function to execute arithmetic processing for mask in display CPU 131);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, the partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the information in the depth direction of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. Thus, for example, since it is not necessary to separately prepare image data for partial display and image data for full display, the storage capacity of the display storage unit can be suppressed.

  Feature E2. The partial display setting means switches the range in which partial display is performed in the specific individual image by switching the range in which the information in the depth direction is determined to the information for the partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature E2, a single specific image data is used to switch the range in which partial display is performed on a specific individual image. Thus, it is possible to perform display effects for switching the range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

  Feature E3. The partial display setting means changes the range in which the information in the depth direction is determined to the information for the partial display in the specific image data in a stepwise manner to display the specific individual image in a display period for a plurality of frames. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, characterized in that it is gradually erased or gradually appeared over.

  According to the feature E3, a display effect in which a specific individual image gradually disappears or gradually appears over a display period of a plurality of frames is performed, so that the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of the specific individual image is increased according to the number of frames in the process of gradually erasing or gradually appearing, but the switching of the display mode is performed in the depth direction of the specific image data. This is performed by adjusting the information, and it is not necessary to prepare specific image data corresponding to each display mode. Therefore, the above-described display effects can be performed while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

Feature E4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 133) storing image data in advance;
While creating drawing data in the setting storage means by setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 142a and 142b), outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image of one frame on the display screen based on the above.
Equipped with
The image data includes image data of an object which is three-dimensional information,
The display control means
Arrangement means for arranging the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the process of step S605 in the VDP 135);
Distance information determination means (function of executing processing of step S503 to step S505 in display CPU 131) for determining distance information corresponding to relative distance from the viewpoint in the direction in which the viewpoint is directed;
The drawing data is set in the storage means for setting using projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and a plurality of the drawing data are directed in the direction in which the viewpoint is directed. When the image data are lined up, the drawing setting means (Z buffer in VDP 135) compares the distance information in each lined part and gives priority to the part on the side where the relative distance is short in the setting storage means Function to execute hidden surface processing using
The distance information determined by the distance information determining means for a part of specific image data corresponding to a specific individual image is determined to be information for partial display, whereby Partial display setting means (function to execute arithmetic processing for mask in display CPU 131) for performing partial display;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E4, partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the distance information of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. Thus, for example, since it is not necessary to separately prepare image data for partial display and image data for full display, the storage capacity of the display storage unit can be suppressed. In particular, according to the present configuration, the above-described excellent effects can be obtained by using the configuration of hidden surface removal for displaying a three-dimensional image.

  Feature E5. The partial display setting means switches a range in which partial display is performed in the specific individual image by switching the range in which the distance information is determined to the information for partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to the feature E4.

  According to the feature E5, a single specific image data is used to switch the range in which partial display is performed on a specific individual image. Thus, it is possible to perform display effects for switching the range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

  Feature E6. The partial display setting means changes the range in which the distance information is determined to the information for the partial display in the specific image data in a stepwise manner, whereby the specific individual image is displayed over a display period of a plurality of frames. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, characterized in that it is gradually erased or gradually appeared.

  According to the feature E6, since a display effect in which a specific individual image gradually disappears or gradually appears over a display period of a plurality of frames is performed, the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of the specific individual image is increased according to the number of frames in the process of gradually erasing or gradually appearing, but the switching of the display mode is performed in the depth direction of the specific image data. This is performed by adjusting the information, and it is not necessary to prepare specific image data corresponding to each display mode. Therefore, the above-described display effects can be performed while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

  Feature E7. The information for partial display is set as distance information corresponding to the relative distance being longer than the back surface image data constituting the back surface image in the image for one frame The gaming machine according to any one.

  The back surface image is an image that always constitutes the back surface in the image for one frame, and thus becomes an absolute reference as the position in the depth direction. In this case, according to the feature E7, partial display of a specific individual image is performed by the information for partial display being set as distance information corresponding to the relative distance being longer than that of the back surface image data. The processing load relating to the setting of the information for partial display in the case can be reduced.

Feature E8. The display screen is configured by arranging a large number of dots vertically and horizontally, and the setting storage unit has a large number of unit setting areas,
The display control means outputs an image signal corresponding to data of each unit setting area in the drawing data set in the setting storage means to the display means, thereby an image according to data of each unit setting area Output is performed at each dot corresponding to each unit setting area,
The distance information determining means determines the distance information in association with each of a large number of unit image data constituting the image data,
Furthermore, a comparison storage unit (Z buffer 143 having a large number of comparison areas corresponding to the large number of unit setting areas, in which the distance information referred to in the drawing setting section is stored in each of the comparison areas Equipped with
The setting means for drawing is
When a plurality of the image data are arranged in the direction in which the viewpoint points, the distance information is individually compared for each of the unit setting areas, and
In the case of performing individual comparison, if the distance information referenced at a later timing is closer to the relative information than the distance information referred to earlier and stored in the corresponding comparison area, The distance information referred to at the timing is overwritten in the comparison area, and the unit image data whose distance information is determined is overwritten in the unit setting area corresponding to the comparison area. The game machine according to any one of features E4 to E7.

  According to the feature E8, by using the configuration of hidden surface removal by using the storage unit for comparison, the excellent effect as described in the feature E4 and the like can be exhibited.

  The invention of the feature E group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, one having a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, is known. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data in which a polygon to which a texture is attached is projected onto a plane from a desired viewpoint is created. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, when the present inventor causes an individual image individually defined like a character or a character to appear on the display screen or erase the individual image, the present inventors generally display and partially display the individual image. I came up with a display effect that switches to the display.

  However, if multiple types of image data are required for the same type of individual image in order to perform the display effect, the mode of switching between the entire display and the partial display may be multi-stepped. There are many types of image data stored in advance. As a result, the storage capacity required for the image data memory is undesirably increased.

  The above-mentioned problem is not a problem limited to the display of a three-dimensional image, but occurs similarly when displaying a two-dimensional image.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features E1 to E8, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, the following features F1 ~ F15, the following feature G1 to G9, the following feature H1 to H11, the following feature I1 to I10, the following feature J1 to J13, the following feature K1 to K9, the configuration limited by any one of the following features L1 to L19 is applied May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory modules 74 and 133) storing image data in advance;
The image is displayed on the display screen based on setting of the image data in predetermined storage means for setting (frame areas 82a and 82b and frame areas 142a and 142b), and the predetermined update timing is obtained. And display control means (display CPUs 72 and 131, VDPs 76 and 135) for updating the contents of the image for one frame.
In the gaming machine provided with
The display storage unit stores in advance a plurality of types of image data corresponding to different individual images,
The display control means
Grouping means for grouping a plurality of types of image data (function to execute step S3405 in VDP 76, function to execute step S4006 in VDP 76, function to execute step S1404 in VDP 135),
Grouping data setting means (a function to execute the process of step S3406 in VDP 76, a function to execute the process of step S2205 in VDP 76, a function to execute the process of step S2205 in VDP 135) A function of executing the process of step S1405),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, by grouping a plurality of types of image data, it is possible to handle a plurality of types of image data as single data. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which image data is always handled individually. Further, since the plurality of types of image data are stored individually in the display storage means, it is possible to handle the image data alone. This makes it possible to handle image data flexibly. Furthermore, the storage capacity required for the display storage unit can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which data in which the plurality of types of image data are grouped is stored in advance in the display storage unit.

  As described above, when displaying a plurality of individual images simultaneously, it is possible to reduce the processing load for performing the display.

Feature F2. A grouping storage area (a combined data area 81c, a mode buffer 145) for storing the grouping data grouped by the grouping means,
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the grouping data setting unit sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage unit.

  According to the feature F2, the grouping data is stored in the grouping storage area, read out from the grouping storage area as needed, and set in the setting storage means. This allows grouped data to be used for multiple frames.

  Feature F3. The grouping unit groups the plurality of types of image data, when the plurality of types of image data to be grouped are to be set in the setting storage unit, and the grouping is performed after the grouping. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein image data is stored in the grouping storage area as the grouping data.

  According to the feature F3, when a plurality of types of image data to be grouped are to be set in the setting storage unit, the grouping is performed on the plurality of types of image data, and as grouping data It is stored in the grouping storage area. As a result, it is not necessary to set processing timings for grouping independently.

Feature F4. The first display effect and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen increase as the display effect over the display period for a plurality of frames, or the image to the storage means for setting A second display effect is set in which the processing load of the display control means when setting data is larger than the individual image displayed in the first display effect, and a second individual image is displayed,
The grouping unit performs the grouping in a period in which a process for displaying an image of a frame included in the first display effect is performed, and the image data after the grouping is used as the grouping data. Stored in the grouping storage area,
The grouping data setting unit may execute the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area during a period in which processing for displaying an image of a frame included in the second display effect is performed. The gaming machine according to feature F2 or F3 characterized by setting in the setting storage means.

  According to the feature F4, grouping data is created in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively small, and the grouping data is used in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively large. As a result, the processing load of the display control means can be distributed by using the grouping data.

Feature F5. The first display effect and the second display effect in which the processing load on the display control means increases when setting the image data in the setting storage means as the display effect over the display period for a plurality of frames , Is set,
The grouping unit performs the grouping in a period in which a process for displaying an image of a frame included in the first display effect is performed, and the image data after the grouping is used as the grouping data. Stored in the grouping storage area,
The grouping data setting unit may execute the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area during a period in which processing for displaying an image of a frame included in the second display effect is performed. The gaming machine according to feature F2 or F3 characterized by setting in the setting storage means.

  According to the feature F5, grouping data is created in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively small, and the grouping data is used in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively large. As a result, the processing load of the display control means can be distributed by using the grouping data.

Feature F6. The display control means sets the image data to create drawing data for one frame in the setting storage means, and outputs the image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. One frame of image is displayed on the display screen,
The frame of at least the start timing in the second display effect includes a plurality of types of common individual images displayed in the frame of the end timing in the first display effect,
When the drawing data corresponding to the frame of the end timing is created based on the setting of the image data corresponding to the common individual image in the setting storage means, the grouping means may be common to each other. Image data corresponding to the individual images are grouped and stored as the grouped data in the grouping storage area,
The grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means when the drawing data corresponding to the frame of the start timing is created. The gaming machine according to feature F4 or F5, characterized in that

  According to the feature F6, even if a plurality of common individual images are displayed using grouping data in the frame of the start timing in the second display effect, the grouping data is the end timing in the first display effect Since it is created based on the frame of, the display between both frames corresponds. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Feature F7. The gaming machine according to Feature F6, wherein the plurality of types of common individual images are individual images forming an image for background.

  According to the feature F7, since the grouped data is applied to the image for background, even if a common individual image used in different frames is displayed, it becomes less noticeable and the player feels uncomfortable. While suppressing being held, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature F8. The display control means creates the drawing data in the storage means for setting by setting the image data, and outputs the image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display screen. It is configured to display an image of the frame,
A plurality of display modes are set in which the display modes of the images on the display screen are different from each other,
Operation receiving means (operation device for effect 48) for receiving an operation by the player;
Display mode switching means (function to execute an operation generated command corresponding process in the display CPU 131), which sequentially switches the display mode based on the operation accepted by the operation accepting means;
Equipped with
The grouping unit groups the plurality of types of image data used to display an image of one frame included in the display mode in at least a specific display mode among the plurality of display modes. Storing the grouped image data as the grouping data in the group storage area,
The grouping data setting means is stored in the grouping storage area when the drawing data corresponding to the frame immediately after the switching is created when the display mode is switched to the specific display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F2 to F7, wherein the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is set in the setting storage unit.

  According to the feature F8, since a plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of the images on the display screen are different from each other are set, diversification of the display modes is achieved. In this case, grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is created, and when drawing data corresponding to a frame immediately after the switching is generated when grouping data is switched to the specific display mode, grouping data is generated. Is used. As a result, even if switching to the specific display mode is performed at any timing based on the operation at any timing to the operation accepting unit, the processing load at that time can be reduced.

Feature F9. In each of the plurality of types of display modes, a display effect is set in which the fluctuation individual image is variably displayed in front of the background image over a period of a plurality of frames,
The plurality of types of display modes are set such that at least the types of background images are different from each other.
The gaming machine according to Feature F8, wherein the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is a group of plural types of image data for displaying a background image of the specific display mode.

  According to the feature F9, even if the switching to the specific display mode is performed at any timing based on the operation at any timing to the operation accepting means, by using the grouping data for the background image, Processing load can be reduced. In addition, even if switching to the specific display mode occurs while the fluctuation display of the fluctuation individual image is being performed, the grouping data corresponds to the background image as described above, so the fluctuation of the fluctuation individual image Only the background image can be switched with the processing load suppressed while maintaining the display.

Feature F10. The plurality of display modes are set so that at least the types of background images are different from each other, and the types of the individual images for variation are also different from each other.
Furthermore, in the variable display mode of the individual image for fluctuation, after the variable image for fluctuation is relatively displayed in a low identification mode which is relatively hard to identify, the high discrimination of the individual image for fluctuation is relatively easy to identify It includes an aspect that is variably displayed in the aspect,
It is a case where it is switched to the specific display mode in a situation where the individual image for change is changed and displayed in the low identification mode, and the drawing data corresponding to a frame immediately after the change is created. Adjustment unit immediately after mode switching to cause the grouping storage unit to set the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode stored in the grouping storage area without changing the type of the individual image for setting (display A game machine according to feature F9, characterized in that the CPU 131 is equipped with a function to execute operation processing for display mode background and symbol operation processing in the CPU 131.

  According to the feature F10, when switching to the specific display mode in a situation where the variation individual image is variably displayed in the low identification mode, grouping data is used for the background image and the variation individual image is up to that point The data set in the display mode is used. Thus, the processing load when switching to the specific display mode can be reduced. Also, in the low discrimination mode, in the situation where the fluctuation individual image is displayed in a variable manner, the identification of the fluctuation individual image is low, so the type of the fluctuation individual image is switched to one corresponding to the specific display mode as described above. Even if not, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature F11. When the individual image is displayed on the display screen, the individual image includes an effect image that is displayed in a state in which the color information of the overlapping individual images is reflected on the back side,
The game machine according to any one of the features F1 to F8, wherein the plurality of types of image data grouped by the grouping unit include image data corresponding to the effect image.

  According to the feature F11, a plurality of types of effect images can be used individually, and can also be used in a state in which the plurality of types of effect images are grouped.

Feature F12. When the grouping unit groups the plurality of types of image data, grouping data is performed by using a part of the plurality of types of image data as reference image data and the remaining as the dependent image data. Create
When the grouping data setting means sets the grouping data in the setting storage means, the reference image data and the dependent image subordinate to the reference image data are designated as the parameter information specified for the reference image data. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F11, wherein the gaming machine is set in the setting storage means in a state of being applied to data.

  According to the feature F12, when parameter information is set in the reference image data when handling multiple types of image data, it is also applied to the dependent image data, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F13. The display storage means includes a plurality of types of front-side image data (image data PD39 to PD42) used to display the front-side image included in the image for one frame and the image for the one frame A plurality of types of rear side image data (image data PD43 to PD45) used to display the rear side image included in the image of the subsequent frame are stored in advance,
The grouping unit creates grouping data by performing grouping on the plurality of types of front side image data,
The grouping data setting unit
The plurality of types of rear side image data are set in the setting storage means, and the grouping data to which parameter information is applied such that a part of the front side image is not displayed is the plurality of types of rear side image data. Duplicate setting means (function of executing the processing of step S4002 to step S4005 in the VDP 76) set to overlap in front of the side image data;
Frame switching means (function of executing the process of step S4008 in VDP 76) that causes the setting by the overlap setting means to widen the non-display range over a display period for a plurality of frames;
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F12, comprising:

  According to the feature F13, the wipe effect can be performed while reducing the processing load.

Feature F14. The display control means
Setting object grasping means (function of executing the process of step S3402 in the VDP 76) for grasping image data to be set into the setting storage means;
Deriving means for deriving parameter information for determining the setting mode in the case of setting the image data to the setting storage means for the image data grasped by the setting object grasping means (performing the process of step S3303 in the display CPU 72 Function),
Image data setting unit configured to set the image data grasped by the setting object grasping unit in the setting storage unit in a state where the parameter information derived by the derivation unit is applied (function to execute processing of step S2205 in VDP 76 )When,
Equipped with
The game according to any one of the features F1 to F13, wherein the grouping unit is configured to group a plurality of types of image data in a state in which the parameter information derived by the derivation unit is applied. Machine.

  According to the feature F14, since parameter information is already applied to a plurality of types of image data in a grouped state, when using the grouping data, the plurality of types of image data included in it are individually There is no need to apply parameter information. This reduces the processing load.

Feature F15. The image data includes image data of an object which is three-dimensional information for displaying an image,
The display control means
Arrangement means for arranging the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the process of step S605 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for setting the drawing data in the setting storage means using projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint (step S610 to step in VDP 135 And a function of executing the processing of S613),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F14, wherein the grouping unit is to group data after the plurality of types of image data are projected on the projection plane.

  According to the feature F15, in the case of using grouping data, it is not necessary to perform geometry calculation or rendering for a plurality of types of image data included in it. This reduces the processing load.

  The invention of the feature F group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data in which a polygon to which a texture is attached is projected onto a plane from a desired viewpoint is created. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, the update of the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be performed in a predetermined update cycle, and the drawing data for one frame is created in time for the update cycle, and the display device Signal output needs to be done. For example, in a configuration in which only one frame buffer for creating drawing data is set for the VRAM, the drawing data is created within the range of one update cycle and a signal output based on the drawing data is generated. It needs to be completed. Also, for example, in a configuration in which a plurality of frame buffers are set, in a situation where signal output is performed based on drawing data created in one frame buffer, the next update cycle is supported for the other frame buffers. It is necessary to create drawing data.

  In any of the above configurations, in order to simultaneously display individually defined individual images in the display screen, the coordinates and the size of each individual image are specified, and further, drawing of all the individual images in the frame buffer is performed. If it is necessary to do so, the processing load required to create drawing data for one frame increases. If the processing load exceeds the update cycle, processing drops may occur.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F15, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. ~ E8, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19: May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 133) storing in advance a plurality of types of image data including image data of an object which is three-dimensional information;
Arrangement means for arranging the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the process of step S605 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for setting drawing data in setting storage means using projection data created by projecting the image data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint (steps S610 to S613 of VDP 135 Function to execute processing),
Image signal output means (display circuit 155) for displaying an image of one frame on the display screen based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In the gaming machine provided with
The object includes a connection object having a plurality of partial objects sandwiching a predetermined connection, and capable of displacing relative positions of the partial objects with respect to the connection. ,
Furthermore, as the connection object used when displaying special characters of the same type, a plurality of types of special connection objects (connection objects PC35 and PC36) having different positions where the connection parts are set are the display storage means Pre-stored in
Connection object switching means for switching the connection object used when displaying the special character to any of the plurality of types of special connection objects (function to execute processing of step S2007, step S2016, step S2023 in display CPU 131 A game machine characterized by comprising

  According to the feature G1, one of a plurality of special connection objects is used to display special characters of the same type. And these multiple types of special connection objects differ in the set position of the connection part. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the special connection object alone as compared to the configuration in which the connection parts are collectively provided with a single special connection object, and reading of one special connection object It is possible to do well. Further, by providing a plurality of types of special connection objects as described above at the development stage of the gaming machine, it becomes easy to adjust the movement of the special character at the time of development of the gaming machine.

  From the above, it becomes possible to handle the linked object well.

Feature G2. The plurality of types of special connection objects include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36),
The connected object switching means is configured to switch an object for displaying the special character from the first connected object to the second connected object when a specific display switching timing is reached,
The arrangement unit arranges the second connected object together with the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space in a situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character. Providing overlapping arrangement means (function of executing the processing of step S2102 and step S2103 in VDP 135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing; The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that

  According to the feature G2, at the specific display switching timing, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object, and the movement of the special character is changed. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing prior to the specific display switching timing. Thereby, at the specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute the process for starting the arrangement of the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the second connected object already arranged is updated. You can do it. Therefore, compared with the structure which performs both arrangement | positioning process and update process of a 2nd connection object at specific display switching timing, reduction of a processing load is achieved.

Feature G3. Parameter updating means for updating parameter information including at least information on coordinates and angles of objects arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in order to change the display content of the image (processing of steps S2105, S2113, and S2119 in VDP 135 Have the ability to perform
The processing load for updating the parameter information of the object is smaller than the processing load for starting placement of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space,
Furthermore, the plurality of types of special connection objects for special purpose include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36),
The connected object switching means is configured to switch an object for displaying the special character from the first connected object to the second connected object when a specific display switching timing is reached,
The arrangement unit arranges the second connected object together with the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space in a situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character. Providing overlapping arrangement means (function of executing the processing of step S2102 and step S2103 in VDP 135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing; The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that

  According to the feature G3, at the specific display switching timing, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object, and the movement of the special character is changed. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing prior to the specific display switching timing. Thereby, at the specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute the process for starting the arrangement of the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the second connected object already arranged is updated. You can do it. Therefore, the processing load at a specific display switching timing can be reduced.

  Feature G4. The parameter updating unit is configured to arrange the first connected object and the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein parameter information of the second connected object is updated as well as the connected object.

  According to the feature G4, not only the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space but also the parameter information of the second connected object is updated prior to the specific display switching timing. As a result, when the specific display switching timing comes, it becomes possible to use the parameter information updated so far, and the processing load at that timing can be reduced.

Feature G5. It has a derivation unit (function to execute arithmetic processing for connected objects in the display CPU 131) for deriving parameter information of an object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the display content of the image to be updated,
The parameter updating means updates the parameter information derived by the deriving means as parameter information of an object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the first connected object and the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space. The parameter information determined for the first connected object by the deriving means at a timing prior to the specific display switching timing in a situation where both of the two connected objects are arranged, the first connected object And updating the parameter information of both of the second connected objects.

  According to the feature G5, in the configuration having the configuration of the feature G4 and in which the parameter information of the second connected object is updated even before the specific display switching timing, as the parameter information for the second connected object, [1] Parameter information of connected objects is used. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the parameter information is individually applied to each of the first connected object and the second connected object at a timing prior to the specific display switching timing, it is earlier than the specific display switching timing. The processing load at timing can be reduced.

  Feature G6. The overlapping arrangement means arranges the second connected object such that the second connected object is arranged at the same coordinates as the coordinates at which the first connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the feature G6, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing, the second connected object is arranged at the same coordinates as the first connected object. The processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which designation of coordinates is individually performed on the second connected objects.

Feature G7. Transparency value setting unit (in VDP 135) which sets the object as either a display target on the display screen or a non-display target by adjusting the transparency value information applied to the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space Function to execute the processing of step S2104, step S2112, and step S2118),
The connected object switching means sets the first linked object as the display target and the second connected object as the non-displayed transparency value information in the connected objects at a timing before the specific display switching timing. While being set, the transparent value information in which the first connected object becomes the non-display target and the second connected object becomes the display mode is set to these connected objects after the specific display switching timing. A game machine according to any one of features G2 to G6, which is characterized in that.

  According to the feature G7, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged before the specific display switching timing, switching of the connected object to be displayed before and after the specific display switching timing is applied to each connected object. It is performed only by switching the transparent value information. As a result, the processing load relating to the switching of the connection object to be displayed can be reduced.

Feature G8. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of frames, a first specific display effect (first effect period) and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen are larger than the first specific display effect. Alternatively, the second specific display effect (second effect in which the processing load in the case of setting the image data to the setting storage means is larger than the individual image displayed in the first specific display effect is displayed. Period) and are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect.

  According to the feature G8, since switching from the first specific display effect to the second specific display effect is performed at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern that the processing load may extremely increase at the timing. Since the configuration such as G2 is provided, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature G9. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of frames, a first specific display effect (first effect period), and a second specification in which the processing load in the case of setting the image data in the setting storage means becomes large Display effect (second effect period) is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect.

  According to the feature G9, since the switching from the first specific display effect to the second specific display effect is performed at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern that the processing load may extremely increase at the timing. Since the configuration such as G2 is provided, the processing load can be reduced.

  The invention of the feature G group is effective to the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, one having a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, is known. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object which is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is pasted to the object. Drawing data is created by projecting an object to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, as an object for a character, a connected object is set which has a plurality of partial objects sandwiching a predetermined connected portion and can displace relative positions of these partial objects with reference to the connected portion. By doing so, the movement of the character can be made smooth. However, in connection with the connection object having the connection portion as described above, creation at the game machine development stage becomes complicated compared to an object without the connection portion. Under such circumstances, if it is desired to change the movement of the character in the process of developing a gaming machine, if the connected object is re-created from the beginning, the development period will be prolonged. On the other hand, if the connecting part is set to correspond to all movements from the beginning, the data capacity of the connected object will increase accordingly.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features G1 to G9, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, the above features E1 ~ E8, the above-mentioned features F1 to F15, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, the configuration limited by any one of the following features L1 to L19 are applied May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) configured by arranging a large number of dots in a matrix.
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
By setting the image data in setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is generated. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image of one frame on the display screen based on output to the display means;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display control means
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to individual images so that a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen in the image for one frame (performs the processing of steps S2804 to S2805 in VDP 76 Function to execute the processing of steps S3103 to S3104 in the VDP 76),
With respect to data of the unit setting area where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the image data of the overlapping portion of the back individual image is reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front individual image Duplicate reflecting means (a function to execute a first effect addition process in the VDP 76, a function to execute a second effect addition process in the VDP 76) for achieving the above state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, when a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction in an image of one frame, the image data of the overlapping portion of the back individual image is reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front individual image Has a function to display in the As a result, when the front side individual image is displayed, it can be displayed in a state in which the color or the like of the back side individual image is reflected, and it is possible to perform display of an image preferable in appearance.

Feature H2. The image data has many unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
The duplicate reflection means is
Arithmetic processing execution means (function to execute processing of step S2904 in VDP 76, function of executing processing of step S3206 in VDP 76, using predetermined numerical processing of the unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images) Function to execute processing),
Setting processing execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S2905 in VDP 76, VDP 76, setting the data of the calculation result of the calculation processing in the unit setting area corresponding to the mutually overlapping unit image data in the setting storage means A function of executing the process of step S3207 in
The gaming machine according to feature H1, comprising:

  According to the feature H2, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described in the feature H1 by executing the arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the portion overlapping in the depth direction.

Feature H3. Each unit setting area is configured to be able to set numerical information within the range up to the limit value, and the display control means corresponds to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. The image signal is output so that a bright color is displayed on a dot,
The arithmetic processing execution means executes, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, an addition process of adding numerical value information of unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature H3, when an image for one frame is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage unit, the color corresponding to the unit setting area where the numerical information of a large numerical value is set is brighter Is displayed, the complexity of display control of the dots can be suppressed. In the configuration, in the unit setting area where the result of adding the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the portion overlapping in the depth direction is set, the unit setting area is larger in numerical value than the image data of the front individual image is set. Numeric information is set. Therefore, it becomes possible to display the image in which the color and the brightness of the back individual image are reflected at the overlapping portion. Thus, while using the relationship between the numerical information set in the unit setting area and the image display corresponding thereto, as described in the above feature H1 using the relatively simple arithmetic processing of addition processing. Excellent effects can be achieved.

  Feature H4. When the image data of the overlapping part of the back individual images is reflected on the image data of the overlapping part of the front individual images by the overlapping reflection means, the ratio of the reflection of the back image data is reduced The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H3 comprising reflection reduction means (function of executing the processing of step S3202 to step S3204 in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature H4, it is possible to reflect the image data of the near side individual image in a state where the ratio of reflecting the image data of the back side individual image is reduced. Thereby, for example, when the image data of the back side individual image is reflected as it is, in a case where the display of the front side individual image can not be satisfactorily performed, the ratio of reflecting the image data of the back side individual image is reduced. It becomes possible to favorably display the front side individual image in a state in which the side individual image is reflected.

Feature H5. The image data has many unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
The duplicate setting means
Arithmetic processing execution means (function of executing processing of step S3206 in VDP 76) for executing predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical value information of each unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images;
Setting processing execution means (a function for executing the process of step S3207 in VDP 76) for setting data of the calculation result of the calculation process in unit setting areas corresponding to the mutually overlapping unit image data in the setting storage means ,
Reflection reduction means (function of executing the processing of step S3202 to step S3204 in the VDP 76) for reducing the numerical information of the back individual image among the unit image data to be subjected to the calculation processing;
The gaming machine according to feature H1, comprising:

  According to the feature H5, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described in the feature H1 by executing the calculation process using the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the portion overlapping in the depth direction.

  Further, it is possible to reflect on the image data of the near side individual image in a state where the ratio of reflecting the image data of the far side individual image is reduced. Thereby, for example, when the image data of the back side individual image is reflected as it is, when the display of the front side individual image can not be satisfactorily performed, the ratio of reflecting the image data of the back side individual image is reduced. It becomes possible to favorably display the front individual image in a state in which the individual image is reflected.

  In particular, since the target for reducing numerical information in the arithmetic processing is not the front side individual image but the back side individual image, the tone of the front side individual image positively added to the front side of the back side individual image is not suppressed. , Can reflect the back side individual image.

Feature H6. Each unit setting area is configured to be able to set numerical information within the range up to the limit value, and the display control means corresponds to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. The image signal is output so that a bright color is displayed on a dot,
The arithmetic processing execution means is configured to execute addition processing of adding numerical value information of unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images as the predetermined arithmetic processing,
The gaming machine according to the feature H5, wherein the reflection reduction means reduces numerical information of the back individual image among the unit image data to be added to the addition process at a predetermined ratio.

  According to the feature H6, when an image of one frame is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage unit, the color corresponding to the unit setting area where the numerical information of a large numerical value is set is brighter Is displayed, the complexity of display control of the dots can be suppressed. In the configuration, in the unit setting area where the result of adding the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the portion overlapping in the depth direction is set, the unit setting area is larger in numerical value than the image data of the front individual image is set. Numeric information is set. Therefore, it becomes possible to display the image in which the color and the brightness of the back individual image are reflected at the overlapping portion. Thus, while using the relationship between the numerical information set in the unit setting area and the image display corresponding thereto, as described in the above feature H1 using the relatively simple arithmetic processing of addition processing. Excellent effects can be achieved.

  However, in the configuration in which the addition processing of numerical information is performed as described above, it is assumed that the numerical information of the addition processing result exceeds the limit numerical value of the unit setting area, which causes the display of the individual image on the front side It can not be done well. On the other hand, it is possible to reflect on the image data of the near side individual image in the state where the numerical information of the unit image data of the back side individual image is reduced at a predetermined ratio. As a result, it is suppressed that the numerical information of the addition processing result exceeds the limit value of the unit setting area, and it is possible to favorably display the near side individual image in a state in which the back side individual image is reflected. Become.

Feature H7. The display storage unit stores in advance transparency value adjustment data (partial addition data PD19) in which a transparency value is set in correspondence with each unit image data of the front side individual image,
The reflection reduction means is set in the data for adjusting the transparency value for each of the image data of the front individual image and the unit image data for which the arithmetic processing is performed in the image data of the rear individual image. The gaming machine according to feature H5 or H6, characterized in that each transparent value is applied.

  According to the feature H7, when reducing the ratio of reflecting the back side individual image, it is sufficient to read out the data for adjusting the transparency value from the storage means for display and apply it to the image data of the back side individual image The complexity of the process for reducing the ratio can be reduced.

Feature H8. Coordinate specifying means (a function for executing calculation processing for a second effect effect in the display CPU 72) for specifying coordinates when setting the image data in the setting storage means,
The reflection reduction means is set in the data for adjusting the transparency value for each of the image data of the front individual image and the unit image data for which the arithmetic processing is performed in the image data of the rear individual image. In the feature H7, the data for adjusting the transparency value is set with respect to the coordinate specified in the near side individual image by the coordinate specifying means so that each transparent value is applied. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature H8, when reducing the ratio of reflecting the back side individual image, the data for adjusting the transparency value is read out from the storage means for display, and further the data for adjusting the transparency value is used as the image data of the front side individual image Since it is sufficient to set the coordinate in the same coordinate as the coordinate to be set, the complication of the process for reducing the ratio can be suppressed.

  Feature H9. The front side individual image is associated with numerical value information defining color information as image data, and an effect image (effect image CH2 having a large number of unit image data in which a transparency value to be applied to the numerical value information is set. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature H9, it is possible to satisfactorily display the effect image.

Feature H10. The effect image is used to produce a visual effect on a predetermined base image (character CH1),
The game according to the feature H9, wherein the display storage means stores the image data of the base image (sprite data PD16) and the image data of the effect image (effect data PD17) separately. Machine.

  According to the feature H10, when displaying the base image, it is possible to display the base image alone, and also to perform display in a state in which the effect image is applied to the base image.

Feature H11. The unit image data is configured to be associated with numerical information defining color information and to be able to set a transparent value to be applied to the numerical information,
The image data setting means is the transparent corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the near side individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion in the case where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen When no value is set, unit image data of the near side individual image is set in a state where unit image data of the back side individual image is not reflected on the unit setting area of the setting destination,
The overlapping reflection means corresponds to the information to be transmitted to unit image data of the front side individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion when the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen. Unit image data of the back individual image in the unit image data of the near side individual image in a state where the transparent value is applied to the numerical value information with respect to the unit setting area of the setting destination when The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H10, wherein data of a state in which C. is reflected is set.

  According to the feature H11, the determination as to whether or not the image data of the back individual image is to be reflected can be made on the basis of the setting condition of the transparency value to the unit image data of the front individual image, The complexity of the configuration can be suppressed.

  The invention of the feature H group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data in which a polygon to which a texture is attached is projected onto a plane from a desired viewpoint is created. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, as a type of display effect, a smoke screen may be displayed to indicate that an explosion has occurred. In addition, clouds may be displayed to indicate that the weather is cloudy, and rain may be displayed to indicate that the weather is rainy. These individual images are displayed in an auxiliary manner in the background or in front of the character. In this case, if the individual image is displayed irrespective of the background or the color tone of the character, the player may feel discomfort, which is not preferable.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features H1 to H11, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, the above features E1 ~ E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the features limited to any one of the following features L1 to L19 are applied May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance in association with the individual images individually displayed on the display screen;
Setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) in which drawing data is set using the image data;
Deriving means (function to execute task processing in display CPU 72) for deriving parameter information including coordinate information of a setting destination of the image data to the setting storage means;
The drawing data is created by setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the derivation means, and an image signal according to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (VDP 76) for displaying an image of one frame on the display screen based on
In the gaming machine provided with
The derivation means is
When there is image data for which the derivation of the parameter information should be newly started, the derivation means for start for executing the derivation start processing for newly starting the derivation of the parameter information for the image data (in the display CPU 72 A function of executing the processing of step S2312 to step S2314),
Updating means for executing updating processing for updating the parameter information according to the change in the display content of the image data for which the derivation start processing has already been completed (step S2315 to step S2317 in the display CPU 72 Function to execute processing),
Corresponds to an individual image that is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing at which the derivation start process is executed, but may be included in the display target on the display screen in the subsequent frames A preliminary derivation unit (function of executing the processing of step S2307 to step S2311 in the display CPU 72) for executing the derivation start processing on the processed image data;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, according to the parameter information derived by the deriving means, the image data is set in the storage means for setting to create the drawing data, and the image signal is outputted to the display means according to the drawing data. Thus, an image of one frame is displayed on the display screen.

  In the above configuration, when there is image data for which derivation of parameter information should be newly started, the derivation means starts derivation of parameter information by executing derivation start processing for the image data, and thereafter At the image update timing in (1), the parameter information that has started its derivation may be updated. As a result, when a predetermined individual image is displayed over a display period of a plurality of frames, it is not necessary to repeatedly perform the process of setting parameter information anew on the image data of the individual image, and it has already been set. It is sufficient to repeat the updating of the parameter information that is being

  In addition, although it is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing to execute the derivation start process, it corresponds to an individual image that may be included in the display target on the display screen in the subsequent frame. A derivation start process may be performed on image data. This makes it possible to finish the derivation start processing for individual images outside the display screen in advance. For example, when there are a large number of individual images for which display on the display screen is started, It is possible to distribute the execution timing of the derivation start process so as to avoid the simultaneous execution of the derivation start process for the image data.

  As described above, the processing load for displaying an image can be reduced.

  Feature I2. The preliminary derivation means corresponds to an individual image which is included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing at which the derivation start process is executed but the derivation start process is not yet completed. Priority means within the display range that causes the derivation start process to be executed with priority over individual images that are not included in the display target on the display screen for the processed image data (display CPU 72 The gaming machine according to feature I1, comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2309 to step S2310).

  According to the feature I2, in the configuration provided with the feature I1 and capable of executing the derivation start process on the image data of the individual image outside the display screen in advance, the display target on the display screen rather than the image data In the image data corresponding to the individual image which is included in the above but the derivation start process is not yet completed, the derivation start process is preferentially executed. As a result, in the configuration in which the execution timing of the derivation start process is dispersed as described above, the occurrence of the inconvenience that the individual image which is supposed to be displayed is not displayed can be suppressed.

  Feature I3. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing at which the derivation start processing is performed, but is included in the display target on the display screen in the subsequent frame When the process for starting the derivation is performed on image data corresponding to a possible individual image, the derivation start is prioritized from the image data of the individual image at the earlier timing to be displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, further comprising: priority means (function to execute the process of step S2311 in the display CPU 72) outside the display range for performing the process for processing.

  According to the feature I3, when there are a plurality of individual images outside the display screen but possibly included in the display target in the subsequent frame, the timing at which the display target on the display screen becomes earlier is on the side Since the derivation start process is preferentially executed from the image data of the individual image, the processing load can be favorably dispersed.

Feature I4. The drawing means outputs, to the display control means, drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information specifying image data of an individual image included in an image for one frame and parameter information derived about the image data. Instruction means (function of executing the process of step S408 in the display CPU 72);
The display control means is configured to set image data to the storage means for setting according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction information, and create drawing data for a frame corresponding to the drawing instruction information. ,
Furthermore, when the drawing instruction unit outputs the drawing instruction information corresponding to the image for one frame, the image processing unit starts the derivation of the image data of the individual image which is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I3, wherein the drawing instruction information is output so as not to include information corresponding to the image data even if the processing is completed.

  According to the feature I4, even if derivation of parameter information is started in advance by the derivation means, only the image data of the individual image in the display screen is provided in the drawing instruction information output to the display control means Information corresponding to image data of individual images outside the display screen is not provided. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the drawing instruction information output to the display control means. In addition, the display control means does not need to determine whether or not the designated individual image is within the display screen, and even if the determination is not performed, the display control for the individual image outside the display screen is useless. There is no need to do it.

Feature I5. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed at a predetermined position in the range of the back image and in front of the back image, and one frame of the back image It includes a wide range rear view image set wider than the display range.
The wide-range back image is characterized by including display changing means (function to execute the processing of step S2304 in the display CPU 72) for changing the display range for one frame to a position different from the display range in the previous frame. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

  According to the feature I5, since the display range for one frame may be changed, it is possible to suppress the unification of the display effect and to increase the degree of attention to the image. In this case, the configuration for the feature I1 is provided, and the derivation start processing is executed in advance for individual images outside the display screen, so even if the display range for one frame is switched, Parameter information of each individual image can be derived well.

Feature I6. It has operation accepting means (operation device for effect 48) for accepting an operation by a player,
The gaming machine according to Feature I5, wherein the display changing unit changes the display range of the one frame based on the operation receiving unit receiving the operation.

  According to the feature I6, since the display range of one frame may be changed based on the operation to the operation receiving means by the player, the uniformity of the display effect is suppressed and the attention to the image is increased. Is possible. However, in the configuration in which the display range for one frame is changed based on the operation to the operation receiving means, it is difficult to predict the timing of the change. In this case, the configuration for the feature I1 is provided, and the derivation start processing is executed in advance for individual images outside the display screen, so even if the display range for one frame is switched, Parameter information of each individual image can be derived well.

  Feature I7. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing at which the derivation start processing is performed, but is included in the display target on the display screen in the subsequent frame The gaming machine according to the feature I5 or I6, wherein the determination as to whether or not there is a possible individual image is made on the basis of the display range for the one frame at that time.

  According to the feature I7, with reference to the set display range, an individual image to be a target of derivation of parameter information is grasped. Thereby, in the configuration in which the display range for one frame is switched, the execution timing of the derivation start process is dispersed according to the currently set display range, and the dispersion can be performed favorably.

Feature I8. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the rear image,
And operation receiving means (operation device for effect 48) for receiving an operation by the player.
Display changing means (function of executing the process of step S2304 in the display CPU 72) for changing the content of the back image based on the fact that the operation receiving means receives the operation.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I4, comprising:

  According to the feature I8, since the content of the back image may be changed based on the operation of the operation receiving means by the player, the uniformity of the display effect is suppressed and the attention to the image can be increased. It becomes. However, in the configuration in which the content of the back image is changed based on the operation to the operation receiving unit, it is difficult to predict the timing at which the change occurs. In this case, the configuration of the feature I1 is provided, and the derivation start processing is executed in advance for individual images outside the display screen, so even if the content of the back image is switched, The parameter information of the individual image can be derived well.

  Feature I9. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing at which the derivation start processing is performed, but is included in the display target on the display screen in the subsequent frame The gaming machine according to Feature I8, wherein the determination as to whether or not there is a possible individual image is made on the basis of the content of the back image at that time.

  According to the feature I9, an individual image to be a target for starting derivation of parameter information is grasped based on the content of the set rear surface image. Thus, in the configuration in which the content of the rear surface image is switched, distribution of the execution timing of the derivation start process is performed according to the content of the rear surface image currently set, and the distribution can be performed favorably.

Feature I10. A derivation storage means (work RAM 73) used when the derivation means derives the parameter information;
When the image data for which the derivation of the parameter information is to be newly started exists as the derivation start process, the derivation means for start is used for deriving the parameter information of the image data. At least a search process (step S2312 in the display CPU 72) for searching an area in the storage means and an area initialization process (step S2313 in the display CPU 72) for initializing the area secured based on the search result The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I9, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature I10, in the derivation start process, not only the process of setting the parameter information, but also the process of searching the area used for deriving the parameter information and the area secured based on the search result is initialized. The processing load is increased as compared to the update processing. On the other hand, since it is possible to provide the configuration of the feature I1 and distribute the execution timing of the derivation start process, it is possible to disperse the processing load.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature I group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data in which a polygon to which a texture is attached is projected onto a plane from a desired viewpoint is created. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, the update of the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be performed in a predetermined update cycle, and the drawing data for one frame is created in time for the update cycle, and the display device Signal output needs to be done. Further, at the time of creation of the drawing data, calculation for specifying coordinates and a size is performed for each of the individual images simultaneously displayed on the display screen, and the drawing data is created based on the calculation result.

  In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be simultaneously calculated increases. And, if there is a local increase in the processing load, there is a concern that a processing drop will occur.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features I1 to I10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 ~ E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features H1 to H11, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19 May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) configured by arranging a large number of dots in a matrix.
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Drawing data creation means (function of executing the processing of step S2205 in VDP 76) for creating drawing data in the setting storage means using the image data;
Image signal output means (display circuit 94) for displaying an image of one frame on the display screen based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In the gaming machine provided with
Data adjustment means (scaler) for adjusting the data size of drawing data created in the setting storage means to create adjusted data, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the adjusted data from the image signal output means 97),
Change effect executing means (a setting process for a zoom-in effect in the VDP 76 that causes at least one of enlargement and reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen to be performed by changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means) And the ability to perform
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the size change of the individual image displayed on the display screen is performed by changing the adjustment magnification when adjusting the data size of the drawing data and creating the adjusted data. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the magnification adjustment is individually performed on each of the image data set in the setting storage unit, it is possible to perform the size change presentation while reducing the processing load. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to perform size change production favorably.

  Feature J2. The gaming machine according to the feature J1, wherein the drawing data creation unit creates the drawing data in the same size regardless of the adjustment magnification when creating the drawing data in the setting storage unit.

  According to the feature J2, the drawing data creation unit may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or content of the size change effect, and therefore, while suppressing the complication of the process relating to the creation of the drawing data, It is possible to perform a size change production.

Feature J3. An initial adjustment magnification is set as the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment unit,
In the situation where the data adjustment means is set to the initial adjustment magnification, the adjustment is performed such that an image according to the entire data of the drawing data is displayed in a state of being adjusted to the resolution of the display screen The game machine according to feature J1 or J2, characterized in that data creation is performed.

  According to the feature J3, by using the configuration for performing resolution adjustment corresponding to the display screen on the created drawing data, the excellent effects as described in the feature J1 and the like can be exhibited.

  Feature J4. The change effect execution means changes the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means to a magnification for enlargement larger than the initial adjustment magnification, thereby the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image displayed on the display screen. A game machine according to feature J3, comprising an execution means for enlargement (function of executing the process of step S4401 in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature J4, the resizing effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image is performed based on the initial adjustment magnification. Thereby, the drawing data creation means may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or the content of the size change presentation. Therefore, it is possible to perform the size change presentation while suppressing the complication of the process related to the creation of the drawing data.

  Feature J5. The change effect execution means is smaller than the enlargement magnification within the range from the initial adjustment magnification to the enlargement magnification in a situation where the size alteration effect corresponding to the enlargement is being performed by the enlargement execution means. A reduction executing means (function to execute the process of step S4401 in the VDP 76) for performing the size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen by changing to the magnification The gaming machine according to the feature J4 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature J5, after the adjustment magnification is set to a predetermined enlargement magnification, by changing it to the initial adjustment magnification side, a size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image is performed. Thereby, the drawing data creation means may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or the content of the size change presentation. Therefore, it is possible to perform the size change presentation while suppressing the complication of the process related to the creation of the drawing data.

Feature J6. A power supply unit (power supply and launch control device 57) which is connected to an external power supply and supplies necessary operation power in the gaming machine;
Initial setting means (function of executing the process of step S305 in the display CPU 72) for setting the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means to the initial adjustment magnification based on the start of supply of operation power from the power supply unit;
A game machine according to any one of the features J3 to J5, which comprises:

  According to the feature J6, in the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment unit, for example, when the power ON operation of the gaming machine is performed and the supply of the operating power from the power supply unit is started. The adjustment magnification is set to the initial adjustment magnification. This makes it possible to set the initial adjustment magnification well.

  Feature J7. When the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means is changed from the initial adjustment magnification to perform the size change effect, the magnification restoration means (flag for enlargement in the VDP 76 is restored to the initial adjustment magnification after the end of the size change effect The gaming machine according to any one of the features J3 to J6, which has a function of clearing

  According to the feature J7, after the end of the size change effect, it is possible to display an image according to the resolution of the display screen.

  Feature J8. The data adjustment means creates the adjusted data based on performing linear interpolation processing (processing of step S4502 and step S4506 in the display circuit 94) on the drawing data. The gaming machine according to any one of J7.

  According to the feature J8, it is possible to obtain excellent effects as described for the feature J1 and the like by using linear interpolation processing.

  Feature J9. The change effect execution means specifies the specific individual image among the plurality of individual images included in the image for one frame when the size change effect is performed, so that the whole is included in the display screen. Provided with individual adjustment means (function to execute the processing of step S4308 to step S4312 in the display CPU 72) for adjusting parameter information when the image data of the individual image is set in the setting storage means by the drawing data creation means A game machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, which is characterized in that:

  In the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, it is assumed that the size change is performed to a specific individual image that is desired to be displayed in its entirety and a part is arranged outside the display screen Be done. On the other hand, according to the feature J9, the parameter information in the case where the image data of the specific individual image is set in the storage means for setting is adjusted such that the specific individual image is entirely included in the display screen. Be done. This makes it possible to display the entire specific individual image on the display screen while achieving the effects described in the feature J1 and the like.

  Feature J10. The change effect executing means is for a specific individual image of a plurality of individual images included in an image for one frame when the size change effect is performed, for one frame when the size change effect is not performed. Individually adjusting parameter information when image data of the specific individual image is set in the storage means for setting by the drawing data generation means so as to be similar to at least one of the size and the position displayed in the image A game machine according to any one of the features J1 to J8, comprising adjustment means (a function of executing the processing of step S4308 to step S4312 in the display CPU 72).

  In the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size is changed to a specific individual image for which at least one of the size and the position is not desired to be changed, and the element that is not desired to be changed is changed. It is assumed that On the other hand, according to the feature J10, the image data of the specific individual image is stored for setting so that at least one of the size and the position of the specific individual image is similar to the case where the size change presentation is not performed. Information of parameters when set to the means is adjusted. Thus, it is possible to maintain the elements that you do not want to change for the specific individual image as they are, while achieving the effects described in the feature J1 and the like.

  Feature J11. The change effect executing means is for a specific individual image of a plurality of individual images included in an image for one frame when the size change effect is performed, for one frame immediately before the size change effect is started Individual adjusting the size and coordinate information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit by the drawing data generation unit so as to be similar to the size and position displayed in the image A game machine according to any one of the features J1 to J8, comprising adjustment means (a function of executing the processing of step S4308 to step S4312 in the display CPU 72).

  In the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size and the position of the specific individual image which is the same as the image of one frame immediately before the size change effect is started. It is assumed that changes will be made. On the other hand, according to the feature J11, the image data of the specific individual image is such that the size and the position of the specific individual image are the same as the image of one frame immediately before the start of the resizing effect. The information of the size and the coordinates when set in the setting storage means is adjusted. As a result, the display mode can be maintained for a specific individual image while achieving the effects described in the feature J1 and the like.

Feature J12. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which the fluctuation individual image is variably displayed in front of the rear image,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J9 to J11, wherein the specific individual image is the fluctuation individual image.

  According to the feature J12, it is possible to suppress the change in the visibility of the individual image for change due to the size change effect.

Feature J13. As display production, reach production which displays the image for the reach in the state where the individual image for the reach is displayed on standby, is included,
The gaming machine according to Feature J12, wherein the specific individual image is an individual image for the reach displayed on standby.

  According to the feature J13, it is possible to suppress fluctuation in the visibility of the individual image for reach along with the size change effect.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature J group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data in which a polygon to which a texture is attached is projected onto a plane from a desired viewpoint is created. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, it is considered possible to diversify display effects by performing display effects for enlarging or reducing an image for one frame. However, it is not preferable that the processing load increases and processing drops occur in order to perform the display effect. On the other hand, for example, the number of individual images to be displayed is intentionally reduced in order to perform the display effect. If measures for simplifying such display contents are taken, it is not possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the display effect.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features J1 to J13, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, the above features E1 ~ E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features H1 to H11, the above features I1 to I10, the following features K1 to K9, and the features limited to any one of the following features L1 to L19 are applied May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data stored in the display storage means;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display storage means stores a plurality of types of compressed moving image data used to reproduce a moving image,
The display control means
Development means (moving picture decoder 93) for expanding any moving picture data into a development area and creating still image data for a plurality of frames of an image corresponding to the moving picture data;
By using still image data of a plurality of frames expanded by the expansion means in the frame order defined in the moving image data, a moving image of an image corresponding to the moving image data is displayed for the plurality of frames Moving image display execution means (function to execute setting processing for moving images in the VDP 76)
Second moving image data (moving image data PD55 for after branch A) after a moving image according to the first moving image data (moving image data PD54 for before branching) is displayed among the plurality of types of moving image data A plurality of moving image effect execution means (function of executing operation processing for moving images in the display CPU 72) for performing a group of display effects having a display period in which the moving image according to is displayed.
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature K1, a group of display effects is performed using at least the first moving image data and the second moving image data, instead of using single moving image data. As a result, for example, the first moving image data or the second moving image data can be commonly used to perform other display effects, and the moving image data is individually generated for each display effect. Compared to the set configuration, the storage capacity required to store moving image data can be reduced. Also, for example, at the start of the group of display effects, processing for expansion is performed on the first moving image data, and the second moving image is displayed while moving image display is being performed using the first moving image data. It becomes possible to execute a process for expansion on data. In this case, the processing load at the time of starting the group of display effects is suppressed, as compared with the configuration in which the development for both moving image data is performed collectively.

  As described above, it is possible to favorably perform display effects using moving image data.

  Feature K2. The display control means includes a means for performing a group of display effects using any one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature K2, one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is commonly used to perform another display effect. As a result, as compared with the configuration in which moving image data is set individually for each display effect, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store moving image data.

  Feature K3. The moving image by the first moving image data corresponds to a series of display effects, and the moving image by the second moving image data is a continuous display effect with respect to a series of display effects by the first moving image data A game machine according to feature K1 or K2 characterized in that it corresponds to

  According to the feature K3, since the first moving image data independently corresponds to a series of display effects, it is possible to perform display effects using only the first moving image data. In this case, by separately preparing the first moving image data and the second moving image data, single moving image data obtained by putting together the first moving image data and the second moving image data is prepared in advance. Compared with a configuration in which the first moving image data is prepared in advance and prepared separately, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of display effects while reducing the storage capacity required to store moving image data. Become.

  Feature K4. When the group of display effects by the plurality of moving image effect execution means is performed, the expansion means performs an expansion process on the second moving image data while moving image display is being performed by the first moving image data. The game machine according to any one of the features K1 to K3 characterized by performing.

  According to the feature K4, the processing for expansion is performed on the second moving image data by using the period in which the moving image display by the first moving image data is performed. As a result, the processing load when starting the group of display effects is reduced, as compared with the configuration in which the expansion processing is performed collectively on both moving image data at the start of the group of display effects.

Feature K5. The plurality of moving picture effect execution means are
First moving image effect executing means (a function of executing the processing of step S4613 to step S4615 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a moving image according to the first moving image data;
A second moving-image effect executing means (a function of executing the processing of step S4617 to step S4619 in the display CPU 72) for displaying the moving image according to the second moving image data after the moving image according to the first moving image data is displayed;
Third moving image effect executing means (step S4620 to step S4620 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a moving image by the third moving image data (moving image data PD56 for B after branching) after the moving image by the first moving image data is displayed Function to execute the process of S4622),
A game machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4, comprising:

  According to the feature K5, the first moving image data can be commonly used in each of the display effect using the second moving image data and the display effect using the third moving image data. Thereby, a single moving image data obtained by putting together the first moving image data and the second moving image data, and a single moving image data obtained by putting together the first moving image data and the third moving image data As compared with the configuration in which is prepared individually, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned plurality of types of display effects while reducing the storage capacity required to store moving image data.

Feature K6. It has operation accepting means (operation device for effect 48) for accepting an operation by a player,
The plurality of moving picture effect execution means is based on the operation reception means being received by the operation reception means in a period during which the first moving picture data is displayed by the moving picture data or in a timing after the moving picture display is completed. , And effect distribution means (a function for executing the process of step S4608 in the display CPU 72) for setting the effect execution target after that to the second moving image effect execution means or the third moving image effect execution means The gaming machine according to feature K5.

  In the configuration in which the moving image display being executed first is branched to a predetermined moving image display or a different moving image display based on an arbitrary operation by the player, since the occurrence of the operation itself is arbitrary, It can not cope with one moving image data. On the other hand, according to the feature K6, the first moving image data is prepared for the moving image display to be executed first, and the second moving image data and the third moving image data for the moving image display to be executed after branching. The moving image data of is prepared. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect in which the contents of the moving image display of the development destination are changed in the middle of the moving image display based on an arbitrary operation by the player.

  Feature K7. When the moving image by the second moving image data or the moving image by the third moving image data is displayed after the moving image by the first moving image data is displayed, the expanding unit is configured to perform the first moving image In the feature K6, the expansion processing is performed only on the first moving image data among the first to third moving image data prior to the start timing of moving image display by data. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K7, the processing load when starting the group of display effects is suppressed, as compared with the configuration in which the development processing is collectively performed on each moving image data at the start of the group of display effects.

  Feature K8. The effect distribution means is in the process of displaying a moving image by the first moving image data, and the operation reception means performs the determination timing at a determination timing before the end timing by the number of frames for determination. When it is specified that the operation is accepted, the object for performing rendering after the moving image display by the first moving image data is set to the second moving image effect executing means or the third moving image effect executing means The gaming machine according to feature K6 or K7 characterized in that

  According to the feature K8, since the determination of the moving image data of the distribution destination is performed before the timing at which the moving image display by the first moving image data ends, the moving image display by the first moving image data is performed In a certain period, a period for performing the expansion process on the moving image data of the distribution destination is secured. As a result, the start of the new moving image display after the end of the moving image display by the first moving image data is smoothly performed.

  Feature K9. When the moving image by the second moving image data or the moving image by the third moving image data is displayed after the moving image by the first moving image data is displayed, the expansion unit is configured to determine the timing from the determination timing. A game machine according to Feature K8, wherein expansion processing is performed on moving image data of a distribution destination by the effect distribution unit in a period until the end timing of moving image display by the first moving image data.

  According to the feature K9, the expansion process is executed only on the moving image data of the distribution destination among the second moving image data and the third moving image data. As a result, the processing load of the expansion processing can be suppressed, and the storage capacity required in the expansion area can be reduced.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature K group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Also, a configuration is known in which moving image data is provided as image data. Since moving image data has a larger data capacity than still image data, it is stored in a compressed state in a memory for image data. Therefore, in the case of using moving image data, the moving image data is expanded in a predetermined memory area using a decoder to form a plurality of still image data, and the plurality of still image data are previously made each time the image is updated. It needs to be used in a fixed order.

  Here, since it is necessary to decode and use moving image data compressed as described above, restrictions arise in its use, and restrictions on achieving diversification of display effects using moving image display accompanying it. It also happens. On the other hand, a configuration may be considered in which data is stored as a collection of still image data without compression, but in this case, the storage capacity of the memory for image data is extremely increased.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. ~ E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features H1 to H11, the above features I1 to I10, the above features J1 to J13, and any one of the following features L1 to L19 May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display screen;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display control means simultaneously displays a plurality of specific character images of the same type, and sets an image having a relatively high processing load required to display a part of the specific character images. Character image display control means (a function to execute data setting processing for effect in display CPU, setting processing for character effect in VDP 135, texture mapping processing for effect character) as an image with relatively low processing load required to display for a part A game machine having a function of executing drawing processing including:

  According to the feature L1, since the specific character image of the same type is simultaneously displayed, it is possible to give thickness to the display content, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the display effect.

  Further, it is possible to simultaneously display a specific character image having a relatively high processing load required for displaying and an image character image having a relatively low processing load required for displaying as a specific character image of the same type. . This makes it possible to reduce the processing load as compared to the case where only a specific character image having a relatively high processing load required to display as a specific character is displayed, and to display as a specific character. It is possible to display in high quality as compared with the case where only a specific character image having a relatively low processing load required is displayed. This makes it possible to perform a display with a high degree of attention of the player while suppressing the processing load.

Feature L2. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display screen;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display control means is
A series of action effecting means for effecting that a plurality of character images are grouped together in a part of the display screen, and that each group of character images in the group performs a series of movements over a plurality of update timings When,
Among the character images included in the group, the processing load required to relatively display a part is relatively high, while the processing load required to relatively display a part is Character image display control means (function to execute data setting process for effect in display CPU, function to execute setting process for character effect in VDP 135, function to execute drawing process including texture mapping process for effect character) with relatively low image ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L2, since a series of movements are displayed in a state where a plurality of character images are grouped, it is possible to change the display content and improve the player's attention to display effects It becomes possible.

  In addition, as a character image having a relatively high processing load required to display a part of a group of characters, a character image having a relatively low processing load required to display another part is displayed. Can. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load as compared to the case where only a character image that requires relatively high processing load to be displayed as a group of characters is displayed, and is displayed as a group of characters. It is possible to display with high quality as compared with the case of displaying only a character image having a relatively low processing load required for causing the processing. This makes it possible to perform a display with a high degree of attention of the player while suppressing the processing load.

Feature L3. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display screen;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display control means causes a plurality of specific character images of the same type to be simultaneously displayed, and makes a part of the specific character images a relatively high definition image while a part of the specific character images is relatively low. Character image display control means (a function to execute effect data setting process in display CPU, a function to execute character presentation setting process in VDP 135, a function to execute drawing process including texture mapping process of effect character) to be a fine image A game machine characterized by having

  According to the feature L3, since the specific character image of the same type is simultaneously displayed, it is possible to give thickness to the display content, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the display effect.

  Further, it is possible to simultaneously display a high definition specific character image and a low definition specific character image as the same type of specific character image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load as compared to the case where only a high definition specific character image is displayed as a specific character, and the case where only a low definition specific character image is displayed as a specific character. It is possible to make a high definition display as compared with. This makes it possible to perform a display with a high degree of attention of the player while suppressing the processing load.

  It should be noted that the high definition specific character image is an image which becomes high definition at the time of display while the processing load required for displaying is relatively high, and the processing required to display the low definition specific character image Although the load is relatively low, the image may be configured to be low definition in display.

Feature L4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display screen;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display control means is
A series of action effecting means for effecting that a plurality of character images are grouped together in a part of the display screen, and that each group of character images in the group performs a series of movements over a plurality of update timings When,
Character image display control means (for effect in the display CPU) for relatively high-resolution images of a part of the character images included in the group, and relatively low-resolution images of a part of the character images A function of executing data setting processing, a setting processing of character effects in VDP 135, and a function of executing drawing processing including texture mapping processing of effect characters);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L4, since a series of movements are displayed in a state where a plurality of character images are grouped, it is possible to change the display content and improve the player's attention to display effects It becomes possible.

  Further, it is possible to display a part of the characters in a group as a high definition character image and a part of the others as a low definition character image. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared to the case where only a high definition character image is displayed as a group of characters, and the case where only a low definition character image is displayed as a group of characters It is possible to make a high definition display as compared with. This makes it possible to perform a display with a high degree of attention of the player while suppressing the processing load.

  It should be noted that the high definition specific character image is an image which becomes high definition at the time of display while the processing load required for displaying is relatively high, and the processing required to display the low definition specific character image Although the load is relatively low, the image may be configured to be low definition in display.

Feature L5. Display storage means (memory module 133) for storing in advance low definition image data (plate-like polygons) and high definition image data higher than the low definition image data (character shape object);
The character image display control means displays the low definition image using the low definition image data, and displays the high definition image using the high definition image data. Feature L3 or L4 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature L5, since a high definition image and a low definition image are displayed using separate image data, it is compared with a case where a high definition image and a low definition image are displayed using the same image data. To reduce the possibility of the processing configuration becoming complicated.

  Feature L6. The character image display control means simultaneously displays the low definition image and the high definition image on the display screen when the character image is displayed for a predetermined number or more (steps S1502 and S1503 in the display CPU 131). A gaming machine according to any one of features L3 to L5, which is a function of executing processing.

  According to the feature L6, when the processing load for displaying a predetermined number or more of characters is increased, the processing load is reduced by displaying a high definition image and a low definition image, and the number of characters is less than the predetermined number When the processing load to be displayed is not large, a high definition image can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the image quality while reducing the processing load.

  Feature L7. The character image display control means is a group of the high definition image and the low definition image grouped together in a predetermined range of a part of the display screen, and the high definition image in the group A feature L3 is characterized in that the low definition image is displayed so as to make a series of movements over a plurality of update timings, and the low definition image is sandwiched between a plurality of high definition images. To the game machine according to any one of L6.

  According to the feature L7, since the high definition image and the low definition image are displayed in a series of movements in a group, the display contents can be changed, and the player pays attention to the display effect It is possible to improve the degree.

  In addition, by displaying a low definition image with a plurality of high definition images in between, it is possible to make the low definition image fit in with the high definition image and to be displayed. As a result, the processing load can be reduced without making a low definition image noticeable.

  Feature L8. In the character image display control means, the character images are grouped together in a predetermined range of a part of the display screen, and the character images grouped as a group move in series over a plurality of update timings. And the display size is relatively reduced for a part of the character images, and the low definition image is displayed for the character images having a small display size. Feature L3 To the gaming machine according to any one of L7.

  According to the feature L8, since a series of movements are displayed in a state where the character images are grouped, it is possible to change the display content and improve the player's attention to the display effect It becomes possible.

  Further, since a low definition image is displayed for a character image having a small display size, the processing load can be reduced without making the low definition image conspicuous.

Feature L9. Arrangement means for arranging a plurality of specific character image data which is an object in a virtual three-dimensional space (function to execute data setting process for effect in display CPU, function to execute setting process for character effect in VDP 135, camera coordinate in VDP 135 Function of executing conversion processing to a system, a viewpoint setting unit for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and projecting the specific character image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint; Setting means for drawing that generates generation data based on data projected on a plane; storage means that stores generation data (drawing data) generated by the generation means;
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In the gaming machine provided with
The display control means uses the generated data to simultaneously display a plurality of the specific character images of the same type, and a part of the specific characters is a relatively high definition image A game machine characterized by comprising means for displaying an image which is a relatively low definition image for a part.

  According to the feature L9, it is possible to simultaneously display the high definition specific character image and the low definition specific character image as the same type of specific character image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load as compared to the case where only a high definition specific character image is displayed as a specific character, and the case where only a low definition specific character image is displayed as a specific character. It is possible to make a high definition display as compared with. This makes it possible to perform a display with a high degree of attention of the player while suppressing the processing load.

  In addition, various character images can be displayed according to the arrangement position of the character image data in the virtual three-dimensional space and the viewpoint position.

  It should be noted that the high definition specific character image is an image which becomes high definition at the time of display while the processing load required for displaying is relatively high, and the processing required to display the low definition specific character image Although the load is relatively low, the image may be configured to be low definition in display.

Feature L10. Arrangement means for arranging a plurality of character image data as objects in a virtual three-dimensional space, viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the character image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint And setting means for drawing which generates generation data based on the data projected onto the projection plane, and storage means for storing generation data (drawing data) generated by the generation means.
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In the gaming machine provided with
The arrangement unit is a group in which a plurality of the character image data are collected in a predetermined range in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a plurality of the character image data in the group is a plurality of update timings. A plurality of character image data are arranged so as to make a series of movements (a function for executing data setting processing for effect in display CPU, a function for executing setting processing for character effect in VDP 135, camera coordinate system in VDP 135 Function to execute conversion processing),
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of character images are relatively high definition images in part, and relatively low definition in part.

  According to the feature L10, a high definition character image and a low definition character image can be simultaneously displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load as compared to the case where only a high definition character image is displayed as a character, and a high definition display as compared to the case where only a low definition character image is displayed as a character. It is possible to This makes it possible to perform a display with a high degree of attention of the player while suppressing the processing load.

  In addition, various character images can be displayed according to the arrangement position of the character image data in the virtual three-dimensional space and the viewpoint position.

  In addition, since the arrangement means arranges a group of a plurality of character image data to make a series of motions, the image to be displayed can also display the aspect that the group makes a series of motions, changing to the display content It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the display effect.

  It should be noted that the high definition specific character image is an image which becomes high definition at the time of display while the processing load required for displaying is relatively high, and the processing required to display the low definition specific character image Although the load is relatively low, the image may be configured to be low definition in display.

Feature L11. The character image data includes a character shape object which is three-dimensional information modeled in the shape of the character, and a plate-like object (plate-like polygon) to which the texture of the character image is attached on at least one surface. Yes,
The gaming machine according to feature L9 or L10, wherein the high definition image is an image based on the character shape object, and the low definition image is an image based on the plate-like object.

  According to the feature L11, a character image can be displayed using a character shape object and a plate-like object as character image data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to the case of displaying the character image using only the character shape object, and compared to the case of displaying the character image using only the plate-like object. It becomes possible to make a high definition display.

  Further, since a plate-like object and a character-shaped object are used, various images can be displayed according to the arrangement position and the viewpoint position in the virtual three-dimensional space.

  Feature L12. The gaming machine according to the feature L11, wherein the arranging unit arranges the plate-like object while changing the rotation angle over a plurality of update timings (a function of executing setting processing of the rotation angle in the display CPU 131). .

  According to the feature L12, by changing the rotation angle of the plate-like object, it is possible to change the posture of the plate-like object in the virtual three-dimensional space over a plurality of update timings. The image of the attached surface can also be changed over multiple update timings. As a result, the specific character image pasted as a texture can be deformed and displayed, and an image with motion can be displayed while reducing the processing load.

Feature L13. The plate-like object is image data defined such that front and back surfaces are present across an edge portion,
The arrangement means arranges the plate-like object such that only the edge portion of the plate-like object is not projected when the plate-like object is projected onto the projection plane. The gaming machine according to feature L11 or L12.

  According to the feature L13, since only the edge portion is not projected on the projection plane, and the plate-like object is arranged such that one of the front and back surfaces is projected, the texture image is attached to the surface By this, it is possible to prevent the problem that the surface to which the texture image is attached is not projected. In particular, when the present configuration is applied to the feature L12, the surface to which the texture image is attached can be displayed while changing the rotation angle, and a moving image can be stably displayed.

  Feature L14. The arrangement means arranges the plate-like object at different rotation angles over a plurality of update timings so that one surface of the plate-like object is always projected onto the projection plane. Feature L13 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature L14, only one surface is projected whenever a plate-like object is projected on the projection plane, so that the texture image is always attached by pasting the texture image on the one surface. The face can be displayed. Further, since the rotation angle is changed and arranged over a plurality of update timings, the plate-like object can be displayed in a moving manner. This makes it possible to reliably display the surface to which the texture image is attached, while displaying the plate-like object in a moving manner.

  Feature L15. The arrangement means moves the plate-like object along a predetermined trajectory over a plurality of update timings and arranges the character-shaped object at a position aligned in a predetermined direction with respect to the plate-like object. The game machine according to any one of the features L11 to L14, wherein the game machine is moved along a track having the same shape as the track over the plurality of update timings.

  According to the feature L15, since the plate-like object and the character-shaped object are displayed in the same position while being arranged at the side by side position, display effects are performed without making the plate-like object stand out be able to.

  Feature L16. The arrangement means arranges the plate-like object and the character shape object at the same time (a function of executing the processing of step S1502 and step S1503 in the display CPU 131) when the character image is displayed a predetermined number or more. The gaming machine according to any one of features L11 to L15.

  According to the feature L16, when the processing load for displaying a predetermined number or more of characters is increased, the processing load is reduced by displaying the character image using the plate-like object and the character shape object, and the character is reduced. When the processing load for displaying less than a predetermined number is not large, a character shape object can be used to display a character image. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the image quality while reducing the processing load.

  Feature L17. The high-definition image and the low-definition image included in the generated data are grouped together in a predetermined range of a part of the display screen, and the high-definition image and the grouped as a group A feature characterized in that a low definition image is displayed so as to make a series of movements over a plurality of update timings, and a plurality of high definition images are displayed sandwiching the low definition image. The gaming machine according to any one of L9 to L16.

  According to the feature L7, since the high definition image and the low definition image are displayed in a series of movements in a group, the display contents can be changed, and the player pays attention to the display effect It is possible to improve the degree.

  In addition, by displaying a low definition image with a plurality of high definition images in between, it is possible to make the low definition image fit in with the high definition image and to be displayed. As a result, the processing load can be reduced without making a low definition image noticeable.

  Feature L18. The character images included in the generated data are grouped together in a predetermined range of a portion of the display screen, and the character images grouped together form a series of movements over a plurality of update timings. And the display size is relatively reduced for a part of the character images, and the low definition image is displayed for the character images having a small display size. The gaming machine according to any one of L9 to L17.

  According to the feature L18, since a series of movements are displayed in a group of character images, it is possible to change the display content and improve the player's attention to display effects. Is possible.

  In addition, since a low definition image is displayed for a character image with a small display size, the processing load can be reduced without making the low definition image noticeable.

Characteristic L19. Projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, arrangement means for arranging character image data which is an object in a virtual three-dimensional space, a viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, Setting means for drawing that generates generation data based on the data projected onto the projection plane; storage means for storing generation data (drawing data) generated by the generation means;
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In the gaming machine provided with
The character image data includes a plate-like object to which the texture of the character image is pasted on at least one surface,
A game machine characterized in that the arrangement means arranges the plate-like object while changing the rotation angle over a plurality of update timings (a function of executing a setting process of the rotation angle in the display CPU 131).

  According to the feature L19, by changing the rotation angle of the plate-like object, it is possible to change the posture of the plate-like object in the virtual three-dimensional space over a plurality of update timings. The image of the attached surface can also be changed over multiple update timings. As a result, the specific character image pasted as a texture can be deformed and displayed, and an image with motion can be displayed while reducing the processing load.

  The invention of the feature L group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to gaming is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control substrate, but are mounted on the control substrate in a state in which they are integrated.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is known a liquid crystal display device on which a display device having a display screen is mounted. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory ( For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data in which a polygon to which a texture is attached is projected onto a plane from a desired viewpoint is created. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, it is considered that by displaying a large number of individual images, it is possible to flash the display effect to improve the player's attention. In this case, although it is conceivable to display many types of individual images, since many types of individual images must be prepared in advance in the design stage, the workload on the designer is increased. On the other hand, it is conceivable to reduce the work load on the designer at the design stage by displaying many individual images of the same type.

  However, even if a large number of individual images of the same type are displayed, the large number of individual images to be displayed does not change, and it is conceivable that the processing load increases and processing drops occur.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features L1 to L19, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. ~ E8, the features F1 to F15, the features G1 to G9, the features H1 to H11, the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J13, and the features limited to any one of the features K1 to K9 are applied May be In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

  Hereinafter, basic configurations of various game machines to which the above-described features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means A game machine, wherein variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display device, 48 ... Operation device for presentation as an operation reception means, 50 ... Main control device as control means on the upstream side, 53 ... ROM, 70 ... Display control device, 72 ... Display CPU 73: work RAM 74: memory module 76: VDP 81c: area for combined data as a storage area for grouping 82a, 82b: frame area as storage means for setting, 93: video decoder as expansion means , 94: display circuit, 97: scaler as data adjustment means, 101: controller, 102: NAND flash memory, 111: I / F, 113: controller CPU as management means, 114: control as management information storage means ROM, 117 ... cache memory as storage means, 119 ... boot memory, 13 ... display CPU, 132 ... work RAM, 133 ... memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142a, 142b ... frame area as setting storage means, 143 ... Z buffer as comparison storage means, 145 ... as grouping storage area Buffer for mode 155, display circuit 161, controller 162, NAND flash memory 171, I / F, 173 controller CPU as a management means 174 control ROM as a management information storage means 177 Memory for cache as storage means, 179: Memory for boot, CH5: Sprite for smooth movement, G: Display screen, PA1: Overlap area, PC35, PC36: Connected object, PD2 to PD10: Divided part data, PD12 to PD15 ... Division data group, PD 19 ... Partial addition data as light value adjustment data, PD22 to PD25 ... partial α data, PD26, PD27 ... symbol sprite data, PD30 to PD33 ... partial α data, PD37, PD38 ... partial α data, PD48, PD49 ... Sprite data, PD 54 to PD 56 ... Moving image data, PL 5 ... Partial display area.

Claims (1)

Display means having a display screen;
Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display control means causes a plurality of specific character images of the same type to be simultaneously displayed, and makes a part of the specific character images a relatively high definition image while a part of the specific character images is relatively low. It has character image display control means to make it a fine image,
The character image display control means
The high definition image and the low definition image are grouped together in a predetermined range of a part of the display screen, and the high definition image and the low definition image which are the group are a plurality of A first means for displaying a series of movements over the update timing;
In the case of display by the first means, a second means for displaying so as to sandwich the low definition image by a plurality of the high definition images;
A unit for relatively reducing the display size of a part of the character images and displaying the low definition image for the character images having a small display size in the case of display by the first means;
A game machine characterized by comprising: